Husqvarna 16530EXL Snow Blower User Manual

Husqvarna 16530EXL Snow Blower User Manual
This product is eligible for the P2HD
5 Year Warranty Repair Program. For
details, see page 173.
Operating Instructions
Memory Card Camera-Recorder
Model No. Model No. AG-HPX370P
AG-HPX371E
Before operating this product, please read the instructions carefully and save this manual for
future use.
SS0310TU0 -PS
Printed in Japan
ENGLISH
VQT2T24
Read this first! (For AG-HPX370P)
indicates safety information.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER TO SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead
symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is
intended to alert the user to the presence
of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within
the product’s enclosure that may be of
sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of
electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to
the presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the appliance.
In order to maintain adequate ventilation, do not
install or place this unit in a bookcase, built-in
cabinet or any other confined space. To prevent
risk of electric shock or fire hazard due to
overheating, ensure that curtains and any other
materials do not obstruct the ventilation.
CAUTION:
Do not lift the unit by its handle while the tripod is
attached. When the tripod is attached, its weight
will also affect the unit’s handle, possibly causing
the handle to break and hurting the user. To carry
the unit while the tripod is attached, take hold of
the tripod.
CAUTION:
Excessive sound pressure from earphones and
headphones can cause hearing loss.
WARNING:
CAUTION:
WARNING:
CAUTION:
• To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do
not expose this equipment to rain or moisture.
• To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, keep
this equipment away from all liquids. Use and
store only in locations which are not exposed
to the risk of dripping or splashing liquids, and
do not place any liquid containers on top of the
equipment.
Always keep memory cards (optional accessory)
or accessories (FRONT AUDIO LEVEL knob,
knob screw, BNC cap, XLR connector cap, rear
lens cap, zoom lever, connector cap) out of the
reach of babies and small children.
CAUTION:
To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock and
annoying interference, use the recommended
accessories only.
CAUTION:
Do not jar, swing, or shake the unit by its handle
while the conversion lens or another accessory is
attached.
Due to the added weight of the conversion lens,
any strong jolt to the handle may damage the
unit or result in personal injury.
CAUTION:
Do not leave the unit in direct contact with the
skin for long periods of time when in use.
Low temperature burn injuries may be suffered
if the high temperature parts of this unit are in
direct contact with the skin for long periods of
time.
When using the equipment for long periods of
time, make use of the tripod.
• Danger of explosion or fire if battery is
mistreated.
• Replace only with same or specified type.
• Do not disassemble or dispose of in fire.
• Do not store in temperatures over 60°C (140°F).
• Do not leave the battery in an automobile
exposed to direct sunlight for a long period of
time with doors and windows closed.
• Use specified charger.
Read this first! (For AG-HPX370P) (continued)
indicates safety information.
FCC NOTICE (USA)
Declaration of Conformity
Model Number:
AG-HPX370P
Trade Name:
Panasonic
Responsible Party:Panasonic Corporation of North America One Panasonic Way, Secaucus, NJ 07094
Support contact:
1-800-524-1448
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
To assure continued compliance, follow the attached installation instructions and do not make any
unauthorized modifications.
CAUTION:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio
or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
The user may find the booklet “Something About Interference”
available from FCC local regional offices helpful.
FCC Warning:
To assure continued FCC emission limit compliance, follow the attached installation instructions and
the user must use only shielded interface cables when connecting to host computer or peripheral
devices. Also, any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment could void the user’s
authority to operate this device.
NOTIFICATION (Canada)
This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
IMPORTANT
“Unauthorized recording of copyrighted television programs, video tapes and other materials may infringe the
right of copyright owners and be contrary to copyright laws.”
For USA-California Only
This product contains a CR Coin Cell Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material – special handling
may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
A rechargeable battery that is recyclable powers the product you have purchased.
Read this first! (For AG-HPX371E)
indicates safety information.
WARNING:
• To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do
not expose this equipment to rain or moisture.
• To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, keep
this equipment away from all liquids. Use and
store only in locations which are not exposed
to the risk of dripping or splashing liquids, and
do not place any liquid containers on top of the
equipment.
WARNING:
Always keep memory cards (optional accessory)
or accessories (FRONT AUDIO LEVEL knob,
knob screw, BNC cap, XLR connector cap, rear
lens cap, zoom lever, connector cap) out of the
reach of babies and small children.
CAUTION:
Do not remove panel covers by unscrewing
them.
To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not
remove cover. No user serviceable parts inside.
Refer servicing to qualified service personnel.
CAUTION:
To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock and
annoying interference, use the recommended
accessories only.
CAUTION:
Do not jar, swing, or shake the unit by its handle while the
conversion lens or another accessory is attached.
Due to the added weight of the conversion lens, any
strong jolt to the handle may damage the unit or result in
personal injury.
CAUTION:
Do not lift the unit by its handle while the tripod is
attached. When the tripod is attached, its weight
will also affect the unit’s handle, possibly causing
the handle to break and hurting the user. To carry
the unit while the tripod is attached, take hold of
the tripod.
CAUTION:
Excessive sound pressure from earphones and
headphones can cause hearing loss.
CAUTION:
Do not leave the unit in direct contact with the
skin for long periods of time when in use.
Low temperature burn injuries may be suffered
if the high temperature parts of this unit are in
direct contact with the skin for long periods of
time.
When using the equipment for long periods of
time, make use of the tripod.
CAUTION:
• Danger of explosion or fire if battery is
mistreated.
• Replace only with same or specified type.
• Do not disassemble or dispose of in fire.
• Do not store in temperatures over 60°C (140°F).
• Do not leave the battery in an automobile
exposed to direct sunlight for a long period of
time with doors and windows closed.
• Use specified charger.
CAUTION:
In order to maintain adequate ventilation, do not
install or place this unit in a bookcase, built-in
cabinet or any other confined space. To prevent
risk of electric shock or fire hazard due to
overheating, ensure that curtains and any other
materials do not obstruct the ventilation.
IMPORTANT
“Unauthorized recording of copyrighted television programs, video tapes and other materials may infringe the
right of copyright owners and be contrary to copyright laws.”
EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur.
EEE Complies with Directive of Turkey.
Read this first! (For AG-HPX371E) (continued)
EMC NOTICE FOR THE PURCHASER/USER OF THE APPARATUS
1. Applicable standards and operating environment
The apparatus is compliant with:
standards EN55103-1 and EN55103-2 1996.11, and
electromagnetic environments E1, E2, E3 and E4.
2. Pre-requisite conditions to achieving compliance with the above standards
<1> Peripheral equipment to be connected to the apparatus and special connecting cables
The purchaser/user is urged to use only equipment which has been recommended by us as peripheral
equipment to be connected to the apparatus.
The purchaser/user is urged to use only the connecting cables described below.
<2> For the connecting cables, use shielded cables which suit the intended purpose of the apparatus.
Video signal connecting cables
Use double shielded coaxial cables, which are designed for 75-ohm type high-frequency applications, for SDI
(Serial Digital Interface).
Coaxial cables, which are designed for 75-ohm type high-frequency applications, are recommended for analog
video signals.
Audio signal connecting cables
If your apparatus supports AES/EBU serial digital audio signals, use cables designed for AES/EBU.
Use shielded cables, which provide quality performance for high-frequency transmission applications, for analog
audio signals.
Other connecting cables (IEEE1394, USB)
Use shielded cables, which provide quality performance for high-frequency applications, as connecting cables.
When connecting to the DVI signal terminal, use a cable with a ferrite core.
If your apparatus is supplied with ferrite core(s), they must be attached on cable(s) following instructions in this
manual.
3. Performance level
The performance level of the apparatus is equivalent to or better than the performance level required by these
standards.
However, the apparatus may be adversely affected by interference if it is being used in an EMC environment, such as an
area where strong electromagnetic fields are generated (by the presence of signal transmission towers, cellular phones,
etc.). In order to minimize the adverse effects of the interference on the apparatus in cases like this, it is recommended
that the following steps be taken with the apparatus being affected and with its operating environment:
1. Place the apparatus at a distance from the source of the interference.
2. Change the direction of the apparatus.
3. Change the connection method used for the apparatus.
EU
TO REMOVE BATTERY
Main Power Battery (Ni-Cd / Ni-MH / Li-ion Battery)
● To detach the battery, please proceed in the reverse order of the installation method described in this manual.
● If a battery made by any other manufacturer is to be used, check the Operating Instructions accompanying the battery.
Back-up Battery (Lithium Battery)
● For the removal of the battery for disposal at the end of its service life, please consult your dealer.
 SDHC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
 MMC (Multi Media Card) is a registered trademark of Infineon Technologies AG.
 Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
 Screenshots are used in accordance with Microsoft Corporation guidelines.
 Apple, Macintosh, and Mac OS are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Inc. in the United States
and/or other countries.
 Unislot is a registered trademark of Ikegami Tsushinki Co., LTD.
 Other model names, company names, and product names listed in these operating instructions are
trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
 This product is licensed under the AVC Patent Portfolio License for the personal and non-commercial use of
a consumer, and no license is granted or shall be implied for any use other than the personal uses detailed
below.
– To encode video in compliance with the AVC standard (“AVC Video”)
–T
o decode AVC Video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal and non-commercial activity
– To decode AVC Video that was obtained from a video provider licensed to provide AVC Video
• Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC (http://www.mpegla.com).
Note concerning illustrations in these instructions
• Illustrations (camera-recorder, menu screens, etc.) in these operating instructions differ slightly from the
actual camera-recorder.
Note concerning screenshots in these instructions
• Screenshots from the AG-HPX370P are used in these operating instructions.
References
• References are shown as (Page 00).
Terminology
• Both SD Memory Cards and SDHC Memory Cards as referred to as “SD Memory Cards” in these operating
instructions.
• Memory cards that have the “P2” logo (e.g., AJ-P2C064AG, an optional accessory) are referred to as “P2
cards” in these operating instructions.
• Video that is created during a single recording operation is referred to as a “clip” in these operating
instructions.
Precautions for Use
Caution regarding laser beams
The MOS sensor may be damaged if it is exposed to laser light.
When using the camera-recorder in locations where laser irradiation equipment is used, be careful not to allow the laser
beam to shine directly on the lens.
PLEASE NOTE:
When preparing to record important events, always shoot some advance test footage, to verify that both pictures and
sound are being recorded normally.
Should video or audio recording fail due to a malfunction of this camera-recorder or the P2 cards used, we will not
assume liability for such failure.
Disposing and transferring ownership of memory card devices
Formatting or deleting a memory card device in this camera or a PC will only change file management data and leave
data on the card intact. It is recommended that the card either be physically destroyed or that commercially sold software
be used to completely delete any data on the card. Note that managing card data is the owner’s responsibility.
Information on software for this product
1.Included with this product is software licensed under the GNU General Public License (GPL) and GNU Lesser
General Public License (LGPL), and users are hereby informed that they have the right to obtain, change and
redistribute the source codes of this software.
Details on GPL and LGPL can be found on the installation CD provided with the unit. Refer to the folder called
“LDOC”. (Details are given in the original (English-language) text.)
To obtain the source codes, go to the following home page:
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
The manufacturer asks users to refrain from directing inquiries concerning the source codes they have obtained and
other details to its representatives.
2.Included with this product is software which is licensed under MIT-License.
Details on MIT-License can be found on the installation CD provided with the unit. Refer to the folder called “LDOC”.
(Details are given in the original (English-language) text.)
Contents
Read this first! (For AG-HPX370P) . ................................................................................. 2
Read this first! (For AG-HPX371E) . ................................................................................. 4
Precautions for Use ......................................................................................................... 7
Chapter 1 Overview
Camera Unit Features .................................................................................................... 11
Recording and Playback Features ................................................................................ 13
Outline of operations . .................................................................................................... 15
Saving and editing on external devices ................................................................ 15
System Configuration . ................................................................................................... 16
Standard accessories .................................................................................................... 17
Chapter 2 Parts and Their Functions
Power Supply and Accessory Mounting Section . ................................................. 18
Audio (input) Function Section .............................................................................. 19
Audio (output) Function Section ............................................................................ 20
Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions Section . ......................................... 21
Menu/Thumbnail Operation Section ...................................................................... 25
Time Code Section ................................................................................................ 26
Warning and Status Display Functions .................................................................. 27
LCD Monitor ........................................................................................................... 27
Viewfinder .............................................................................................................. 28
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
Setting Date and Time of Internal Clock ........................................................................ 29
P2 Cards ........................................................................................................................ 31
Inserting P2 Cards ................................................................................................. 31
Removing P2 Cards ............................................................................................... 31
To Prevent Accidental Erasure of P2 Card Content ............................................... 32
P2 CARD ACCESS LED and status of P2 cards . .................................................. 32
P2 card recording times ........................................................................................ 33
Handling P2 Card Recording . ............................................................................... 34
Basic Procedures .......................................................................................................... 35
Shooting ................................................................................................................. 36
Normal Recording . ................................................................................................ 37
Standard and Native Recording .................................................................................... 38
Standard recording (pull-down recording) ............................................................ 38
Native recording .................................................................................................... 38
Variable Frame Rate (VFR) Recording . ......................................................................... 39
Native VFR Recording ........................................................................................... 39
Standard VFR recording(pulldown recording) ....................................................... 39
Using VFR Recording Function ............................................................................. 40
Special Recording Modes ............................................................................................. 42
Pre-recording (PRE REC) . ..................................................................................... 42
Interval recording (INTERVAL REC) . ..................................................................... 43
One-shot recording (ONE SHOT REC) .................................................................. 43
Loop recording (LOOP REC) ................................................................................. 44
One-clip recording (ONE CLIP REC) ..................................................................... 44
PROXY Recording Function (Optional) . ................................................................ 45
Hot Swap Recording . ............................................................................................ 46
REC REVIEW Function ........................................................................................... 46
Shot Marker (SHOT MARK) Recording Function ................................................... 46
Text Memo Recording Function ............................................................................. 46
Normal and Variable Speed Playback . ......................................................................... 47
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
Selecting recording signals ................................................................................... 48
List of recording formats and functions ................................................................. 49
Recording settings and recording function table .................................................. 51
Selecting video output ........................................................................................... 52
List of recording, playback and output formats . ................................................... 52
Adjusting the White Balance and Black Balance .......................................................... 55
Adjusting the White Balance . ................................................................................ 55
Adjusting the Black Balance . ................................................................................ 56
Setting the Electronic Shutter ........................................................................................ 58
Setting the Shutter Mode and Speed .................................................................... 58
Placing the Camera-recorder in SYNCHRO SCAN Mode ..................................... 59
FBC (Flash Band Compensation) Function ................................................................... 60
Chapter 5 Preparation
Power Supply ................................................................................................................. 95
Mounting the Battery and Setting the Battery Type ............................................... 95
Use of the external DC power supply .................................................................... 97
Mounting and Adjusting the Lens .................................................................................. 98
Mounting the Lens ................................................................................................. 98
Adjusting the Lens Flange Back ............................................................................ 99
White Shading Compensation ............................................................................. 100
Setting Chromatic Aberration Compensation (CAC) .......................................... 101
Preparing for Audio Input ............................................................................................ 104
When Using the Front Microphone ...................................................................... 104
Using a wireless receiver ..................................................................................... 104
When Using Audio Devices ................................................................................. 105
Attaching Accessories ................................................................................................. 106
Mounting the Camera on a Tripod ....................................................................... 106
Attaching the Shoulder Strap . ............................................................................. 106
Attaching the Rain Cover ..................................................................................... 107
Attaching the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL Control Knob . ........................................... 107
Attaching the Eye Cup ......................................................................................... 107
DC OUT Connector and External REC Start/Stop Switch Connection ........................ 108
Connecting the AJ-RC10G Remote Control Unit ......................................................... 109
Connecting the AG-EC4G Extension Control Unit ....................................................... 109
Chapter 6 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails
Thumbnail Operations ................................................................................................. 110
Setting FBC function .............................................................................................. 60
Assigning functions to USER buttons ............................................................................ 61
Selecting Audio Input Signals and Adjusting Recording Levels ................................... 62
Selecting Audio Input Signals . .............................................................................. 62
Adjusting Recording Levels . ................................................................................. 62
Selecting Function for the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL Control . ................................... 63
CH3 and CH4 Recording Levels ........................................................................... 63
Setting Time Data .......................................................................................................... 64
Recording time codes and user bits . .................................................................... 65
Setting user bits ..................................................................................................... 67
Entering the User Bits ............................................................................................ 67
Setting the Time Code ........................................................................................... 69
Externally Locking the Time Code ......................................................................... 71
Outputting the time code externally . ..................................................................... 72
GENLOCK and time code input/output connection and setup ............................. 73
Counter Setting and Display .................................................................................. 73
Viewfinder Screen Status Displays ................................................................................ 74
Viewfinder Status Indication Layout . ..................................................................... 74
Selecting Viewfinder Display Information .............................................................. 74
Screen displays ..................................................................................................... 75
Center Information Display .................................................................................... 78
Checking and displaying shooting status ............................................................. 80
MODE CHECK indication ...................................................................................... 81
Center marker display ........................................................................................... 82
Safety zone markers .............................................................................................. 82
Audio level meter magnification ............................................................................ 82
Zebra pattern display ............................................................................................ 83
Focus assist function ............................................................................................. 84
Adjusting and setting the LCD monitor . ........................................................................ 85
Waveform monitor function .................................................................................... 86
Adjusting and Setting up the Viewfinder ....................................................................... 87
Adjusting Right and Left Viewfinder Position ......................................................... 87
Diopter Adjustment ................................................................................................ 87
Using the Viewfinder .............................................................................................. 87
Emphasizing Image Outlines ................................................................................. 88
Setting the viewfinder to monochrome mode ........................................................ 88
Handling setup data ...................................................................................................... 89
Configuration of setup data files ............................................................................ 89
Handling SD memory cards .................................................................................. 90
Formatting, Writing and Reading an SD memory card . ........................................ 90
How to Use Scene File Data .................................................................................. 91
Saving scene files and other settings on SD memory cards ................................. 93
Thumbnail Manipulations Overview ..................................................................... 110
Thumbnail Screen ................................................................................................ 111
Selecting Thumbnails .......................................................................................... 113
Playing back Clips ............................................................................................... 113
Switching the Thumbnail Display . ....................................................................... 114
Changing thumbnails . ......................................................................................... 115
Shot Mark ............................................................................................................. 115
Text Memo . .......................................................................................................... 116
Deleting Clips ...................................................................................................... 117
Restoring Clips .................................................................................................... 118
Reconnection of Incomplete Clips . ..................................................................... 118
Copying Clips ...................................................................................................... 118
Setting of Clip Meta Data ..................................................................................... 119
Setting of Proxy (optional) . .................................................................................. 123
Formatting a P2 Card . ......................................................................................... 123
Formatting SD memory cards .............................................................................. 124
Setting the Thumbnail Display Mode ................................................................... 124
Properties . ........................................................................................................... 125
Chapter 7 Menu Operations
Viewfinder and LCD Menus ......................................................................................... 129
Using the menus .................................................................................................. 129
Initializing the menu settings ............................................................................... 130
Setup menu structure .................................................................................................. 131
Setup menu list ............................................................................................................ 133
SCENE FILE screen ............................................................................................. 133
SYSTEM SETUP screen ....................................................................................... 135
SW MODE screen ................................................................................................ 137
RECORDING SETUP screen . .............................................................................. 138
AUDIO SETUP screen . ........................................................................................ 140
OUTPUT SEL screen ........................................................................................... 142
DISPLAY SETUP screen . ..................................................................................... 143
BATTERY SETUP screen ...................................................................................... 144
CARD FUNCTIONS screen . ................................................................................ 146
LENS SETUP screen ............................................................................................ 146
OTHER FUNCTIONS screen . .............................................................................. 147
DIAGNOSTIC screen ........................................................................................... 148
OPTION MENU screen ........................................................................................ 148
Chapter 8 Connecting to External Devices
Functionality Provided by Connections to USB 2.0 Connector ................................... 149
Connecting to a computer in USB device mode ................................................. 149
USB host mode .................................................................................................... 150
Connections to the DVCPRO/DV Connector ............................................................... 155
Recording signals input to the DVCPRO/DV connector ...................................... 155
Control of external devices through 1394 connection ......................................... 156
Chapter 9 Maintenance and Inspections
Inspections Before Shooting . ...................................................................................... 157
Preparing for Inspections .................................................................................... 157
Inspecting the Camera Unit ................................................................................. 157
Inspecting the Memory Recording Functions . .................................................... 158
Maintenance ................................................................................................................ 160
Eyepiece Care ..................................................................................................... 160
Cleaning Inside the Viewfinder ............................................................................ 160
Charging the internal battery ............................................................................... 160
Warning System ........................................................................................................... 161
Warning Description Tables ................................................................................. 161
Warning and Error Display for Thumbnail Operation and USB HOST MODE ..... 163
Updating the firmware incorporated into the unit ........................................................ 165
Chapter 10 Index
Chapter 11 Specifications
Dimensions and specifications .................................................................................... 170
Dimensions .......................................................................................................... 170
Specifications ...................................................................................................... 170
Connector signal description . ..................................................................................... 174
10
Chapter 1 Overview
 Multiple HD/SD formats
The camera supports both the HD and SD video formats making it ready for news gathering, program production
and film making in a wide range of professional applications and content production. In 1080i/720P HD recording for
broadcasting, the camera uses the highly reliable AVC-Intra or DVCPRO HD codec while also supporting SD multicodec (DVCPRO50, DVCPRO or DV) recording capability.
The AG-HPX370P/AG-HPX371E provides high quality and uncompressed, 16-bit, 48 kHz, 4-channel recording of audio
in all formats.
 Variable frame rate makes speed effects possible (in the 720P format)
The AG-HPX370P/AG-HPX371E comes with the variable frame rate feature developed for the VariCam HD Cinema
camera. In 720P mode *1, the frame rate can be set to any of 20 steps between 12P and 60P (50P). This puts features
such as undercranking (dropping frames) and overcranking (high frame rate) for quick motion and slow motion cine-like
effects at the disposal of the camera crew.
 Native mode/over 60P (50P) mode selectable
 Native mode:
Playing back a recording made at a frame rate set in the camera at the normal rate provides speed effects without
using a frame rate converter. Native mode also extends the recording time of a P2 card.
 720P over 60P (50P) mode:
Use of a DVCPRO HD recorder such as the AJ-HD1400 or the AG-HPG20 P2 portable recorder allows you to make
backup recordings of DVCPRO HD streams output from the DVCPRO/DV connector. *2
 1080/480 24P advanced mode
Recording 1080/24P or 480/24P makes it possible to select 24PA (advanced) mode *3. Using 2:3:3:2 pulldown, the 24PA
mode performs 60i conversion to enable nonlinear editing *4 maintaining an image quality that is better than normal 24P
(2:3 pulldown). Recording at 30P applies a 2:2 pulldown.
Camera Unit Features
 Progressive 3MOS sensor
The AG-HPX370P/AG-HPX371E is equipped with a newly developed 1/3-inch 2.2-megapixel 3MOS sensor that enables
high-sensitivity HD full pixel recording for high-resolution video.
 14-bit digital circuit
The high-performance DSP (Digital Signal Processor) in the camera offers 14-bit signal input and 20-bit internal
processing. It handles gamma settings and other adjustments for each R/G/B color in 1080/60i (50i) video as well as
conversion to all HD/SD formats (P/I conversion, line conversion and down conversion). Because of this high-quality
images can be produced in all video formats.
 Seven gamma curves including cine-like gamma
To expand camera capabilities, the AG-HPX370P/AG-HPX371E offers seven gamma curves including cine-like gamma
to easily produce recordings with the characteristic warm tone of film.
*1
*2
*3
*4
1080 and 480 (576) recording is performed at a fixed frame rate of 24P/30P (25P).
The AVC-Intra mode does not allow the output of a DVCPRO HD stream from the DVCPRO/DV connector.
Not available with the AVC-Intra codec.
For details on compatible systems, visit the support desk at the following website.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
24P and 30P indicate recording at 23.98P and 29.97P, respectively, while 60P and 60i indicate recording at 59.94P and
59.94i, respectively.
11
Chapter 1 Overview
The AG-HPX370P/AG-HPX371E P2 memory card camera-recorder features a camera unit equipped with a newly
developed 1/3-inch 2.2-megapixel 3MOS sensor and a recording and playback unit that provides AVC-Intra 100
compression recording as standard to offer HD full pixel and full sampling for high sensitivity, superb image quality, and
high-quality video.
It handles multiple HD and SD formats: AVC-Intra, DVCPRO HD, DVCPRO50, DVCPRO and DV compression recording.
The P2 card provides a reliability, speed and IT functionality that no other media can match and is destined to revolutionize
recording and editing paradigms.
 Slow, synchro and high speed shutter
Chapter 1 Overview
The shutter speed can be set from a slow speed of 1/6 s up to a maximum speed of 1/7200 s *1. Combined with the
variable frame rate functions, this allows you to create blurring or stop motion effects. The AG-HPX370P/AG-HPX371E
also features a synchro scan function that is ideal for capturing screen shots from a computer monitor.
 Scene file dial
This dial allows you to instantly retrieve settings that suit shooting conditions. Six preset files are provided, and you can
change the file names and their settings as desired. You can also save up to four files to an SD or SDHC memory card
(both referred to as “SD memory card” below) and load files from an SD memory card.
 Shooting assist functions
 USER buttons:
Three USER buttons each of which can be assigned a frequently used function for immediate access.
 Focus assist:
Magnifies the center portion of the image and displays a focus bar to facilitate focusing.
 Eight files for compensating lens chromatic aberration and four files for correcting shading for interchangeable lenses
are provided.
 Variable color temperature:
Allows fine adjustment after setting the white balance.
 REC REVIEW:
Provides a quick check of the last few seconds of the most recently recorded clip.
 4-position optical ND filter provided.
 Chromatic aberration compensation (CAC)
This function automatically corrects the registration error caused by the slight chromatic aberration that the lens cannot
compensate for, in order to minimize color bleeding into surrounding image areas.
 Remote control support
This camera supports the AJ-RC10G remote control unit (optional accessory) and the AG-EC4G extension control unit
(optional accessory). The remote control allows you to adjust camera image and recording controls at a distance while
viewing what you are shooting.
 Auto Tracking White Balance (ATW)
Automatically adjusts the white balance of the subject in real-time, a convenient function for quick adjustment in
recording situations where there is no time for normal white balance adjustment.
 DRS (Dynamic Range Stretcher) function
This function compresses the video signal level while maintaining contrast to extend the dynamic range making it
possible to correctly render highlight areas without overexposure and loss of detail that would otherwise occur. *2
 Camera extension system support
This camera can be connected to the AG-CA300G camera adapter (optional accessory) and the AG-BS300 base
station (optional accessory) to enable camera extension system recording. For details on connections to these devices,
refer to the connection instructions and precautions found in the instruction manuals for the AG-CA300G and AGBS300, and observe the instructions for the AG-HPX300P/AG-HPX301E.
*1 This is the shutter speed value when 3.0d is configured for the synchro scan mode.
*2 The DRS function is not available in 1080/30P, 1080/24P (1080/25P) modes.
12
 A variety of interfaces
 USB 2.0 connector (HOST/DEVICE)
A USB 2.0 connection to a computer or other device allows you to use P2 cards in the camera as mass storage.
The USB host function makes it possible to save P2 card data to an external hard disk connected via USB 2.0 and
clips stored on the hard disk can be viewed and written back to a P2 card.
 DVCPRO/DV input and output provided as standard feature
IEEE1394 compliant external devices can be connected to enable output and input via the digital interface.
Connect a 6-pin plug to this connector. Note that the connector does not support bus power.
Input and output via IEEE1394 is not available when the AVC-Intra codec is selected.
 P2 cards for high capacity, high speed and high reliability
In addition to exceptional resistance to shock, vibration and temperature fluctuations, the P2 (Professional Plug-in) card
has a reliability that guarantees long-term repeated recording/initialization that a tape or hard disk system with their
moving parts could never match.
The connectors are professional grade to withstand long-term continual insertion and removal.
The P2 card stores the AV data for each shooting session as a single file that is immediately accessible for nonlinear
editing or transfer over a network without digitizing. Transfer speeds far surpassing those of optical disks also help to
speed up production processes. The P2 card complies with PC card standards and can be directly plugged into the PC
card slot on a computer. *1
The two P2 card slots allow continuous recording on two P2 cards and also offer the following recording capabilities in a
memory card camera-recorder.
 Card selection:
In standby status, you can instantly select (switch to) the slot of the card you wish to record on *2 Recorded content
can be quickly passed on to editing or transferred to minimize interruptions in recording making it far more efficient
than systems where tapes or disks have to be exchanged.
 Hot-swap recording:
Cards can be replaced during recording. A full memory card can be replaced while recording is made on another
card. Successively swapping cards in this way gives you virtually unlimited recording capacity.
 Loop recording:
Setting the camera for consecutive overwriting, you can repeatedly rerecord on the inserted P2 cards, always
maintaining a recording of the most recent, specific period of time.
 Immediate startup and reliable data protection
When you press the REC button in standby mode, the camera instantly finds a blank area on the P2 card and begins
recording. Unlike a VTR system, there is no need to locate a blank section before recording. It can begin recording
immediately even when you are using it to preview video. In normal use, there is no chance of accidentally deleting a
recording. Recordings will not be erased unless you intentionally delete a file or initialize the card.
*1 This requires the installation of a P2 card driver (provided with each device). For details on the system requirements of
the P2 card driver, visit the support desk at the following website.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
*2 This assumes that the SLOT SEL function is assigned to a USER button (USER MAIN, USER1 or USER2).
13
Chapter 1 Overview
Recording and Playback Features
 Other features
Chapter 1 Overview
 Pre-rec:
This function provides a way to capture moments you otherwise would have missed. In the standby mode, the camera will
store video and audio for up to 3 seconds in HD and 7 seconds in SD. When you press the REC button, the three or seven
seconds of immediately prior video data stored in internal memory is added at the beginning of the clip you record.
 One-shot REC:
Convenient for producing animation, this mode records for a set time (from 1 frame to 1 second) each time you
press the REC button.
 Interval REC:
Recording one frame at a time at set intervals (from 2 frames to 10 minutes), this mode is useful for monitoring,
supervision and special ultra undercranking effects.
 One-clip REC:
Instead of creating a new clip for each recording session (i.e., operation from REC start to stop), this mode compiles
images from multiple recording sessions into a single clip. This allows you to handle the compiled recordings as
a single clip during thumbnail operations and editing, making it easier to transfer and copy recordings. Up to 99
recording sessions can be compiled as a single clip.
 Proxy recording (with AJ-YAX800G installed):
Installing an optional video encoder card (AJ-YAX800G) in P2 slot number 2 makes it possible to record MPEG4 format
video, time code data and other real-time data to P2 cards or SD memory cards simultaneous with camera recording
of video and audio. This is a convenient feature for checking clip content and speeding up editing work flow.
 Clip thumbnail preview
The camera records each cut as a clip (file) and automatically attaches a thumbnail image and file information to it. To
preview a clip on the LCD monitor or to check clip data, simply choose the clip you want from the list of thumbnails.
These thumbnails and the file data can be viewed on a PC (P2 Viewer *1) or processed in a nonlinear editing program.
 Shot marker and text memo
If desired, you can add a simple OK/reject shot marker to each clip either during or after recording. When a P2 card is
mounted in a PC (P2 Viewer), the PC will display only marked clips.
A text memo function is also provided. Pressing the USER button to which the text memo function has been assigned
anywhere in a clip during recording or in preview mode allows you to attach empty post-it like text memos (up to 100)
that can later be filled with text on a PC (P2 Viewer).
Using the camera copy function, you can create a new clip by stripping out the desired frames from a clip by copying
data between text memo labels.
 SD memory card slot
The camera provides an SD memory card slot for saving and loading scene files and user settings. A metadata upload file
(created using P2 Viewer) containing the name of the person who shot the video, the name of the reporter, the shooting location
or a text memo and other information can be saved to an SD memory card. This data file can be loaded as clip metadata.
 HD/SD SDI output and downconverter supported
Video line outputs (3 BNC connectors) are provided as standard. These outputs can flexibly handle both monitor and
line recording. A down-converter is also built-in. Aspect mode can also be selected.
 SDI OUT (HD/SD) 1 system, 2 outputs:
The HD-SDI outputs allow you to make backups on an external VTR (with HD-SDI input) in synch with REC button
operation. SD-SDI can also down convert and output HD content.
 VIDEO OUT:
Outputs down converted SD video (composite video).
 Fine adjustment of sound recording level
The camera features a front-mounted control for fine adjustment of the sound recording level. This control is particularly
useful for adjusting the sound level when you have to control both video and audio recording. The control can be disabled.
 Unislot wireless receiver compatible
The AG-HPX370P/AG-HPX371E is designed to work with optional slot wireless receivers. (page 104)
The camera supports 2-channel wireless receivers.
*1 “P2 Viewer” is a Windows® PC viewing software that can be downloaded free of charge by P2 card users.
14
Chapter 1 Overview
Outline of operations
The AG-HPX370P/AG-HPX371E records video on P2 cards. Excelling at high transfer speeds, the P2 card enables high
vision recording and smooth editing and dubbing.
Saving and editing on external devices
Using USB DEVICE mode to connect an external
device via the USB 2.0 connector (Page 149)
The data (file) is transferred for nonlinear editing on your computer
or other unit.
P2 card
Computer
USB2.0 (DEVICE)
Using USB HOST mode to connect an external
device via the USB 2.0 connector (Page 150)
The unit directly controls the external hard disk drive, and transfers
the data (file) to it.
External hard disk
USB2.0 (HOST)
Connecting an external device via the
DVCPRO/DV connector (IEEE1394 connector) (Page 155)
DVCPRO/DV (IEEE1394)
(Windows/Macintosh)
Computer/Memory card recorder
Video equipment/Monitor
BNC cable
(composite/SDI)
The contents can be transferred as a
data stream (digital dubbing).
• IEEE1394 (SBP-2*) not supported.
* Serial Bus Protocol-2
15
Chapter 1 Overview
System Configuration
Rain cover
Soft carrying case
SHAN-RC700
AJ-SC900
Hard carrying case
Remote control unit *5
AJ-HT901G
AJ-RC10G
Shotgun microphone
(Phantom +48 V)
Remote control cable
AG-MC200G
AJ-MC700P
Extension control unit
AJ-C10050G
Lens *2
(Bayonet type)
AG-EC4G
FUJINON, CANON
Tripod adapter
SHAN-TM700
Video encoder card
AJ-YAX800G *4
AG-HPX370P/
AG-HPX371E
Battery
*1
PROPAC14, TRIMPAC14
HYTRON50/140
DIONIC90/160
V-mount
type
battery
plate
ENDURA E-7/7S
ENDURA E-10/10S
NP-L7
Holder
plate *6
NP battery holder
SD Memory cards *3
P2 Cards *3
External power supply
USB2.0 compatible devices
BT-LH80W, BT-LH900 etc.
Unislot wireless
microphone receiver
DVCPRO/DV standard device
complying with
the IEEE1394 standard
LCD monitor
*1 The camera is equipped with a battery holder as standard.
*2 The camera comes with a Fujinon lens.
*3 For the latest information on P2 cards and SD memory cards not available in the Operating Instructions, visit the support
desk at the following website.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
*4 For details, refer to the AJ-YAX800G User’s Guide on the supplied CD-ROM.
*5 For details, refer to the AJ-RC10G User’s Guide on the supplied CD-ROM.
*6 Attach the NP battery holder to the holder plate before fixing it to the V-mount type battery plate.
16
Eye cup
Shoulder belt
FRONT AUDIO LEVEL knob
(screw included)
For details, refer to
[Attaching the Eye Cup]
(page 107).
For details, refer to
[Attaching the Shoulder
Strap] (page 106).
For details, refer to
[Attaching the FRONT
AUDIO LEVEL Control
Knob] (page 107).
XLR connector cap *1
BNC cap *1
CD-ROM
Chapter 1 Overview
Standard accessories
Mount cap *1
*1 This component is part of the camera.
 Accessories manufactured by Fujinon Co., Ltd.
Lens
Front lens cap *2
Rear lens cap *2
Lens hood
Lens hood cap *3
Zoom lever *2
For details, refer to
[Mounting the Lens]
(page 98).
Connector cap *2
*2 This component is part of the lens.
*3 This component is part of the lens hood.
NOTE
• Be sure to appropriately dispose of the packing material when you have unpacked the product.
• Consult your supplier regarding purchases of accessories. For information on the accessories manufactured by Fujinon Co.,
Ltd., consult Fujinon supplier or representative.
17
Chapter 2 Parts and Their Functions
Power Supply and Accessory Mounting Section
Chapter 2 Parts and their Functions
17 6 13 2
1
4
3 15
1 POWER switch
Use to turn the power on and off.
2 Battery holder
A battery from Anton/Bauer is mounted here.
For details, refer to [Mounting the Battery and Setting
the Battery Type] (page 95).
3 DC IN (external power input) socket (XLR, 4P)
Connect this camera to an external DC power supply.
For details, refer to [Use of the external DC power
supply] (page 97).
4 BREAKER switch
This switch is located on the camera base.
When an excessive amount of current is fed through
the video camera recorder, due to a malfunction, the
breaker automatically turns off the power to protect the
device. Press this button after conducting an internal
inspection or repair. The camera will power up if it is
working normally.
5 Light shoe
A video light or similar accessory can be attached here.
(Size of holes for securing screws)
• 1/4-20UNC (6 mm or shorter screws)
6 Shoulder strap fittings
The shoulder strap is attached here.
For details, refer to [Attaching the Shoulder Strap]
(page 106).
7 Lens mount (1/3-bayonet mount)
The lens is attached here.
For details, refer to [Mounting the Lens] (page 98).
8 Lens lever
Tighten this lever to lock the lens to the lens mount.
For details, refer to [Mounting the Lens] (page 98).
18
16
6
10 12
5 14
11
8
7
9
9 Mount cap
To remove the cap, raise the lens lever. Replace the
cap when a lens is not mounted.
10 Lens cable/microphone cable clamp
This clamp secures the lens and microphone cables.
For details, refer to [Mounting the Lens] (page 98).
11 Tripod mount
To mount the camera on a tripod, attach the optional
tripod adapter (SHAN-TM700) here.
For details, refer to [Mounting the Camera on a Tripod]
(page 106).
12 Lens jack (12-pin)
The lens connection cord is connected here. For
a detailed description of your lens, refer to the
manufacturer’s instruction manual.
13 Battery release lever
Pull down the release lever to release the battery.
14 Viewfinder left-right positioning ring
For details, see [Adjusting Right and Left Viewfinder
Position] (page 87).
15 Light control switch
For details, refer to [Power Supply] (page 95).
16 Cable holder
Used to secure the light and microphone cables.
17 Accessory mounting hole
Accessories can be attached here. Do not use this hole
for purposes other than attaching accessories.
(Size of holes for securing screws)
• 1/4-20UNC (10 mm or shorter screws)
• 3/8-16UNC (10 mm or shorter screws)
Audio (input) Function Section
7
2
8
6
Chapter 2 Parts and their Functions
1
1 MIC IN (microphone input) jack (XLR, 3-pin)
• Connect a microphone (optional accessory) to this
jack.
• A phantom-powered microphone may be connected.
To use a phantom-powered microphone, set the menu
option F.MIC POWER to ON in the AUDIO SETUP
screen.
For details, refer to [Preparing for Audio Input]
(page 104).
2 AUDIO LEVEL CH1/CH2 (audio channel 1/2
recording level adjustment) controls
• With the AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 switch positioned
to MAN, these controls can be used to adjust the
recording levels for audio channels 1 and 2.
• Note that the controls are designed to be locked. For
adjustment, each control must be depressed while
turning.
3 AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 (audio channel 1/2
automatic/manual level adjustment selector) switch
Use this switch to select recording level control mode
for Audio Channels 1 and 2.
AUTO: Recording level automatically controlled.
MAN: Recording level manually controlled.
For details, refer to [Adjusting Recording Levels]
(page 62).
4 AUDIO IN (audio input selector) switch
Use this switch to select signals recorded through
audio channels 1 – 4.
FRONT: Records signals from a microphone
connected to the MIC IN jack.
W.L.(WIRELESS):
Records signals from a wireless receiver.
REAR: Records signals from audio devices or
microphones connected to the AUDIO IN
CH1/CH2 connectors.
4
3
5
NOTE
To record 2-channel wireless input, switch both CH1 and
CH2 to W.L. position and set the menu option WIRELESS
TYPE in the AUDIO SETUP screen to DUAL.
5 AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 (audio channel 1/2) connectors
(XLR, 3-pin)
Audio devices or microphones may be connected here.
For details, refer to [When Using Audio Devices]
(page 105).
6 LINE/MIC/+48V (line input/mic input/mic input +48V)
selector switch
Use to select audio signals input to the AUDIO IN CH1/
CH2 connectors.
LINE: Line input for audio signals input from an
audio device
MIC: Audio signal input from microphone with
internal power supply (the camera does not
supply power to a phantom microphone).
+ 48V: Audio signal input from a microphone
that requires an external power supply
(the camera supplies power to a phantom
microphone).
NOTE
Power is supplied when the menu option
R.MICPOWER in the AUDIO SETUP screen is
set to ON.
7 FRONT AUDIO LEVEL (audio recording level
adjustment) control
• This control adjusts the recording level of audio
channels 1 and 2.
• With the AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 switch positioned
to MAN, this control can be used to adjust the
recording levels for audio channels 1 and 2.
• Use the menu options FRONT VR CH1 and FRONT
VR CH2 in the AUDIO SETUP screen to select the
input connector this control will be used for.
8 Wireless slot
A Unislot wireless receiver (optional accessory) may be
attached here.
19
Audio (output) Function Section
Chapter 2 Parts and their Functions
3 4
1
2 5
6
1 MONITOR SELECT (audio channel) CH1/2, CH3/4
selector switch
Use this switch to select the audio channel whose
signals are output to the speaker, earphones or AUDIO
OUT connectors.
CH1/2: Signal output of audio channels 1 and 2.
CH3/4: Signal output of audio channels 3 and 4.
The channel indications of the audio level meters in the
viewfinder and on the LCD monitor show the channels
selected with this switch.
2 MONITOR SELECT (audio selection) CH1/3, ST,
CH2/4 selector switch
This switch and the MONITOR SELECT CH1/2, CH3/4
switch select the audio signal output to the speaker,
earphones and AUDIO OUT connectors.
MONITOR SELECT switch (right)
MONITOR SELECT
switch (left)
CH1/2
CH3/4
CH1/3 Audio Channel 1 Audio Channel 3
Stereo signals
Stereo signals
MONITOR
ST
from Audio
from Audio
SELECT
Channels 1 and 2*1 Channels 3 and 4*1
CH2/4 Audio Channel 2 Audio Channel 4
*1 MIX in the menu option MONITOR SELECT in the
AUDIO SETUP screen allows you to change stereo
signals to a mixed signal.
3 MONITOR (volume) control
Use to control the alarm sound volume and volume of
sound output from the monitor speaker and earphones.
20
7
4 Speaker
The speaker outputs EE sound during recording and
reproduced sound during playback. The speaker emits
an alarm sound when the warning lamp and indicator
light or blink. EE sound and reproduced sound are not
output during alarm sound output.
When earphones are connected to the PHONES
connector, the sound from the speaker is automatically
muted.
5 PHONES (earphones) jack (mini jack)
This connector is designed for audio monitoring (stereo)
earphones.
6 DC OUT (DC power supply) output socket.
This is a 12 V DC output socket that provides a
maximum current of 1.5 A.
NOTE
Be sure to check polarity before connecting an external
device as incorrect connection could lead to damage.
7 AUDIO OUT connector
• This connector outputs audio signals recorded on
audio channels 1/2 and 3/4.
• Use the MONITOR SELECT CH1/2, CH3/4 selector
switch to select output signals.
Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions Section
11 3
9 8
Chapter 2 Parts and their Functions
1
4 10 5 6 7 2
 Shooting and Recording (camera unit)
1 ND FILTER (filter switching) control
Use this control to adjust the amount of light entering
the MOS sensor during shooting in strong outdoor
lighting.
Control
Setting
Description
position
1
CLEAR
Does not use the ND filter.
Reduces the amount of light
2
1/4ND
entering the MOS sensor to 1/4.
Reduces the amount of light
3
1/16ND
entering the MOS sensor to 1/16.
Reduces the amount of light
4
1/64ND
entering the MOS sensor to 1/64.
2 USER MAIN, USER1 and USER2 buttons
These buttons can be assigned user-selected functions
in a setting menu. Each button, when pressed,
performs the assigned function.
For details, refer to [Assigning functions to USER
buttons] (page 61).
3 SHUTTER switch
Use to turn the electronic shutter on and off.
OFF: The electronic shutter is off.
ON: The electronic shutter is on.
SEL: Changes the speed of the electronic shutter.
This dial switch returns to its original position when
released. Each push in the SEL direction changes the
shutter speed.
For details, refer to [Setting the Electronic Shutter]
(page 58).
4 AUTO W/B (white/black) BAL switch
AWB: Automatically adjusts the white balance. Set
the WHITE BAL switch on the side to [A] or
[B] and use this switch to adjust the white
balance, which takes a few seconds. The
adjusted value is stored in memory.
When the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST
and the AUTO W/B BAL switch is set to AWB
to indicate the color temperature, pushing
the AUTO W/B BAL switch towards AWB a
second time allows you to change the preset
color temperature.
ABB: Automatically adjusts the black balance.
For details, refer to [Adjusting the White Balance and
Black Balance] (page 55).
5 GAIN selector switch
• This switch adjusts video amplifier gain to suit
ambient lighting conditions at the time of shooting.
• Use the menu options LOW GAIN, MID GAIN and
HIGH GAIN in the SW MODE screen to set the L/M/H
position gain values.
• The factory settings for L, M and H positions are 0 dB,
6 dB and 12 dB, respectively.
21
Chapter 2 Parts and their Functions
6 OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE selector switch
This switch selects the video signals sent from
the camera unit to the memory card recorder unit,
viewfinder and video monitor.
CAM. AUTO KNEE ON:
Video being recorded through the camera is
output with the Auto knee circuit activated. A
DRS (Dynamic Range Stretcher) function can
be used instead of the AUTO KNEE function.
For details, refer to [DRS (Dynamic Range
Stretcher) function] (page 12).
CAM. AUTO KNEE OFF:
Video being recorded through the camera is
output with the Auto knee circuit turned off.
The KNEE point is locked to the level set in
the menu.
BARS: Color bar signals are output with the AUTO
KNEE circuit turned off.
NOTE
AUTO KNEE function
Usually, when you shoot people or scenery against a
strongly lit background and adjust the level to the subject,
the background will be totally whited-out, with buildings
and other objects blurred. Use of the AUTO KNEE function
in situations like these will reproduce the background
clearly.
The AUTO KNEE function is effective when:
• The subject is a person positioned in the shade under a
clear sky.
• The subject is a person in a vehicle or building and you
also want to capture the background visible through a
window.
• The subject is a high-contrast scene.
7 WHITE BAL (white balance memory selector) switch
Use to select method of white balance adjustment.
PRST: Use PRST when you have no time to adjust
the white balance.
• The factory default setting is 3200 K.
• Use a setting menu or push the AUTO W/B
switch towards AWB to display the color
temperature. While the color temperature
is still indicated, push the AUTO W/B
switch once again towards AWB to switch
between 3200 K and 5600 K.
A • B: Pushing the AUTO W/B BAL towards AWB
will automatically adjust the white balance
and save the adjusted value in memory A or
memory B.
For details, refer to [Adjusting the White
Balance] (page 55).
The setting menu also allows you to assign Auto
Tracking White balance (ATW) to B. For details, refer to
(page 56).
22
8 DISP/MODE CHK button
•P
ress this button to turn off the viewfinder and LCD
display. (The time code indication stays on.)
• A second press of the button turns the display back
on and holding it down displays shooting conditions
and functions assigned to USER switches.
• It also serves to turn off the alarm sound.
9 SYNCHRO SCAN switch
This function adjusts the synchro scan speed when
the SHUTTER switch is set to ON and synchro scan is
selected.
Pressing the – switch sets a slower shutter speed and
pressing the + switch sets a faster one.
For example, to record a computer screen, make
adjustments to minimize horizontal bar noise in the
viewfinder.
In VFR (Variable Frame Rate) mode, press the JOG dial
button and this switch to change the frame rate.
For details, refer to [2. JOG dial button] in [Menu/
Thumbnail Operation Section] (page 25).
10 ZEBRA (zebra pattern) switch
Use this switch to display a zebra pattern in the
viewfinder and on the LCD monitor.
For details, refer to [Zebra pattern display] (page 83).
11 Focal plane index ( )
This symbol indicates the focal plane of the MOS
sensor.
It provides a reference for making accurate focal
distance measurements from the subject.
20
19
25 24
18
14 16 15 17
30
29
Chapter 2 Parts and their Functions
28 23 21
31 12
32
27 22 26
13
 Shooting and Recording/Playback
Function Section (Recorder Unit)
12 REC button
Press this button to start recording and press once
again to stop it.
This button operates in the same way as the VTR button
on the lens.
13 SDI OUT CHARACTER switch
Use this switch to control the superimposition of
character data onto SDI OUT to indicate status or
setting menus.
ON: Superimposes characters.
OFF: Does not superimpose characters.
NOTE
In addition to SDI OUT, a setting menu allows you to
superimpose characters on VIDEO OUT video.
14 t REW (rewind) button
In stop mode, press this button for fast-reverse
playback.
During playback, press this button for fast-reverse
playback at about 4x normal speed.
If this button is pressed when playback is paused, the
beginning of the clip being played is located in pause
mode (cue-up mode).
15 y FF (fast forward) button
In stop mode, press this button for fast playback.
During playback, press this button for fast playback at
about 4x normal speed.
If this button is pressed when playback is paused, the
beginning of the next clip is located in pause mode
(cue-up mode).
16 g STOP button
Press this button to stop playback.
You can also press this button to stop interval recording
or one-shot recording, or stop compiling to the current
clip in one-clip recording mode.
17 PLAY/PAUSE button
Press this button to view playback in the viewfinder or
on a color video monitor.
Press it during playback to pause playback.
18 USB 2.0 connector (DEVICE)
19 USB 2.0 connector (HOST)
Connect a USB 2.0 cable to this connector.
To enable transfer of data via USB 2.0, set the menu
option PC MODE in the SYSTEM SETUP screen to ON.
This setting restricts recording, playback and clip
operations with the camera. For details, refer to
page 150.
23
Chapter 2 Parts and their Functions
20 P2 CARD ACCESS LED
This LED indicates the recording and playback status of
each card.
For details, refer to [P2 CARD ACCESS LED and status
of P2 cards] (page 32).
• For the latest information not available in the Operating
Instructions, visit the support desk at the following
website.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
21 GENLOCK IN connector
This connector inputs a reference signal when the
camera unit is gen-locked, or when the time code is
externally locked.
About SD and SDHC memory cards
• The SDHC memory card is a new standard, established
by the SD Card Association in 2006, for memory cards
with capacities of 2 GB or more.
• The SD logo is a registered trademark.
• MMC (MultiMediaCard) is a registered trademark of
Infineon Technologies AG.
NOTE
• Supply an HD Y signal (1080/59.94i (50i), 720/59.94P (50P))
or a composite signal (480/59.94i (576/50i)) as input
reference signal. The subcarrier of VIDEO OUT connector
output (composite signal) cannot be externally locked. In
SD mode, the signal will not lock to the HD signal.
22 REMOTE connector
Some functions can be remote controlled when the
remote control unit AJ-RC10G (optional accessory) is
connected to the camera.
For details, refer to [Connecting the AJ-RC10G Remote
Control Unit] (page 109).
Some functions can also be remote controlled when the
AG-EC4G extension control unit (optional accessory) is
connected.
For details, refer to [Connecting the AG-EC4G
Extension Control Unit] (page 109).
23 VIDEO OUT connector
This connector outputs video signals.
• In HD mode, down-converted composite video
signals are output.
• Use the menu option DOWNCON MODE in the
OUTPUT SEL screen to set signal output. (The factory
setting is LETTER BOX.)
24 SD memory card slot
Insert an SD memory card (optional accessory) in this
slot. It is used for recording and loading camera setting
menus or lens files, uploading meta data and recording
proxies (optional).
NOTE
SD memory card precautions
• Use only SD memory cards that conform to the SD
standard or the SDHC standard in this camera.
• MultiMediaCards (MMC) cannot be used. (Use of such
cards may prevent recording.)
• Be sure to use miniSD/microSD card adapters when
using miniSD/microSD cards with this camera. (Note that
this camera will not operate normally when a miniSD/
microSD adapter is installed without inserting a card. Be
sure to insert a card when an adapter is installed.)
• Use of Panasonic SD memory cards and miniSD/microSD
cards is recommended. Be sure to format such cards in
this camera.
• This camera supports SD memory cards with capacities
between 8 MB to 2 GB, and SDHC memory cards with
capacities up to 32 GB. For proxy (optional) recording,
use SDHC memory cards or 256 MB to 2 GB SD memory
cards labeled “High Speed”.
24
25 BUSY (operation mode display) lamp
This lamp indicates the active status of the SD memory
card. It stays illuminated when the card is active.
NOTE
Do not remove the card while the lamp is on.
The SD memory card could be damaged.
26 DVCPRO/DV connector
An IEEE1394 standard connector for input and output of
video, audio and data.
For details, refer to [Connections to the DVCPRO/DV
Connector] (page 155).
27 SDI OUT 1 connector
28 SDI OUT 2 connector
• This connector outputs SDI signals.
• Use the menu option SDI SELECT in the OUTPUT
SEL screen to select AUTO, 1080i or 480i (576i). This
connector does not support up-conversion.
It outputs the same signals as SDI OUT 1 connector.
29 SCENE FILE dial
This dial allows you to select and load shooting
conditions from the scene files prerecorded to each of
the six positions.
For details, refer to [How to use Scene File Data]
(page 91).
NOTE
During recording, selecting a position with a different
frame rate will not change the frame rate until the camera
is set to recording standby mode.
30 FOCUS ASSIST button
Turns magnification of the center portion of the image
on and off.
For details, refer to [Focus assist function] (page 84).
31 REC switch
Switches functions of the REC button on the handle.
ON: Enables the REC button.
OFF: Disables the REC button.
32 USB lamp
This lamp lights when the camera is in USB mode (PC
mode).
Menu/Thumbnail Operation Section
Chapter 2 Parts and their Functions
3
7
6 5 4
2
1
1 MENU button
• Hold down the button to open a setting menu screen.
A second press of the button returns the previous
image.
• This function is not available in the thumbnail display
and during recording.
2 JOG dial button
• Use this button to go between setting menus and to
select and set items in open setting menus.
• In a setting menu, turning the JOG dial button
downwards moves the menu cursor downwards and
turning it upwards moves the menu cursor upwards.
Press the JOG dial button to confirm made settings.
For more information, see [Using the menus]
(page 129).
• In VFR (Variable Frame Rate) mode, press this button
and use the SYNCHRO SCAN switch to change frame
rates.
NOTE
Use the JOG dial button to go between setting menus and
select items.
For details, refer to [Viewfinder and LCD Menus] (page 129).
3 Thumbnail button
Press this button to open the thumbnail screen. Note
that this switchover cannot be performed during
recording or playback.
5 CURSOR and SET buttons
Use these buttons to manipulate setting menus, the
menu bar and thumbnails.
The four triangular buttons are cursor buttons and the
square center button is the SET button.
6 EXIT/CANCEL button
Press this button to exit an open thumbnail menu or
property window to return to the previous image.
Pressing this button while holding down the SHIFT
button turns it into a cancel function allowing you to
cancel clip selections at one time.
7 SHIFT button
Use this button together with other buttons.
• Hold down the SHIFT button and press the cursor
button ([ ]) in a thumbnail screen to move the
pointer to the thumbnail at the beginning or end of a
clip.
• Hold down the SHIFT button and press the SET button
to select all clips from a previously selected clip to the
clip at the cursor location.
• SHIFT button + EXIT/CANCEL button
This button combination operates like the cancel
function.
For details, refer to [6. EXIT/CANCEL button].
Operations while the SHIFT button is pressed are
shown blow each button.
4 Thumbnail menu button
In thumbnail display mode, use this button to access
thumbnail menu functions to delete clips, for example.
NOTE
Use the cursor, SET and EXIT/CANCEL buttons to select
thumbnails and access menu functions.
For details, see [Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails]
(page 110).
25
Time Code Section
Chapter 2 Parts and their Functions
4
8
1
3
5
7
2
1 GENLOCK IN connector (BNC)
Use this connector to input a reference signal to
genlock the camera unit or externally lock the time
code. The subcarrier of the VBS signal output by
the VIDEO OUT connector of the camera cannot be
externally locked.
For details, refer to [Externally Locking the Time Code]
(page 71).
2 TC IN connector (BNC)
To externally lock the time code, input a reference time
code to this connector.
For details, refer to [Externally Locking the Time Code]
(page 71).
3 TC OUT connector (BNC)
Connect this connector to the time code input (TC IN) of
the external device to lock the time code of that device
to the time code of the AG-HPX370P/AG-HPX371E.
For details, refer to [Outputting the time code externally]
(page 72).
4 HOLD button
Pressing this button instantly freezes the time data
indication on the counter. Note that time code
generation continues. Pressing the button again restarts
the counter.
This function allows you to check the time code or
counter value of a recorded scene.
5 RESET button
Use this button to reset the counter value on the time
code display to 0.
Pressing this button with the TCG switch positioned at
[SET] when the TC PRESET screen and UB PRESET
screen are open, resets all set values to 0. Use the
Cursor SET button to PRESET.
26
6
6 COUNTER (counter display selector) button
Each press of the button displays the counter value,
time code, user bit and frame rate data in the viewfinder
and LCD display.
7 TCG (time code selector) switch
Use this switch to set the running mode of the built-in
time code generator.
F-RUN: Select this position to continuously advance
the time code independently of P2 card
recording status. Use this position to
synchronize the time code with the time of
day, or to externally lock the time code.
SET: Select this position to set the time code or
user bits.
R-RUN: Select this position to advance the time
code only during recording. The time code
is continuously recorded during normal
recording. But deleting clips and setting a
24P/24PA frame rate to continue recording of
clips that are not 24P/24PA clips may break
the sequence of time code recording.
NOTE
Always use the CURSOR and SET buttons to set the time
code and user bits. The JOG dial button cannot be used for
this purpose.
8 CURSOR and SET buttons
Use these buttons to set the time code and user bits.
The four triangular buttons are cursor buttons and the
square center button is the SET button.
For details, refer to [Setting Time Data] (page 64).
Warning and Status Display
Functions
3
Chapter 2 Parts and their Functions
1
LCD Monitor
4
1
2
2
1 Back tally lamp
When the BACK TALLY switch is set to ON, this lamp
behaves in the same way as the front tally lamp.
2 Rear tally lamp
When the BACK TALLY switch is set to ON, the rear tally
lamp behaves in the same way as the back tally lamp.
3 BACK TALLY switch
Use this switch to control the back and rear tally lamps.
ON: Enables the back and rear tally lamps.
OFF: Disables the back and rear tally lamps.
4 WARNING lamp
This lamp starts blinking or lights when an error is
detected in the memory card recorder unit.
1 LCD Monitor
The LCD monitor displays the video in the viewfinder.
Alternatively, it can show clips on the P2 card in a
thumbnail format.
For details on the LCD monitor, refer to [Viewfinder and
LCD Menus] (page 129).
In thumbnail display mode, you can use the thumbnail
menu buttons, CURSOR and SET buttons to manipulate
or delete clips, or format P2 cards.
For details, refer to [Manipulating Clips with
Thumbnails] (page 110).
2 OPEN button
Use to open the LCD monitor.
27
Viewfinder
Chapter 2 Parts and their Functions
3
1
5
4
2
1 Viewfinder
The viewfinder displays the video image in color during
recording or playback. It also displays warnings and
messages – indicating camera operating status and
settings – zebra patterns and markers (safety zone and
center markers, etc.).
NOTE
The menu option EVF COLOR can be set to monochrome
in the DISPLAY SETUP screen.
2 TALLY switch
Use to control the front tally lamp.
ON: Tally lamp goes on.
OFF: Tally lamp goes out.
3 Front tally lamp
This lamp goes on during recording when the TALLY
switch is set to the [ON] . It blinks to indicate warnings.
4 Eyepiece
5 Diopter adjusting ring
Adjust this ring to suit your vision so that the image in
the viewfinder is as clear as possible.
6 Eyepiece lock button
For details, refer to [Detaching the eyepiece]
(page 160).
7 Microphone holder
8 Right and left viewfinder positioning rings
Loosen the rings to adjust right and left position, and
tighten the ring after completing the adjustment.
28
8
6
7
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
Setting Date and Time of Internal Clock
The CLOCK SETTING value is recorded in the contents
(clip), and affects the sequence of playback of the
thumbnails. Before carrying out recording, be sure to check
and set CLOCK SETTING and TIME ZONE.
1
2
Set the POWER switch to ON.
Select TIME ZONE item in OTHER
FUNCTIONS, then press the JOG dial button.
• For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 129).
3
Use the JOG dial button to set the time
difference from Greenwich Mean Time.
• Check what time zone you are in and set
accordingly.
OTHER FUNCTIONS
USER FILE
1394 CONTROL
1394 CMD SEL
ACCESS LED
ALARM
CLOCK SETTING
TIME ZONE
GL PHASE
>>>
OFF
REC_P
ON
HIGH
>>>
+9:00
HD SDI
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
Time
difference
00:00
-00:30
-01:00
-01:30
-02:00
-02:30
-03:00
-03:30
-04:00
-04:30
-05:00
-05:30
-06:00
-06:30
-07:00
-07:30
-08:00
-08:30
-09:00
-09:30
-10:00
-10:30
-11:00
-11:30
-12:00
+00:30
Time
Area
difference
Greenwich
+01:00
Central Europe
+01:30
Eastern
Azores Islands
+02:00
Europe
+02:30
Mid-Atlantic
+03:00
Moscow
+03:30
Tehran
Buenos Aires
+04:00
Abu Dhabi
Newfoundland
+04:30
Kabul
Island
Halifax
+05:00
Islamabad
+05:30
Bombay
New York
+06:00
Dacca
+06:30
Yangon
Chicago
+07:00
Bangkok
+07:30
Denver
+08:00
Beijing
+08:30
Los Angeles
+09:00
Tokyo
+09:30
Darwin
Alaska
+10:00
Guam
Marquesas
Lord Howe
+10:30
Islands
Island
Solomon
Hawaii
+11:00
Islands
+11:30
Norfolk Island
Midway Island
+12:00
New Zealand
Chatham
+12:45
Islands
Kwajalein
+13:00
Area
NOTE
• The clock is accurate to within about ±30 seconds a month
with the power turned off.
• Check and set the time when accurate time is required. After
setting the time, change the setting menu TIME ZONE item
and the display and the recorded local time will be reset
accordingly.
29
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
 This shows you how to adjust the calendar
to 5:20 PM on April 1, 2010.
Time zone
4
Select CHANGE at the CLOCK SETTING item
in OTHER FUNCTIONS, then press the JOG
dial button.
• The CLOCK SET screen appears.
OTHER FUNCTIONS
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
USER FILE
1394 CONTROL
1394 CMD SEL
ACCESS LED
ALARM
CLOCK SETTING
TIME ZONE
GL PHASE
>>>
OFF
REC_P
ON
ON
RETURN
CHANGE
HD SDI
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
5
Turn the JOG dial button to select YEAR, then
press the JOG dial button.
CLOCK SETTING
YEAR
MONTH
DAY
HOUR
MINUTE
2010
APR
1
13
7
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
6
Turn the JOG dial button to set YEAR to 2010,
then press the JOG dial button.
• A year between 2000 to 2037 can be set.
7
8
9
Turn the JOG dial button to select MONTH,
then press the JOG dial button.
Turn the JOG dial button to set MONTH to
APR, then press the JOG dial button.
Set DAY, HOUR and MINUTE in the same way
as setting YEAR and MONTH.
• This is a 24-hour clock.
CLOCK SETTING
YEAR
MONTH
DAY
HOUR
MINUTE
2010
APR
1
17
20
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
30
P2 Cards
4
Inserting P2 Cards
When using the camera recorder for the first time, be sure to
set the time data beforehand.
For details, refer to [Setting Date and Time of Internal Clock]
(page 29).
1
Turn on the POWER switch.
2
Open the card slot cover.
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
NOTE
Push the eject button that pops up to the right.
• Insert a P2 card into the AG-HPX370P/AGHPX371E. The P2 CARD ACCESS LED for the
appropriate slot indicates the status of the P2
card.
For details, refer to [P2 CARD ACCESS LED and
status of P2 cards] (page 32).
P2 CARD ACCESS LED
5
Slot cover
3
NOTE
• To prevent cards from falling out, dust from entering and
reduce the risk of exposure to static electricity, close the
card slot cover before moving the camera.
• Format P2 cards only on a P2 card device.
Insert a P2 card in a P2 card slot.
Removing P2 Cards
• Press in the card until the eject button pops up.
EJECT button
Insert the card with the
logo facing up.
Close the card slot cover.
1
Open the card slot cover.
2
Raise the eject button.
3
Then depress the eject button to release the P2 card.
Raise the eject button.
Press the raised eject
button to remove a P2 card.
31
NOTE
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
• When a P2 card is being accessed or recognised after
insertion (P2 CARD ACCESS LED blinks in orange), do not
remove the P2 card. Removing a P2 card during access could
damage it.
• If a P2 card being accessed is removed, the viewfinder
displays “TURN POWER OFF” and the AG-HPX370P/AGHPX371E gives a warning using an alarm and the WARNING
LED. In addition, all P2 CARD ACCESS LEDs blink rapidly in
orange. If this is the case, turn the power off.
For details, refer to [Warning System] (page 161).
• Removing a P2 card during access may corrupt clip data.
Check the clips and restore them if required.
For details, refer to [Restoring Clips] (page 118).
• If a P2 card being formatted is removed, it may be not be
formatted properly. In this case, the viewfinder displays
“TURN POWER OFF”. If this message appears, turn off the
power, then restart the AG-HPX370P/AG-HPX371E to reformat
the card.
• If a P2 card is inserted while another P2 card is being played
back, the inserted P2 card is not recognised and the P2
CARD ACCESS LED for that card does not come on. Card
recognition starts when playback ends.
• A P2 card inserted in an empty slot during recording may not
be immediately recognized during the following events.
• Immediately following PRE REC operation
• The CARD ACCESS LED can be set to stay off in the menu
option ACCESS LED in the OTHER FUNCTIONS screen.
When the camera is used in this way, remove cards when the
camera has been powered down or a sufficiently long time
after terminating recording, playback and other operating
modes.
• Removing a P2 card during thumbnail display terminates the
thumbnail display.
To Prevent Accidental Erasure of
P2 Card Content
To prevent the content of a P2 card being accidentally
erased, position the write-protect switch on the P2 card at
[Protect].
Write-protect switch
NOTE
Write-protect switchover can be performed while the card is
being accessed (during recording or playback), but does not
take effect until access to the card ceases.
32
P2 CARD ACCESS LED and status
of P2 cards
P2
CARD
ACCESS
LED
Stays on
in green
Status of P2 Card
MODE
CHECK
indication *1
Recording
enabled
Writing and
ACTIVE
reading enabled.
Writing and
reading enabled
for current
Stays on Selected for
recording mode
ACTIVE
in orange recording
(loop, interval
or one-shot
recording).
Blinks in
Being
Writing or reading
ACCESSING
orange *2 accessed being performed.
Quickly
Being
The P2 card is
INFO
blinks in
recognized being recognised. READING
orange
The P2 card has
no free space.
Card full
FULL
Only reading is
enabled.
Blinks in
The write-protect
green
switch on the P2
Writecard is positioned
PROTECTED
protected
at [PROTECT].
Only reading is
enabled.
The card is not
supported by your
Card not
NOT
AG-HPX370P/
supported
SUPPORTED
AG-HPX371E.
Replace the card.
The P2 card
Stays off
Incorrect
is not properly
FORMAT
format
formatted.
ERROR
Reformat the card.
No P2 card is
Card not
inserted.
NO CARD
inserted
Card recognition
standby.
*1 MODE CHECK appears in the viewfinder and on the
LCD monitor.
For details, see [Viewfinder Screen Status Displays]
(page 74).
*2 Blinks orange also when a PROXY card (optional
accessory) is inserted in slot 2.
P2 card recording times
P2 cards available to the AG-HPX370P/AGHPX371E
This camera will automatically generate additional clips
for a continuous recording on an 8 GB or higher capacity
P2 card when the recording exceeds the durations given
below. Even so, a P2 device will handle such clips as a
single clip in thumbnail operations (display, delete, recover,
copy, etc.). Such recordings may be handled as separate
clips by nonlinear editing software or a PC.
NOTE
• This unit cannot use AJ-P2C002SG (2 GB) cards.
• Depending on the type of P2 card used, you may need to
update the camera driver.
For details, refer to [Updating the firmware incorporated into the
unit] (page 165).
• For the latest information not available in the Operating
Instructions, visit the support desk at the following website.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
Recording format
Continuous recording time
(excluding Native format)
AVC-I 100
Approx. 5 min.
DVCPRO HD
AVC-I 50
Approx. 10 min.
DVCPRO50
DVCPRO
Approx. 20 min.
DV
P2 card recording times
(When using one 64 GB card)
Recording format
Recording
System mode
(codec)
time
AVC-I 100
Approx. 64 min.
DVCPRO HD
HD (1080i, 720P)
Approx. 128
AVC-I 50
min.
Approx. 128
DVCPRO50
min.
SD (480i, 576i)
DVCPRO
Approx. 256
DV
min.
NOTE
• The above recording time is for normal recording. Recording
in native mode will extend recording time depending on
system mode.
For details, refer to [List of recording formats and functions]
(page 49).
• Use of 32 GB, 16 GB and 8 GB P2 cards will provide 1/2, 1/4
and 1/8, respectively of above recording times.
• The indicated capacities include a management area so the
total area available for recording is somewhat smaller.
33
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
This camera supports the optional AJ-P2C064AG (64 GB)
and AJ-P2E032XG (32 GB) P2 cards, and other 4 GB to 64
GB P2 cards (as of Apr. 2010).
Splitting clips recorded on P2 cards
Handling P2 Card Recording
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
The P2 card is a semiconductor memory card designed
for the DVCPRO P2 series, Panasonic’s line of professional
video and broadcast equipment.
• Since the DVCPRO P2 format and AVC-Intra record data
as files, it is ideally suited for computer processing. The
file structure is in a proprietary format that includes audio
and video data recorded in the MXF file format as well as
various other essential data forming an interrelated folder
structure as shown below.
Drive:\
CONTENTS
AUDIO
CLIP
ICON
PROXY
VIDEO
VOICE
LASTCLIP.TXT.*
All these folders are required.
* This file contains the last clip data recorded
on a P2 device.
NOTE
If any of this data is changed or lost, it will not be recognized
as P2 data or the P2 card may no longer be possible to use in
a P2 device.
• To prevent data loss in transferring P2 card data to a PC
or write back PC data on a P2 card, use P2 Viewer, which
can be downloaded from the website listed below. You
can also visit the support desk at the following website for
details on the system requirements of P2 Viewer.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
•F
ollow the steps below to use general software such as
Microsoft Windows Explorer or Apple Finder to transfer
the data to a PC. Be sure to use P2 Viewer to write data
back to a P2 card.
• Treat the CONTENTS folder and the LASTCLIP.TXT file
as a unit.
• Do not modify the data below the CONTENTS folder.
• In copying, be sure to copy both the CONTENTS folder
and the LASTCLIP.TXT file together.
• When transferring data from multiple P2 cards,
create separate folders for each P2 card to prevent
overwriting clips with identical names.
• Do not delete data on a P2 card.
• Format P2 cards only on a P2 card device.
34
Basic Procedures
Note that the recording order is retained even if the power
is turned off. When the power is next turned on, the last
card written before powering-down will be the target card.
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
This section describes the basic procedure for shooting
and recording.
Before you embark on a shoot, pre-inspect your system to
ensure that it works properly.
For directions on inspecting your memory card camerarecorder, see [Inspections Before Shooting] (page 157).
Battery Set-up to P2 card Insertion
1
2
Insert a charged battery.
Turn the POWER switch to ON to check the
battery remaining level in the viewfinder.
• When battery capacity is low, replace it with a fully
charged battery.
NOTE
When low battery capacity is indicated after replacing
a battery with a fully charged battery, check battery
installation.
For details, refer to [BATTERY SETUP screen] (page 144).
3
Insert a P2 card, check that the P2 CARD
ACCESS LED lights orange or green before
closing the slot cover.
• When more than one P2 card slot contains a P2
card, the card in the slot with the lowest number
is used first. However, regardless of slot number,
a P2 card inserted later will not be accessed until
the other cards have been used.
Example:
If the two slots contain P2 cards, the cards are
used in order of slot numbers 12. However, if
the P2 card in Slot 1 is removed and then reinserted, the cards will be used in the following
order: 21.
1
2
35
Shooting
Setting the switches before shooting and
recording
When a battery and P2 cards are installed, set the switches
as detailed below, before starting to use your AGHPX370P/AG-HPX371E.
White/Black Balance Adjustment to
Recording Completion
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
For shooting, follow the steps below.
1
f
e
3
a
b
c
d
b
a Iris
The iris is automatically adjusted when the lens is set to
the auto iris mode.
b USER MAIN/USER1/USER2
Assigning the SLOT SEL function to a USER button
allows you to select one of the two inserted P2 cards for
recording.
The P2 card selected for recording switches with each
press of the USER button, and the P2 CARD ACCESS
LED of the selected P2 card lights orange. The slot
number of the card to be recorded appears in green in
the LCD monitor and the viewfinder.
For more information on viewfinder displays, see
[Viewfinder Screen Status Displays] (page 74).
NOTE
• The slot selected for recording cannot be changed when
recording has started. Perform this operation during
recording standby.
• Use the USER MAIN/USER1/USER2 item in setting menu
SW MODE screen to assign functions to the USER MAIN/
USER1/USER2 button.
c GAIN switch
Normally, this should be set to L (0 dB). If conditions are
too dark, an appropriate gain level should be set.
d AUTO KNEE selector switch
Set to ON or OFF. Selecting BARS turns off this function
and outputs a color bar signal.
e TCG
Set to F-RUN or R-RUN.
f AUDIO SELECT CH 1/CH 2
Set to AUTO.
36
1
2
5, 6 4
2
Use the ND FILTER control to select a filter
according to ambient light conditions.
When the white balance is saved:
• Position the WHITE BAL switch to [A] or [B].
When the white or black balance is not saved
and you have no time to adjust the white
balance:
• Position the WHITE BAL switch to [PRST].
• The color temperature can be set to 3200 K or
5600 K.
If the white balance is adjusted on the spot:
• Select a filter according to ambient light
conditions. Then, position the WHITE BAL
switch to [A] or [B] and shoot a white test
subject so that it appears at the center of the
screen. Then, follow the steps below to adjust
the white balance.
1. Turn the AUTO W/B BAL switch toward [AWB]
to adjust the white balance.
2. Turn the AUTO W/B BAL switch toward [ABB]
to adjust the black balance.
3. Turn the AUTO W/B BAL switch toward [AWB]
to adjust the white balance again.
For directions on making adjustments, see
[Adjusting the White Balance] (page 55) and
[Adjusting the Black Balance] (page 56).
3
4
Point the camera at your subject to adjust the
focus, and zoom.
To use the electronic shutter, set the shutter
speed and shutter mode.
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
For more information, see [Setting the Electronic
Shutter] (page 58).
5
Press the REC button to start recording.
6
To stop recording, press the REC button.
NOTE
• Shooting the sun and other very bright subjects may produce
a color cast in surrounding areas.
Operation Buttons
During recording, all operation buttons (REW, FF, PLAY/PAUSE,
STOP) are disabled.
Normal Recording
• Pressing the REC button starts recording of video and
sound on the P2 card.
• The video and audio (including additional information)
recorded in one session is referred to as a clip.
REC button
NOTE
Pressing the REC button will not immediately stop data write
operations to a P2 card in the following situations. And the
REC button operation is not recognized.
• When terminating a short recording
• When terminating a recording that has just continued onto a
second P2 card
37
Standard and Native Recording
This camera is capable both of native recording, when it
records video data at the frame rate used by the camera,
and is also capable of standard recording or recording
59.94 (50) frames with a pulldown.
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
Standard recording
(pull-down recording)
Video shot in the 24P mode and in the 30P mode are
recorded as 59.94i or 59.94P, with 2:3 pulldown and 2:2
pulldown, respectively.
Also, video shot in the 25P mode will be recorded as 50i or
50P, with 2:2 pulldown.
The camera can also handle video shot in the 24PA mode
(2:3:3:2 advanced pulldown).
Note that AVC-Intra does not support pulldown recording.
Camera capture
(1080/24P over 60i)
2:3 pull-down recording
Camera capture
(720/30P (25P) over
60P (50P))
2:2 pull-down recording
A
B
C
D
Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co De Do De
A
B
C
Native recording
Native recording extracts only the active frames during
1080i AVC-Intra recording as well as 720P DVCPRO HD
and AVC-Intra recording.
When SYSTEM MODE is set to 720-59.94P, this lengthens
the recording time maximum 2.5 times at 24PN, and
maximum 2 times at 30PN. When SYSTEM MODE is set
to 720-50P, this lengthens the recording time maximum 2
times at 25PN.
Also in native recording, the output of camera video and
playback video is a 59.94 (50) frame rate.
Camera capture
(1080/24PN)
2:3 pull-down
Camera capture
(720/30PN (25PN))
2:2 pull-down
B
C
D
Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co De Do De
Recording
Recording
D
A
A
B
A
A�
A
C
B
A
B�
D
C
B
B
C�
C
D
C
D�
D
D
 Active frame
A�
A
B�
B
C�
C
D�
D
Active frame
NOTE
• In 24P/24PA, 24PN (native recording) and in 30PN/25PN (native recording) at 720P, the camera starts recording in 5-frame,
4-frame and 2-frame segments, respectively. For this reason, to continue recording clips in a system mode using a different
recording segmentation may break the continuity of the time code.
• The camera uses internal memory for recording, when recording starts as soon as a P2 card is inserted or the camera is
powered up. In this situation, recording cannot be stopped until P2 card recognition ends.
To check P2 card status, press the DISP/MODE CHK button and check the row for SLOT 1 and 2.
• An editing system that supports 24PA (2:3:3:2 advanced pulldown) will enable editing with less quality loss than 24P (2:3
pulldown).
• Record at standard 24P if a 24PA compatible editing system will not be used.
38
Variable Frame Rate (VFR) Recording
In 720P mode, this camera is capable of frame skipping
(undercranking) and high-speed (overcranking) recording.
The camera operator can select between native (PN)
recording mode and standard (OVER) recording.
1
2
In the SYSTEM SETUP screen, set the menu
option SYSTEM MODE to 720-59.94P (72050P) and the menu option REC FORMAT to
AVC-I 100/24PN, 30PN (25PN).
1
2
In the SCENE FILE screen, set the menu
option VFR to ON and the menu option FRAME
RATE to suit shooting purposes.
NOTE
Pressing the SYNCHRO SCAN switch while the JOG
dial button is held down and the frame rate indication
is blinking allows you to change the frame rate without
opening a setting menu as long as recording is not in
progress.
NOTE
3
Press the REC button.
This starts recording in the VFR mode (native VFR).
This mode can be combined with the AVC-I 100, AVC-I 50,
DVCPRO HD, 30PN, and 24PN (25PN) recording formats.
For details, refer to [List of recording, playback and output
formats] (page 52).
For details, refer to [SYSTEM SETUP screen] (page 135).
NOTE
Note the following about native VFR recording.
- The P2 card that is being recorded cannot be changed
during recording.
- Pre-recording, loop recording, interval recording, one-shot
recording, and one-clip recording are not available.
- 1394 output is not available during recording and recording
standby.
- Changing Scene Dial position during recording does not
change VFR on and off position.
- Sound cannot be recorded. *1
- The time code is locked to Rec Run. *1
- Thumbnail screens are created 1 frame later than video
recorded on a P2 card, but this is not a malfunction.
*1 In 24PN/30PN (25PN) recording modes, when the frame rate is
24 and 30 (25) frames per second, respectively, audio can also
be recorded. The time code can be set to Free Run (F-RUN).
In the SCENE FILE screen, set the menu
option VFR to ON and the menu option FRAME
RATE to suit shooting purposes.
• The frame rate can be set to a value beteween
12 frames (12P) to 60 frames (60P) when system
mode is set to 720-59.94P, and to a value
beteween 12 frames (12P) to 50 frames (50P)
when system mode is set to 720-50P.
• The frame rate can be set to a value beteween
12 frames (12P) to 60 frames (60P) when system
mode is set to 720-59.94P, and to a value
beteween 12 frames (12P) to 50 frames (50P)
when system mode is set to 720-50P.
Pressing the SYNCHRO SCAN switch while the JOG
dial button is held down and the frame rate indication
is blinking allows you to change the frame rate as long
as recording is not in progress.
In the SYSTEM SETUP screen, set the menu
option SYSTEM MODE to 720-59.94P (72050P) and the menu option REC FORMAT to
AVC-I 100/60P (50P).
3
Press the REC button.
This starts recording in the VFR mode (OVER 60P
(50P)).
This mode can be combined with the AVC-I 100/60P (50P),
AVC-I 50/60P (50P) and DVCPRO HD/60P (50P) recording
formats.
For details, refer to [List of recording, playback and output
formats] (page 52).
For details, refer to [SYSTEM SETUP screen] (page 135).
Setting a low frame rate and recording a fast-moving
subject at 60P (50P) will produce a smoothly flowing
sequence at playback.
NOTE
• Audio playback is disabled when a frame rate converter is
used to extract active frames for over and under-cranking.
• Note the following about standard VFR recording.
- The P2 card that is being recorded cannot be changed
during recording.
- Pre-recording, loop recording, interval recording, one-shot
recording, and one-clip recording are not available.
- 1394 output is available during recording and recording
standby, but not in AVC Intra mode.
- Changing Scene Dial position during recording does not
change VFR on and off position.
- Sound is recorded.
39
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
Native VFR Recording
Standard VFR recording
(pulldown recording)
Using VFR Recording Function
Standard speed for film production (only when SYSTEM MODE is set to 720-59.94P,
1080-59.94i)
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
Screen production normally requires a 24 fps (24 frames per second) frame rate (normal speed) for screening a film.
Making the settings described below will provide film-quality playback. The 720P progressive mode and cine-like gamma
will make video look like it was shot with a film camera.
Standard settings for film production
SYSTEM MODE
720 - 59.94P
1080 - 59.94i
SYSTEM MODE settings
Other settings
AVC-I 100/24PN
REC FORMAT
(AVC-I 50/24PN)
(DVCPRO HD/24PN)
VFR
OFF
AVC-I 100/24PN
REC FORMAT
(AVC-I 50/24PN)
(DVCPRO HD/60i)
CAMERA MODE *1
24P
Recording frame rate
24 frames
*1 Only when the menu option REC FORMAT is set to DVCPRO HD/60i in the SYSTEM SETUP screen.
Shooting at standard speed for producing commercials and TV programs
Production aimed at HDTV and SDTV broadcasts for TV audiences must use the frame rate (x1) of 30fps (30 frames/s),
25fps (25 frames/s). The settings below allow you to obtain the kind of playback used for broadcast programs. This permits
film-like video recording of commercials and music clips that also provide a frame rate suitable for broadcasting.
Standard settings for producing commercials and dramas
SYSTEM MODE
720-59.94P
1080-59.94i
720-50P
1080-50i
SYETEM MODE settings
Other settings
AVC-I 100/30PN
REC FORMAT
(AVC-I 50/30PN)
(DVCPROHD/30PN)
VFR
OFF
AVC-I 100/30PN
REC FORMAT
(AVC-I 50/30PN)
(DVCPROHD/60i)
CAMERA MODE *2
30P
AVC-I 100/25PN
REC FORMAT
(AVC-I 50/25PN)
(DVCPROHD/25PN)
VFR
OFF
AVC-I 100/25PN
REC FORMAT
(AVC-I 50/25PN)
(DVCPROHD/50i)
CAMERA MODE *2
25P
Recording frame rate
30 frames
25 frames
*2 Only when the menu option REC FORMAT is set to DVCPRO HD/60i (50i) in the SYSTEM SETUP screen.
40
Undercranking effects
This effect produces the quick motion often used for showing clouds drifting across the sky, crowds of people swarming
past a solitary standing individual, a kung fu demonstration and other performances. For example, selecting a VFR
recording frame rate of 12 fps when shooting at a 24P recording format yields a fast-motion effect of approx. 2x normal
speed. The same effect can be obtained at a 30P recording and a 25P recording.
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
Standard setup for undercranking effects
SYSTEM MODE
720-59.94P
720-50P
SYETEM MODE settings
Other settings
AVC-I 100/24PN
REC FORMAT
(AVC-I 50/24PN)
(DVCPRO HD/24PN)
VFR
ON
FRAME RATE
Set to 22 frames or less
AVC-I 100/25PN
REC FORMAT
(AVC-I 50/25PN)
(DVCPROHD/25PN)
VFR
ON
FRAME RATE
Set to 24FRAME or less
Recording frame rate
12 to 22 frames
12 to 24 frames
• With the menu option REC FORMAT set to DVCPRO HD/60P (50P), you can use a nonlinear editing system to generate
quick motion effects from the resulting footage.
Overcranking effects
Overcranking produces slow-motion playback, which is frequently used in climax scenes, or for dramatic effects like car
chases and action scenes. For example, selecting a recording frame rate of 60 fps when shooting a 24P recording format
yields a slow-motion effect that is 2.5 times normal speed. Shooting 720P progressive video will produce smooth and highquality slow-motion. The same effect can be obtained at a 30P recording and a 25P recording.
Standard setup for overcranking effects
SYSTEM MODE
720-59.94P
720-50P
SYSTEM MODE setup
Other settings
AVC-I 100/24PN
REC FORMAT
(AVC-I 50/24PN)
(DVCPRO HD/24PN)
VFR
ON
FRAME RATE
Set to 25 frames or more
AVC-I 100/25PN
REC FORMAT
(AVC-I 50/25PN)
(DVCPRO HD/25PN)
VFR
ON
FRAME RATE
Set to 26 frames or more
Recording frame rate
25 to 60 frames
26 to 50 frames
•W
ith the menu option REC FORMAT set to DVCPRO HD/60P (50P), you can use a nonlinear editing system to generate
slow motion effects from the resulting footage.
41
Special Recording Modes
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
During P2 card recording, the following special recording
modes can be enabled from the RECORDING SETUP
screen: pre-recording, interval recording, one-shot
recording, loop recording, and one-clip recording.
These recording modes (excluding one-clip recording) are
available only with the following settings.
One-clip recording mode is available in all recording
modes, except when VFR is turned ON in 720P system
mode.
SYSTEM MODE
1080-59.94i
1080-50i
720-59.94P
720-50P
480-59.94i
576-50i
REC FORMAT
Other conditions
DVCPROHD/60i
Set CAMERA
AVC-I 100/60i
MODE to 60i or 30P
AVC-I 50/60i
DVCPROHD/50i
AVC-I 100/50i
AVC-I 50/50i
DVCPROHD/60P
AVC-I 100/60P
Turn VFR OFF
AVC-I 50/60P
DVCPROHD/50P
AVC-I 100/50P
Turn VFR OFF
AVC-I 50/50P
DVCPRO 50/60i
Set CAMERA
DVCPRO/60i
MODE to 60i or 30P
DV/60i
DVCPRO 50/50i
DVCPRO/50i
DV/50i
Pre-recording (PRE REC)
This function is used to start recording a certain number of
seconds (approx. 3 seconds for HD recordings or approx.
7 seconds for SD recordings) before actual recording
starts.
Starting recording
Stopping recording
(time)
Actual recording time
PRE REC time
1
Check that the SYSTEM SETUP screen is set
up as described above.
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 129).
2
Set the menu option PREREC MODE to ON in
the RECORDING SETUP screen.
• The following indications appear in the special
recording display area in the viewfinder.
Recording: P-REC lights
Pause: P-PAUSE lights
For details, refer to [Screen displays] (page 75).
42
3
Press the REC button.
This setting will record audio and video a time
period prior to start of recording.
• The following recording modes will disable the
pre-recording function and start respective
recording function when selected.
• Recording of video input via the IEEE1394
connector
• When changing recording formats
• After a change from playback to recording
• During interval recording
• During one-shot recording
• During loop recording
• There may be a short delay in start of audio and
video recording when the REC button is pressed
directly after switching from thumbnail display
or playback to view what you are shooting, after
turning the power on and after changing the
PREREC MODE.
Interval recording (INTERVAL REC)
This function is used to record 1 frame at the time interval
set in the INTERVAL TIME item.
1 frame
recording
1 frame
recording
1 frame
recording
This function records a single shot at each unit of time
which has been set.
1
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 129).
Set INTERVAL Set INTERVAL
TIME setting
TIME setting
1
Check that the SYSTEM SETUP screen is set
up as described on page 42.
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 129).
2
3
4
Select INTERVAL in the menu option REC
FUNCTION in the RECORDING SETUP
screen.
Set the time in the menu option INTERVAL
TIME in the RECORDING SETUP screen.
Press the REC button.
• The camera will repeat 1-frame recording for the
time interval set in the INTERVAL TIME option.
• Press the STOP button to stop recording.
• To cancel this function, turn the camera off or
select NORMAL in the REC FUNCTION option.
• The following indications appear to the left of the
operation status display.
• During recording: “I-REC” stays lit.
• During a pause: “I-PAUSE” stays lit.
When a setting of less than 2 seconds is made
in step 3, “I-REC” blinks according to time
setting during recording.
• When stopped: “I-” in “I-PAUSE” blinks.
Check that the SYSTEM SETUP screen is set
up as described on page 42.
2
3
4
Select ONE SHOT in the menu option REC
FUNCTION in the RECORDING SETUP
screen.
Set the time in the menu option ONE SHOT
TIME in the RECORDING SETUP screen.
Press the REC button.
• The camera will pause recording after making a
recording that lasts the duration set in step 3.
• Press the STOP button to stop recording.
• To cancel this function, turn the camera off or
select NORMAL in the REC FUNCTION option.
• The following indications appear to the left of the
operation status display.
• During recording: “I-REC” stays lit.
• During a pause: “I-PAUSE” stays lit.
• When stopped: ”I-“ in “I-PAUSE” blinks.
NOTE
• No other functions are available during operation.
• The pre-recording and one-clip recording functions
are not available.
• Sound is not recorded.
• Data recorded (until the STOP button is pressed) in
this mode is recorded as a single file.
• There is no output from the DVCPRO/DV connector.
• During continuous one-shot recording, recording
operation speed may be decreased.
NOTE
• The pre-recording and one-clip recording functions
are not available.
• Sound is not recorded.
• Data recorded (until the STOP button is pressed) in
this mode is recorded as a single file.
• There is no output from the DVCPRO/DV connector.
43
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
(time)
One-shot recording
(ONE SHOT REC)
Loop recording (LOOP REC)
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
• When two P2 cards are inserted in the P2 card slots,
each card is recorded in succession.
• When there is no longer any space left on the cards,
recording starts over from the first card by recording new
clips over saved old clips.
For the clip recording time, see [Splitting clips recorded
on P2 cards] (page 33).
1st card
Before starting
loop recording
No recording
2nd card
Recorded
Recording start
First loop
recording
Second loop
recording
A
C
B
3
Check that the SYSTEM SETUP screen is set
up as described on page 42.
Select LOOP in the menu option REC
FUNCTION in the RECORDING SETUP
screen.
Press the REC button.
• Recording starts.
• Press the REC button to stop recording.
• To cancel this function, turn the camera off or
select NORMAL in the REC FUNCTION item.
• The following indications appear to the left of the
operation status display.
• During recording: “L-REC” stays lit.
• During a pause: “L-PAUSE” stays lit.
• When remaining memory is low: “P2 LACK L-”
blinks.
NOTE
• Use two P2 cards with at least one minute of
remaining recording time.
• The mode check screen shows standard recording
time depending on recording format as remaining P2
card time. When loop recording is stopped right after
deleting old data, the time of recordings on the card
may be shorter than indicated.
• This function is not available during IEEE1394 input.
• The pre-recording and one-clip recording functions
are not available.
• Canceling this function may take some time. The
succeeding operations are not available until the P2
CARD ACCESS LED goes from blinking to steady
lighting.
44
Instead of creating a new clip for each recording session
(i.e., operation from REC start to stop), this mode compiles
images from multiple recording sessions into a single clip.
REC Start
First Recording
B
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 129).
2
One-clip recording (ONE CLIP REC)
REC Start
Recording will be made on the areas with no recording
consecutively (A, B, then C). When all areas on all cards are
recorded, new recording (C) will be made by overwriting the
area A.
1
• During loop recording, the access LEDs for all P2
cards used in the recording light orange or blinks.
Note that removing any of the P2 cards will terminate
loop recording.
• Irregularity in the input GENLOCK reference signal
during loop recording may terminate recording.
Second Recording
REC stop
REC stop
REC Start
Nth Recording*
REC stop
Single Combined Clip
* Up to a maximum of 99 recordings can be combined into
a single clip. When the 99th recording ends, recordings
are no longer automatically combined into the same clip.
Subsequent recordings are combined into a new clip.
To use this function, set the menu option ONE CLIP REC to
ON in the RECORDING SETUP screen.
When one-clip recording mode is enabled, “1-CLIP”
appears in the viewfinder and at the top of the LCD monitor.
When you press the REC button on the camera to start your
first recording, “START 1CLIP” appears.
Any subsequent recordings are automatically combined
into the clip. Up to a maximum of 99 clips can be
combined into a single clip.
To record a new clip
Follow the instructions below to use a new and separate
clip and end combining to the clip.
 Press and hold the STOP button for about 2 seconds
while recording is paused. (operating while recording is
on standby)
Or
 Press and hold the REC button for about 2 seconds
to stop recording. (operating while recording is in
progress)
Follow the instructions above to end combining to the clip.
“END 1-CLIP” displays. Subsequent recordings use a new
and separate clip.
NOTE
• In addition to the aforementioned steps, the following ends
combining to the clip and subsequent recordings use a new
clip.
• When the power is turned off
• When the P2 card with the previous recording is removed
• When the P2 card is formatted or the clip is deleted (when
the previous combined clip does not exist)
• The clip does not stop combining even when the STOP
button is pressed in the Menu or on the thumbnail display.
• Pressing the STOP or REC button on a remote control unit
(AJ-RC10G) or extension control unit (AG-EC4G) does not
stop the clip compiling process.
To exit one-clip recording mode
NOTE
To cue to the start of the combined
section of the clip
A text memo can be automatically added to the start of the
recording, the start of a section can be cued for playback,
and the thumbnail of the location can be checked before
each recording.
To automatically add a text memo to the start point of the
recording, set the menu option START TEXT MEMO to ON
in the RECORDING SETUP screen.
Check and playback the location of the added text memo
by selecting THUMBNAIL → TEXT MEMO CLIPS from the
Thumbnail Menu and moving the cursor over the desired
clip.
Refer to [Playing back a clip at the position where a text
memo is recorded] (page 116) for details.
To cue to the location of the text memo during playback,
set the menu option SEEK SELECT to CLIP&T in the
OTHER FUNCTIONS screen, and press the FF or REW
button while playback is paused.
Proxy recording in one-clip recording
mode
Proxy recording is also possible in one-clip recording
mode.
As proxy data is also compiled into combined clips,
the data can be handled as a single clip in P2 Viewer.
However, note the following precautions when recording
proxy data to an SD memory card.
• If the SD memory card is removed and replaced while
compiling to a clip is in progress, proxy data will not
be recorded to the new SD memory card until the
compiling process is stopped. Check that there is
sufficient space and confirm the number of files (up
to 1000 clips can be recorded) before using an SD
memory card. If you want to continue proxy recording
after an SD memory card has been replaced, press and
hold the STOP button for about 2 seconds to stop the
compiling process, and start recording to a new clip.
• If recording to an SD memory card is stopped midprogress, the proxy data recorded on that card will be
incomplete and will not match the clip data recorded to
the P2 card.
Precautions for one-clip recording mode
You can change the VFR menu option to ON using the
scene dial or menu, even while compiling to a clip is
in progress. When you do so, the compiling process
is stopped, and a new clip will be created with each
recording operation thereafter.
•
•
•
• The following Menu items, related to the reading/
writing of the SD memory card and reading of the
settings file, cannot be executed.
LOAD/SAVE/INIT in SCENE FILE, all options in
CARD FUNCTIONS, CAC CARD READ in LENS
SETUP, USER FILE and MENU INIT in OTHER
FUNCTIONS
• The following thumbnail menu items cannot be
selected and executed.
OPERATION→ COPY
OPERATION → DEVICE SETUP → PROXY
The processing time to complete the recording may
take a little more time than normally to allow the clip to
be combined with subsequent recordings.
The fade process does not work on discontinuous audio
during playback where the recordings are combined
within the clip.
If non-linear editing software is used on clips with
multiple combined recordings, the software may not
operate normally (as of Apr. 2010).
For the latest information on software that has been
confirmed to work with these types of clips, visit the
support desk at the following website.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
PROXY Recording Function
(Optional)
Installing an optional video encoder card (AJ-YAX800G) in
P2 card slot 2 makes it possible to record MPEG4 format
video, time code data and other real-time data to P2 cards
or SD memory cards simultaneous with camera recording
of video and audio.
NOTE
Insert the video encoder card when the camera is turned off.
For details, refer to the supplied User’s Guide of the video
encoder card.
• This mode will not function when the interval recording,
one-shot recording, loop recording, or VFR recording
functions are selected.
• This mode will not function when the menu option REC
SIGNAL is set to 1394.
45
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
Set the menu option ONE CLIP REC to OFF.
• The menu and thumbnail operations are restricted as
follows when combining to the clip. Press and hold the
STOP button for about 2 seconds to stop combining to
the clip when switching to this mode.
• The following menu items cannot be changed.
SYSTEM MODE, REC SIGNAL, CAMERA MODE,
REC FORMAT, PC MODE, REC FUNCTION,
25M REC CH SEL
Hot Swap Recording
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
With a P2 card in each card slot it is possible to make
one continuous recording that spans two cards. And by
removing any card other than that being recorded, you can
make continuous recording on 2 or more cards (hot swap
recording).
Note that recognition of a P2 card may be delayed
depending on when it is inserted in an empty card slot
(for example, immediately after pre-recording or when a
recording continues from one card to the next). P2 cards
should be inserted when there is still 1 minute or more time
left on the card that is being recorded.
NOTE
This function is not compatible with hot-swap playback.
REC REVIEW Function
• Pressing the RET button on the lens after a recording will
automatically locate and play back the last two seconds
of the most recent clip. Holding down the RET button on
the lens will allow you to play back up to 10 seconds.
Use this function to check that recording is performed
normally. The camera returns to recording standby mode
after playback. If the clip is short, holding down the RET
button after a return to the beginning of the clip will not
result in playback of the clip before the current clip.
• You can use menu options USER MAIN, USER1 and
USER2 to assign the REC REVIEW function to a user
button. Select these options from the SW MODE screen.
NOTE
• Note that a backup recording performed on a backup device
connected to the DVCPRO/DV or SDI OUT connector will also
record video played back using the REC REVIEW function.
• In one-clip recording mode, the beginning of a clip is not
used as the start position for playback after returning as
far as possible with the REC REVIEW function or starting
playback while recording is paused. Instead, playback starts
from the start point of the most recent recording operation.
2
• SHOT MARK ON is displayed as a shot mark is
inserted in the currently recorded clip.
• Pressing this key a second time displays SHOT
MARK OFF and the shot mark is deleted.
NOTE
• A shot mark added during a pause after recording is added
to the most recently recorded clip.
• Shot marks can be added also in the thumbnail display.
• The shot mark function is not available during loop
recording, interval recording and one-shot recording. When
this function is not available, pressing this button displays
SHOT MARK INVALID.
• Shot marks can be set or cancelled in playback pause mode
but not during playback.
• Shot marks cannot be set or deleted for video data created
in a single hot-swap recording session consisting of multiple
clips unless all the P2 cards that contain the video data
for the entire session are inserted. In clips that consist of
multiple clips like the one above, shot marks can be added
only to the first clip of video data.
Text Memo Recording Function
Use this function to add text memos anywhere in the video
during clip recording or playback.
This makes it possible to display thumbnails only of clips
with text memos, or to display thumbnails and time codes
of text memo positions in order, to play back clips from text
memo points and select and copy only the sections you
want.
For details, refer to [Text Memo] (page 116).
To add text memos
1
Shot Marker (SHOT MARK)
Recording Function
This function can be used to distinguish a clip from other
clips by adding a thumbnail to each clip.
This also makes possible to display or play back the
marked clips only.
To add shot marks
1
In the SW MODE screen, assign TEXT MEMO
to a user button (USER MAIN, USER1 or
USER2) or the RET button on the lens.
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 129).
2
Press the user button (or the RET button on the
lens) to which TEXT MEMO has been assigned
during recording or playback.
• “TEXT MEMO” is displayed and a text memo is
inserted at the point the button is pressed.
NOTE
In the SW MODE screen, assign SHOT MARK
to a user button (USER MAIN, USER1 or
USER2) or the RET button on the lens.
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 129).
46
Press the user button (or the RET button on the
lens) to which SHOT MARK has been assigned
during recording or when recording is paused.
• You can insert up to 100 text memos per clip.
• Text memos cannot be added during loop recording, interval
recording and one-shot recording. When this function is not
available, pressing this button displays TEXT MEMO INVALID.
Normal and Variable Speed Playback
Normal speed playback
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to view playback in the
viewfinder and on the LCD monitor in color. Connecting a
color video monitor to the VIDEO OUT connector or SDI
OUT connector will enable playback of color video.
The PLAY/PAUSE button can be used to pause playback.
Fast-forward/fast-reverse playback
The FF and REW buttons provide 32× and 4× fast
playbacks and fast reverse playbacks. In stop mode, this
function will play back video at 32× speed and in playback
mode, it will play back video at 4× speed.
Clip cue up
When playback is paused, the FF button locates the
beginning of the next clip while staying in pause mode.
When playback is paused, the REW button locates the
beginning of the current clip while staying in pause mode.
NOTE
• It may take some time to load clip data if playback is started
or a thumbnail screen is opened right after removing or
inserting a P2 card or turning the power on. The thumbnail
screen displays UPDATING at such times.
• If a P2 card is inserted while another P2 card is being played
back, the clips on the inserted P2 card will not be played
back. A P2 card inserted during playback will be recognised
after playback ends.
• If you perform variable speed playback on a clip split across
more than one P2 card, sound may disappear for a moment.
This is not a malfunction.
• To play back a clip in a different SYSTEM MODE, adjust
the SYSTEM MODE to the clip to reset the camera before
playback.
• Playback of the audio channels CH5 to CH8 recorded on
another device is not possible.
47
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
Selecting recording signals
This camera records HD (1080i, 720P) signals using AVC-Intra or DVCPRO HD codecs and use a combination of
DVCPRO50, DVCPRO or DV codecs for recording SD (480i (576i)) signals.
It provides a variety of capture frame rates and recording frame rates (native recording) to suit specific applications.
Select recording and recording signal in the setting menus listed below.
Screen
Setting menu
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
SYSTEM MODE
REC SIGNAL
SYSTEM SETUP screen
REC FORMAT
CAMERA MODE
ASPECT CONV
VFR
SCENE FILE screen
FRAME RATE
Setting
Selects the 1080i, 720P or 480i (576i) signal format.
To change this setting, wait until TURN POWER OFF appears before
turning the power off and then turn it back on again.
Selects to record using this camera or from the DVCPRO/DV connector.
Selects AVC-Intra or DVCPRO HD codec and 60i (50i), 60P (50P), 30PN or
24PN (25PN) native recording in HD mode.
Selects DVCPRO50, DVCPRO or DV codec in SD mode.
Selects 60i (50i), 30P, 24P or 24PA (25P) pulldown recording in 1080i or
480i (576i) mode.
Selects the video aspect ratio for recording and output in SD mode (480i
(576i)).
Setting this function to ON in 720P mode starts variable frame rate capture
which records at the frame rate set in the FRAME RATE option.
For details, refer to [Variable Frame Rate (VFR) Recording] (page 39).
When the VFR option is set to ON, select the frame rate for variable frame
rate recording.
NOTE
• Changing the menu options SYSTEM MODE, REC SIGNAL, REC FORMAT and CAMERA MODE may distort video and audio, but
this is not a malfunction.
48
List of recording formats and functions
The table below lists the recording formats and recording functions that the camera supports.
Camera recording modes (When the menu option REC SIGNAL is set to CAMERA)
When SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080-59.94i, 720-59.94P, 480-59.94i
Setting
SYSTEM
CAMERA
REC FORMAT
MODE
MODE
VFR
AVC-I 100/60i
(AVC-I 50/60i)
AVC-I 100/30PN
Disabled
(AVC-I 50/30PN)
AVC-I 100/24PN
(AVC-I 50/24PN)
60i
Disabled
1080/60i
Disabled
30P
DVCPRO HD/
60i
24P
24PA
AVC-I 100/60P
(AVC-I 50/60P)
AVC-I 100/30PN
(AVC-I 50/30PN)
AVC-I 100/24PN
(AVC-I 50/24PN)
72059.94P
DVCPRO HD/
60P
Disabled
12-60
Disabled
30
ON
Other than
30
720/30PN Native VFR
(Audio cannot be
recorded)
OFF
Disabled
24
720/24PN Native
ON
Other than
24
720/24PN Native VFR
(Audio cannot be
recorded)
OFF
Disabled
60
720/60P
30
ON
OFF
DVCPRO HD/
24PN
24
Other than
above
Disabled
30
24P
24PA
DVCPRO HD
Approx. 64 min.
Approx. 64 min.
(Approx. 128 min.)
AVC-I 100
(AVC-I 50)
Approx. 128 min.
(Approx. 256 min.)
Approx. 160 min.
(Approx. 320 min.)
720/30PN Native
Disabled
24
720/24PN Native
ON
Other than
24
INTERVAL,
ONE SHOT
LOOP
REC
ONE
CLIP
REC





−
−
−
−

−
−
−
−











−
−
−
−

−
−
−
−


−
−
−

−
−
−

−
−
−

−
−
−

−

−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−

−
−
−
−
−
−

−

−

−

−

−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−

−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−

−
−
−
−
−
−










−
−
−
−

−
−
−
−

Approx. 64 min.
720/60P VFR
OFF
Disabled
Approx. 64 min.
(Approx. 128 min.)
Approx. 80 min.
(Approx. 160 min.)
720/30P Over60P
2:2 Pull Down
720/24P Over60P
2:3 Pull Down
720/30PN Native VFR
(Audio cannot be
recorded)
Disabled
Recording time *2 PRE PROXY
REC (optional)
720/30PN Native
Other than
30
30P
AVC-I 100
(AVC-I 50)
720/60P
ON
60i
DVCPRO 50/60i
480-59.94i DVCPRO/60i
DV/60i
1080/30PN
Native
1080/24PN
Native
1080/60i
1080/30P Over60i
2:2 Pull Down
1080/24P Over60i
2:3 Pull Down
1080/24PA Over60i
2:3:3:2 Pull Down
OFF
ON
OFF
Disabled
DVCPRO HD/
30PN
Recording format *1
DVCPRO HD
Approx. 128 min.
Approx. 160 min.
720/24PN Native VFR
(Audio cannot be
recorded)
480/60i
480/30P Over60i
2:2 Pull Down
DVCPRO50 Approx. 128 min.
DVCPRO*3 Approx. 256 min. *3
480/24P Over60i
DV*4
Approx. 256 min. *4
2:3 Pull Down
480/24PA Over60i
2:3:3:2 Pull Down
*1 24P and 30P indicate recording at 23.98P and 29.97P, respectively, while 60P and 60i indicate recording at 59.94P and
59.94i, respectively. Native mode records active frames only.
*2 Recording times are indicated for a single 64 GB P2 card. Two cards double the recording time.
Since native VFR mode records only active frames, the recording time and actual shooting time differ.
Example: In 24PN recording, shooting at a frame rate of 60 frames will result in a shooting time of 24/60 (0.4 times).
In 24PN recording, shooting at a frame rate of 12 frames will result in a shooting time of 24/12 (2 times).
*3 For DVCPRO/60i
*4 For DV/60i
49
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
108059.94i
Recording function
FRAME
RATE
[FRAME]
When SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080-50i, 720-50P, 576-50i
Setting
SYSTEM
CAMERA
REC FORMAT
MODE
MODE
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
AVC-I 100/50i
(AVC-I 50/50i)
Disabled
AVC-I 100/25PN
1080-50i (AVC-I 50/25PN)
50i
DVCPRO
HD/50i
25P
AVC-I 100/25PN
(AVC-I 50/25PN)
DVCPRO HD/
50P
Disabled
DVCPRO 50/50i
DVCPRO/50i
DV/50i
50i
25P
FRAME RATE
[FRAME]
Recording format
1080/50i
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
12-50
Disabled
25
1080/25PN
Native
1080/50i
1080/25P Over50i
2:2 Pull Down
720/50P
720/50P
720/25PN Native
Recording time
*2
AVC-I 100
(AVC-I 50)
Approx. 64 min.
(Approx. 128 min.)
DVCPRO HD
Approx. 64 min.
Approx. 64 min.
(Approx. 128 min.)
AVC-I 100
(AVC-I 50)
720/25PN Native VFR
Other than 25
(Audio cannot be
recorded)
OFF
Disabled
720/50P
50
720/50P
720/25P Over50P
25
ON
2:2 Pull Down
Other than
720/50P VFR
above
DVCPRO HD
OFF
Disabled
720/25PN Native
25
720/25PN Native VFR
ON
Other than 25
(Audio cannot be
recorded)
576/50i
DVCPRO50
Disabled
Disabled
DVCPRO *3
576/25P Over50i
DV *4
2:2 Pull Down
ON
DVCPRO HD/
25PN
576-50i
VFR
OFF
ON
OFF
AVC-I 100/50P
(AVC-I 50/50P)
720-50P
Recording function
*1
Approx. 128 min.
(Approx. 256 min.)
Approx. 64 min.
ONE
PRE PROXY INTERVAL, LOOP
CLIP
REC (optional) ONE SHOT REC
REC





−
−
−
−












−
−
−

−
−
−

−
−
−

−
−
−

−

−
−
−
−
−
−

−

−

−

−

−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−

−
−
−
−
−
−










Approx. 128 min.
Approx. 128 min.
Approx. 256 min. *3
Approx. 256 min. *4
*1 Native mode records active frames only.
*2 Recording times are indicated for a single 64 GB P2 card. Two cards double the recording time.
Since native VFR mode records only active frames, the recording time and actual shooting time differ.
Example: In 25PN recording, shooting at a frame rate of 50 frames will result in a shooting time of 25/50 (0.5 times).
In 25PN recording, shooting at a frame rate of 12 frames will result in a shooting time of 25/12 (approx.
2 times).
*3 For DVCPRO/50i
*4 For DV/50i
50
1394 input recording mode (when the REC SIGNAL option is set to 1394)
Recording function
PRE PROXY
REC (optional)
INTERVAL,
ONE SHOT
LOOP
REC
ONE
CLIP
REC
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
INTERVAL,
ONE SHOT
LOOP
REC
ONE
CLIP
REC
*1 60P and 60i is recorded at 59.94P and 59.94i, respectively.
*2 Recording times are indicated for a single 64 GB P2 card. Two cards double the recording time.
When SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080-50i, 720-50P, 576-50i
Setting
FRAME
Recording format
SYSTEM
REC
CAMERA
VFR
RATE
MODE
FORMAT
MODE
[FRAME]
1080-50i
Disabled
Disabled Disabled Disabled 1080/50i
DVCPRO HD
720-50P
Disabled
Disabled Disabled Disabled 720/50P
DVCPRO50/50i
576-50i
DVCPRO/50i
DV/50i
DVCPRO 50
Disabled Disabled Disabled 576/50i
DVCPRO
DV
Recording function
Recording
time *3
Approx.
64 min.
Approx.
128 min.
Approx.
256 min.
PRE PROXY
REC (optional)
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
*3 Recording times are indicated for a single 64 GB P2 card. Two cards double the recording time.
Recording settings and recording function table
The recording modes of the camera can be made to operate as described below using the setting menus.
Recording setting
Enabled and disabled functions and operations
REC
Proxy
ONE
Operating
REC
REC
FORMAT,
PRE
recording
VFR
CLIP
1394
TEXT SHOT
mode
SIGNAL FUNCTION CAMERA
REC
(Thumbnail
(MENU)
REC
output MEMO MARK
(MENU) (MENU)
MODE
function
menu)
function
(MENU) *6
(optional)
Disabled
Recording via
1394
Disabled (Enabled at 480i,
Disabled Enabled Enabled
1394 input
576i)
INTERVAL REC
INTERVAL
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
60i (50i), 60P
(Enabled at
Disabled
ONE SHOT REC
ONE SHOT (50P), 30P (25P)
Disabled
playback *4)
Disabled
Disabled
only
LOOP REC
LOOP
Enabled *4
Disabled *5
Native VFR
ON
Disabled
Disabled
24PN, 30PN
(Enabled at
Native recording CAMERA
(25PN)
OFF
Enabled
playback *4)
(VFR OFF)
NORMAL
Standard VFR
ON
Disabled
Enabled *4 Enabled Enabled
Other than
Standerd
24PN and 30PN
recording
OFF
Enabled Enabled
Enabled
Enabled *4
(25PN)
(VFR OFF)
*4 DV/DVCPRO only. Disabled in AVC-Intra mode.
*5 Enabled in PAUSE mode after LOOP REC
*6 24P and 30P indicate recording at 23.98P and 29.97P, respectively, while 60P and 60i indicate recording at 59.94P and
59.94i, respectively. Native mode records active frames only.
51
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
When SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080-59.94i, 720-59.94P, 480-59.94i
Setting
Recording
FRAME
Recording format *1
SYSTEM
REC
CAMERA
time *2
VFR
RATE
MODE
FORMAT
MODE
[FRAME]
1080-59.94i
Disabled
Disabled Disabled Disabled 1080/60i
Approx.
DVCPRO HD
64 min.
720-59.94P
Disabled
Disabled Disabled Disabled 720/60P
Approx.
DVCPRO50/60i
DVCPRO50
128 min.
480-59.94i
Disabled Disabled Disabled 480/60i
DVCPRO/60i
DVCPRO
Approx.
256 min.
DV/60i
DV
Selecting video output
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
The table below lists available video output formats.
Use the setting menus listed below to select video output.
Setting menu
Setting
SDI SELECT
Select the signal format (from AUTO, 1080i, 480i (576i)) to be output via the SDI OUT
(OUTPUT SEL screen)
connector. *1
When SYSTEM MODE is set to 480-59.94i, select the setup level for the signal
(composite) output via the VIDEO OUT connector.
SETUP
 0%: 0 % setup level for both output and recording
(SYSTEM SETUP screen)
 7.5%A: 7.5 % setup level for output only (0 % for recording)
 The SETUP menu setting is enabled also during playback.
DOWNCON MODE
Select the screen type for down-converted output (VIDEO OUT and SDI SELECT output
(OUTPUT SEL screen)
as 480i (576i)) of HD mode (1080i, 720P).
*1 HD (1080i, 720P) output cannot display thumbnails and SDI OUT outputs monochrome black screen.
List of recording, playback and output formats
Camera recording mode (when the REC SIGNAL option is set to CAMERA)
When SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080-59.94i, 720-59.94P, 480-59.94i
Setting
SYSTEM
MODE
REC
FORMAT
AVC-I 100/60i
(AVC-I 50/60i)
AVC-I 100/30PN
(AVC-I 50/30PN)
AVC-I 100/24PN
(AVC-I 50/24PN)
1080-59.94i
SDI OUT *2
CAMERA
MODE
VFR
FRAME
RATE
[FRAME]
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
30P
24P
24PA
OFF
ON
OFF
AVC-I 100/60P
(AVC-I 50/60P)
AVC-I 100/30PN
(AVC-I 50/30PN)
ON
OFF
AVC-I 100/24PN
(AVC-I 50/24PN)
ON
OFF
720-59.94P
Disabled
DVCPRO HD/60P
ON
ON
OFF
DVCPRO HD/24PN
Disabled
12-60
Disabled
30
Other than
30
Disabled
24
Other than
24
Disabled
60
30
OFF
DVCPRO HD/30PN
Video format
1080/60i
60i
DVCPRO HD/60i
Recording format *1
ON
24
Other than
above
Disabled
30
Other than
30
Disabled
24
Other than
24
1080/30PN
Native
1080/24PN
Native
1080/60i
1080/30P Over60i
2:2 Pull Down
1080/24P Over60i
2:3 Pull Down
1080/24PA Over60i
2:3:3:2 Pull Down
Audio
1080-59.94i
AVC-I 100
(AVC-I 50)
DVCPRO HD
720/60P
1080-29.97PsF
Over59.94i 2:2
1080-29.97PsF
Over59.94i 2:3
1080-59.94i
1080-29.97PsF
Over59.94i 2:2
1080-23.98PsF
Over59.94i 2:3
1080-23.98PsF
Over59.94i 2:3:3:2
720-59.94P
720-59.94P VFR
4ch
No output
4ch
1080-59.94i
DVCPRO HD
4ch
720-29.97P
Over59.94P 2:2
4ch
720-59.94P VFR
Muted
720/24PN Native
720-23.98P
Over59.94P 2:3
4ch
720/24PN Native VFR
(Audio cannot be recorded)
720-59.94P VFR
Muted
720/60P
720-59.94P
720/30P Over60P
2:2 Pull Down
720/24P Over60P
2:3 Pull Down
720-29.97P
Over59.94P 2:2
720-23.98P
Over59.94P 2:3
720/30PN Native
720/30PN Native VFR
(Audio cannot be recorded)
1394 output
AVC-I 100
(AVC-I 50)
720/60P VFR
4ch
No output
720-59.94P
DVCPRO HD
720-59.94P VFR
DVCPRO HD
720/30PN Native
720-29.97P
Over59.94P 2:2
720/30PN Native VFR
(Audio cannot be recorded)
720-59.94P VFR
Muted
720/24PN Native
720-23.98P
Over59.94P 2:3
4ch
720/24PN Native VFR
(Audio cannot be recorded)
720-59.94P VFR
Muted
No output *4
(Continued on the next page)
52
Setting
SYSTEM
MODE
REC
FORMAT
SDI OUT *2
CAMERA
MODE
VFR
FRAME
RATE
[FRAME]
60i
480-59.94i
30P
DVCPRO50/60i
DVCPRO/60i
DV/60i
24P
Disabled
Disabled
24PA
Recording format *1
480/60i
480/30P Over60i
2:2 Pull Down
480/24P Over60i
2:3 Pull Down
480/24PA Over60i
2:3:3:2 Pull Down
DVCPRO50
DVCPRO*5
DV*6
Video format
Audio
480-59.94i
480-29.97PsF
Over59.94i 2:2
480-23.98PsF
Over59.94i 2:3
480-23.98PsF
Over59.94i 2:3:3:2
4ch or
2ch*3
1394 output
480-59.94i
DVCPRO50
DVCPRO*5
DV*6
NOTE
VIDEO OUT outputs SD signals (480i) at all times.
When SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080-50i, 720-50P, 576-50i
Setting
SDI OUT *2
SYSTEM
MODE
REC
FORMAT
CAMERA
MODE
Disabled
1080-50i
AVC-I 100/50i
(AVC-I 50/50i)
AVC-I 100/25PN
(AVC-I 50/25PN)
VFR
FRAME
RATE
[FRAME]
1080/50i
Disabled
Disabled
50i
DVCPRO HD/50i
25P
OFF
ON
OFF
AVC-I 100/50P
(AVC-I 50/50P)
AVC-I 100/25PN
(AVC-I 50/25PN)
ON
OFF
720-50P
Disabled
DVCPRO HD/50P
ON
OFF
DVCPRO HD/25PN
576-50i
DVCPRO 50/50i
DVCPRO/50i
DV/50i
Recording format *1
ON
Disabled
12-50
Disabled
25
Other than
25
Disabled
50
25
Other than
above
Disabled
25
Other than
25
50i
25P
Disabled
Disabled
1080/25PN Native
1080/50i
1080/25P Over50i
2:2 Pull Down
720/50P
720/50P
720/25PN Native
Video format
AVC-I 100
(AVC-I 50)
DVCPRO HD
AVC-I 100
(AVC-I 50)
720/25PN Native VFR
(audio cannot be recorded)
720/50P
720/50P
720/25P Over50P
2:2 Pull Down
720/50P VFR
576/25P Over50i
2:2 Pull Down
1394 output
1080-50i
1080-25PsF
Over50i 2:2
1080-50i
1080-25PsF
Over50i 2:2
720-50P
720-50P VFR
720-25P
Over50P 2:2
720-50P VFR
4ch
No output
4ch
1080-50i
DVCPRO HD
4ch
4ch
No output
Muted
720-50P
720-25P
Over50P 2:2
DVCPRO HD
720/25PN Native
720/25PN Native VFR
(audio cannot be recorded)
576/50i
Audio
DVCPRO50
DVCPRO
DV
4ch
720-50P
DVCPRO HD
720-50P VFR
720-25P
Over50P 2:2
4ch
720-50P VFR
Muted
No output *4
576-50i
576-25PsF
Over50i 2:2
4ch or
2ch *3
576-50i
DVCPRO50
DVCPRO
DV
*1 Native mode records active frames only.
*2 Varies with SDI SELECT option. In the table above the SDI SELECT option is set to AUTO.
AUTO: depends on SYSTEM MODE
1080i: outputs 1080i also when the SYSTEM MODE is 720P.
576i: outputs as 576i at all times
*3 Uses a 4ch setting for DVCPRO50 and observes the 2CH or 4CH setting in the menu option 25M REC CH SEL in the
AUDIO SETUP screen for DVCPRO and DV.
*4 Outputs 720-50P DVCPRO HD during playback.
NOTE
VIDEO OUT outputs SD signals (576i) at all times.
53
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
*1 24P and 30P indicate recording at 23.98P and 29.97P, respectively, while 60P and 60i indicate recording at 59.94P and
59.94i, respectively. Native mode records active frames only.
*2 Varies with SDI SELECT option. In the table above the SDI SELECT option is set to AUTO.
AUTO: depends on SYSTEM MODE
1080i: outputs 1080i also when the SYSTEM MODE is 720P.
480i: outputs as 480i at all times
*3 Uses a 4ch setting for DVCPRO50 and observes the 2CH or 4CH setting in the menu option 25M REC CH SEL in the
AUDIO SETUP screen for DVCPRO and DV.
*4 Outputs 720-59.94P DVCPRO HD during playback.
*5 For DVCPRO/60i
*6 For DV/60i
1394 input recording mode (when the REC SIGNALoption is set to 1394)
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
When SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080-59.94i, 720-59.94P, 480-59.94i
Setting
SDI OUT *2
FRAME
Recording format *1
SYSTEM
REC
CAMERA
VFR
RATE
Video format
Audio
MODE
FORMAT
MODE
[FRAME]
1080-59.94i
Disabled
Disabled Disabled Disabled 1080/60i
1080-59.94i
4ch
DVCPRO HD
720-59.94P
Disabled
Disabled Disabled Disabled 720/60P
720-59.94P
4ch
DVCPRO50/60i
DVCPRO50
4ch
480-59.94i
DVCPRO/60i
Disabled Disabled Disabled 480/60i
DVCPRO
480-59.94i
2ch
DV/60i
DV
2ch or 4ch*3
*1 60P and 60i is recorded at 59.94P and 59.94i, respectively.
*2 Varies with the SDI SELECT option. The table above shows operating conditions when the SDI SELECT option is set to
AUTO.
AUTO: depends on SYSTEM MODE
1080i: outputs 1080i also when the SYSTEM MODE is 720P.
480i: outputs as 480i at all times
*3 32 kHz 4ch input is converted and recorded at 48 kHz 4ch.
When SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080-50i, 720-50P, 576-50i
Setting
SDI OUT *4
FRAME
Recording format
SYSTEM
CAMERA
RECFORMAT
VFR
RATE
Video format
Audio
MODE
MODE
[FRAME]
1080-50i
Disabled
Disabled Disabled Disabled 1080/50i
1080-50i
4ch
DVCPRO HD
720-50P
Disabled
Disabled Disabled Disabled 720/50P
720-50P
4ch
DVCPRO50/50i
DVCPRO 50
4ch
576-50i
DVCPRO/50i
Disabled Disabled Disabled 576/50i
DVCPRO
576-50i
2ch
DV/50i
DV
2ch or 4ch *5
*4 Varies with the SDI SELECT option. The table above shows operating conditions when the SDI SELECT option is set to
AUTO.
AUTO: depends on SYSTEM MODE
1080i: outputs 1080i also when the SYSTEM MODE is 720P.
576i: outputs as 576i at all times
*5 32 kHz 4ch input is converted and recorded at 48 kHz 4ch.
54
Adjusting the White Balance and Black Balance
NOTE
If white balance and black balance adjustments are made
while the video image is distorted due to GENLOCK, the
adjustments may not be correct. Wait for the video image
to return to normal before performing white balance and
black balance adjustments again.
2
Adjust the ND FILTER control according to the
light conditions.
For examples of ND FILTER adjustments, see
[Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions
Section] (page 21).
3
Place a white pattern at a point where the light
conditions match those for the light source of
the subject. Then zoom-in on the white pattern
so that white colour appears in the screen.
• A white object (cloth or wall) may be used instead
of a white pattern. The illustration below shows the
required size for the white space.
Adjusting the White Balance
NOTE
Whenever light conditions change, the white balance must
be readjusted.
To adjust the white balance, follow the steps below.
• Do not point the camera at a high-brightness area.
• The white object must appear at the center of the
screen.
1/3 or more of the screen in width
1/3 or more of the
screen in height
4
a
b
c d e
a ND FILTER control
This control adjusts the amount of light entering the
MOS sensor.
b AUTO W/B BAL switch
Use for automatic control of white balance.
c GAIN selector switch
Normally set to 0 dB. If this is too dark, adjust gain as
necessary.
d OUTPUT selector switch
Set to CAM.
5
Adjust the lens iris.
• Use the Y GET function (for details, refer to
page 61) and adjust the iris to a approximately
70 % of incoming light.
Turn the AUTO W/B BAL switch toward AWB
and release it.
• The switch returns to the central position with the
white balance automatically adjusted.
6
During an adjustment, the viewfinder displays
the following message:
AWB Ach ACTIVE
e WHITE BAL switch
Set to A or B.
1
Set the GAIN, OUTPUT and WHITE BAL
switches.
55
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
To record high-quality video with the AG-HPX370P/AGHPX371E, the black and white balances must be adjusted
according to conditions.
For higher quality, it is recommended that the adjustments
should be made in this order AWB (white balance
adjustment)  ABB (black balance adjustment)  AWB
(white balance adjustment).
7
SW MODE
The adjustment will take effect in a few
seconds, and the following message will
appear:
LOW GAIN
MID GAIN
HIGH GAIN
ATW
ATW TYPE
W.BAL.PRESET
USER MAIN
USER1
• The adjusted value is automatically stored in the
selected memory (A or B).
AWB A OK 3.2K
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
• “C TEMP+7” to “C TEMP-7” will appear when
COLOR TEMP of the scene file is set to the value
other than 0.
8
If the subject’s colour temperature is lower
than 2300K or higher than 9900K the following
message appears:
• If the arrow points down (  ) the actual colour
temperature is lower than the temperature
indicated. If the arrow points up (  ) the actual
temperature is higher than the temperature
indicated.
0dB
6dB
9dB
Bch
1
3.2K
DRS
REC REVIEW
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
Cancelling auto tracking white balance
Press the USER button to which ATW was assigned a
second time or change the WHITE BAL switch position. If
ATW was assigned to the WHITE BAL switch B, the USER
button cannot be used to cancel the function.
NOTE
This function does not provide a 100 % accurate white
balance. The tracking performance relative to changes in
ambient lighting and white balance performance have been
given a degree of latitude.
AWB A OK 2.3K
Adjusting the Black Balance
When you have no time to adjust the
white balance
Position the WHITE BAL switch at PRST.
• Turning the AUTO W/B BAL switch to AWB toggles the
color temperature between 3200 K and 5600 K.
When the white balance has not been
automatically adjusted
The black balance must be adjusted when:
• You use your AG-HPX370P/AG-HPX371E the first time.
• Your AG-HPX370P/AG-HPX371E has not been used for
some time.
• The ambient temperature has changed substantially.
• The gain switchover value has been changed.
• The menu options SYSTEM MODE and REC FORMAT in
the SYSTEM SETUP screen.
Adjust the black balance before shooting to ensure
optimum video quality.
When the white balance has not been successfully
adjusted, the viewfinder displays an error message.
Error message
Description
AWB Ach
The color temperature is too high or
(or Bch) NG
too low.
LOW LIGHT
There is insufficient light.
LEVEL OVER
There is too much light.
Viewfinder displays related to white
balance
See [Viewfinder Screen Status Displays] (page 74).
Setting auto tracking white balance (ATW)
This camera is equipped with an auto tracking white
balance (ATW) function that automatically adjusts the white
balance of images in accordance with lighting conditions.
The ATW function can be assigned to the WHITE BAL
switch B by setting the menu option ATW in the SW MODE
screen to B ch.
It can also be assigned to the USER MAIN, USER1, USER2
buttons.
For details, refer to [Assigning functions to USER buttons]
(page 61).
56
a
b
a AUTO W/B BAL switch
Use for automatic control of white balance.
b OUTPUT selector switch
Set to CAM.
1
Tilt the AUTO W/B BAL switch so that it is
positioned at [ABB], then release it.
• The switch returns to the central position with the
black balance automatically adjusted.
2
During adjustment, the viewfinder displays the
following message:
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
ABB ACTIVE
3
The adjustment will take effect in a few seconds
and the following message will appear:
ABB END
• The adjusted value is automatically stored in the
memory.
NOTE
• Ensure that the lens connector is connected and the lens iris
is CLOSE.
• During a black balance adjustment, light is automatically
cut off. However, if the lens connector comes loose or light
cannot be cut off for some other reason, “ABB NG” may
appear.
• Black balance adjustment is not available during recording.
• Pressing the REC button during ABB adjustment will not
start recording on a P2 card.
57
Setting the Electronic Shutter
Setting the Shutter Mode and
Speed
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
1
Press the SHUTTER switch positioned at OFF
towards ON.
When SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080-50i, 72050P, 576-50i
For 50i and 50P recording
S/S (1/12.5) (1/25) 1/50 1/60 1/120
1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000
For 25P recording
S/S (1/6.25) (1/12.5) 1/50 1/60 1/120
1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000
• The bracketed ( ) speeds cannot be selected
when VFR is on.
NOTE
SHUTTER switch
2
Press the SHUTTER switch towards [SEL].
Repeat this switchover until the desired mode
or speed appears in the viewfinder screen.
• If all modes and speeds are available, the display
changes in the following order:
When SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080-59.94i, 72059.94P, 480-59.94i
For 60i and 60P recording
S/S (1/15) (1/30) 1/60 1/100 1/120
1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000
For 30P recording
S/S (1/7.5) (1/15) 1/60 1/100 1/120
1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000
For 24P recording
S/S (1/6) (1/12) 1/60 1/100 1/120
1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000
• The bracketed ( ) speeds cannot be selected
when VFR is on.
58
• In any electronic shutter mode, a slower shutter speed will
reduce camera sensitivity.
• In auto iris mode, a faster shutter speed will increase the
aperture and lower the depth of field.
• Changes in synchro scan and shutter speed settings may
cause screen flicker.
• Under fluorescent lighting and other discharge lighting
systems, horizontal stripes may appear on the screen.
Changing the shutter speed may correct this problem.
• A subject that is captured when moving quickly across the
field of view may appear distorted. This is due to the signal
read out format of the image sensor (MOS sensor) and is not
a malfunction.
• The red, blue and green dots that may appear on the screen
at low shutter speeds do not indicate a malfunction.
Viewfinder displays relating to the shutter
See [Viewfinder Screen Status Displays] (page 74).
Placing the Camera-recorder in
SYNCHRO SCAN Mode
To place the camera-recorder in SYNCHRO SCAN mode,
follow the steps below.
1
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
Press the SHUTTER switch positioned at ON
towards SEL, to place the camera-recorder in
SYNCHRO SCAN (S/S) mode.
SHUTTER switch
SYNCHRO SCAN switch
2
In SYNCHRO SCAN mode, use the SYNCHRO
SCAN switch to make stepless changes in
the range between 1/60.0 s (1/50.0 s) and
1/249.8 s (1/250 0 s) (for 60i (50i) mode).
• Hold down the SYNCHRO SCAN switch to speed
up the rate of shutter speed changes.
If shutter speed changes stop before the desired
shutter speed has been reached, press again to
continue changing shutter speeds.
Range of variation in each mode

When SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080-59.94i, 720-59.94P,
480-59.94i
•6
0P/60i mode: 1/60.0 to 1/249.8
•3
0P/30PN mode: 1/30.0 to 1/249.8
•2
4P/24PA/24PN mode: 1/24.0 to 1/249.8
•W
hen the SYNC SCAN DISP option in DISPLAY SETUP is
set to deg: 3.0d to 359.5d

When SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080-50i, 720-50P,
576‑50i
• 50P/50i mode: 1/50.0 to 1/250.0
• 25P/25PN mode: 1/25.0 to 1/250.0
• When the SYNC SCAN DISP option in DISPLAY SETUP is
set to deg: 3.0d to 359.5d
• If SYSTEM MODE setting is changed, shutter speed may
also be changed.
Setting the menu option SYNC SCAN DISP in the DISPLAY
SETUP screen to deg provides a guide to setting and
displaying shutter angle.
59
FBC (Flash Band Compensation) Function
This camera-recorder comes with a function to compensate
for and minimize light band (flash band) interference
that occurs with the MOS imager when shooting in an
environment where flash photography is taking place.
Time flow
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
Flash light
NOTE
The following phenomena that may occur in video that
includes flash light is due to FBC compensation and not
indicative of a malfunction.
• Moving subjects may appear to be stationary for an instant.
• Resolution decreases in video exposed to flash light.
• Horizontal lines appear in video footage exposed to flash
light.
Using FBC
Image recorded
(FBC off)
Flash band
Setting FBC function
Assign the FBC function to a USER button.
Press the USER button to which the FBC function has
been assigned to turn it on and automatically detect and
compensate for flash light from still cameras.
For details, refer to [Assigning functions to USER buttons]
(page 61).
USER MAIN, USER1 and USER2 buttons
The status display indicates “FBC” when the FBC function
is on. *1
TC
12 : 34 : 56 : 23
12
I - PAUSE
1 9 9 9 min
P 2 L ACK
1394
1080 i
AVC-I100
B 9 0%
USER - 1
CAC
F BC
60
P 3 .2 K
0 dB
ND 1
PROXY
L T . BOX
8 3% ND 1
FEB 2 5
6 0 : 2 4 PN
DRS
=== =====
1/ 2 5 0
C
H
C
H
1
2
2008
S POT
F5 . 6
23 : 59 : 59
Z99
*1 Not displayed when the menu option OTHER DISPLAY in
the DISPLAY SETUP screen is set to OFF.
60
FBC goes on when the brightness of the lower half of the
image differs markedly from the previous half, which could
be caused by light from a camera flash or other strong light
source. Since FBC may be incorrectly activated in certain
shooting environments, for example, in zooming that includes
a bright window, be sure to use the function only for shooting
footage exposed to flash light.
In some shooting environments adequate FBC effect may not
be obtained even when a flash goes off.
FBC requirements
• The FBC function is available in the 1080/60i, 720/60P (VFR
OFF) 480/60i, 1080/50i, 720/50P (VFR OFF) and 576/50i modes
when the shutter off.
• Switching to an operating mode other than 1080/60i, 720/60P
(VFR OFF) 480/60i, 1080/50i, 720/50P (VFR OFF) and 576/50i
turns FBC off if on.
To turn on FBC after returning to 1080/60i, 720/60P (VFR OFF)
480/60i, 1080/50i, 720/50P (VFR OFF) and 576/50i, press the
USER button to which the function is assigned.
• Turning the shutter on when the FBC function is engaged
temporarily turns it off.
The FBC function goes back on when the shutter is later
turned off.
• Turning the power off disengages the FBC function.
Assigning functions to USER buttons
The USER MAIN, USER1, and USER2 buttons can be
assigned user-selected functions.
Use the menu options USER MAIN, USER1, and USER2 to
assign functions to respective button. Select these items
from the setting menu SW MODE screen.
SW MODE
0dB
6dB
12dB
OFF
1
3.2K
Y GET
BACKLIGHT
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
Selectable Functions
NOTE
The default settings are listed below.
• USER MAIN: Y GET
• USER1: BACKLIGHT
• USER2:
TEXT MEMO
• REC REVIEW:
Assigns REC REVIEW.
• SPOTLIGHT:
Assigns auto iris control on/off for spotlight.
• BACKLIGHT:
Assigns auto iris control on/off for backlight
compensation.
• ATW:
Turns the ATW function on or off.
• ATW LOCK:
Pressing this lock during ATW operation locks
the white balance. Press again to start the ATW
function again.
• GAIN:24dB:
Assigns a function that raises gain by 24 dB.
• Y GET:
Assigns a function that displays the brightness
level at the center of the image.
• DRS:
Assigns a function that stretches the dynamic
range. A function that magnifies the dynamic
range by compressing the video level in highbrightness areas.
• TEXT MEMO:
Assigns text memory recording.
• SLOT SEL:
Assigns P2 card slot selection.
• SHOT MARK:
Assigns the shot marker function.
• MAG A. LVL:
Assigns a function that magnifies the audio level
meter.
• PRE REC:
Assigns a function that turns the PRE REC
function on and off.
61
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
LOW GAIN
MID GAIN
HIGH GAIN
ATW
ATW TYPE
W.BAL.PRESET
USER MAIN
USER1
• PC MODE:
Assigns a function that switches the USB
device mode or the USB host mode on and off.
Switching the USB device mode and USB host
mode on and off is set by the menu option PC
MODE SELECT in the SYSTEM SETUP screen.
• WFM:
Assigns a function that switches WAVE FORM
display. The WAVE FORM display is selected
using the menu option WFM (page 138) in the
SW MODE screen.
• FBC:
Turns the FBC function on or off.
Selecting Audio Input Signals and Adjusting Recording Levels
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
This AG-HPX370P/AG-HPX371E supports independent
four-channel audio recording in any format (HD or SD).
When the AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 switch is positioned
at [AUTO], the recording levels for Audio Channels 1
and 2 are automatically adjusted. To manually adjust the
recording levels, position the switch at [MAN].
A setting menu allows you set the recording levels for
Audio Channels 3 and 4 either to automatic adjustment or
manual mode.
Use the AUDIO SETUP screen in the setting menu to make
detailed audio settings.
AUDIO SETUP
FRONT VR CH1
FRONT VR CH2
MIC LOWCUT CH1
MIC LOWCUT CH2
MIC LOWCUT CH3
MIC LOWCUT CH4
LIMITER CH1
LIMITER CH2
Selecting Audio Input Signals
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
The input signals to be recorded on Audio Channels 1, 2,
3, and 4 are selected with the AUDIO IN switch. For more
information, see [Audio (input) Function Section] (page 19).
a
b
Adjusting Recording Levels
To adjust the recording levels for Audio Channels 1 and 2,
follow the steps below.
1
2
3
c d
e
a AUDIO LEVEL CH1/CH2 controls
b AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 switch
c MONITOR SELECT CH1/3, ST, CH2/4 selector switch
d MONITOR SELECT CH1/2, CH3/4 selector switch
Position the MONITOR SELECT CH1/2, CH3/4selector switch at CH1/2 so that the audio level
meter on the display window will provide CH1
and CH2 indications. Ensure that the channel
indications displayed in the window are 1 and 2.
Position the AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 switch
at [MAN].
While checking the audio channel level meter in
the display window or the audio level meter in
the viewfinder, adjust the AUDIO LEVEL CH1/
CH2 control.
• Note that if the level exceeds the top bar (0 dB),
the word OVER illuminates to show that the input
level is excessive. Adjust so that maximum sound
levels do not reach the 0 dB bar.
e AUDIO IN switch
Your AG-HPX370P/AG-HPX371E is factory-set to perform
no recording on Audio Channels 3 and 4 in the DVCPRO
and DV formats. To enable four-channel recording, the
menu option 25M REC CH SEL on the AUDIO SETUP
screen must be set to 4CH.
For details on switch settings and the input system, see
[AUDIO IN switch] (page 19).
NOTE
• The audio signals recorded on the four channels are output
as is (SDI).
62
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
C
H
C
H
1
2
OVER indication
NOTE
ressing the USER button to which the magnification of the
P
audio level meters (MAG A.LVL) has been assigned magnifies
the audio level meters.
For details, refer to [Audio level meter magnification] (page 82).
When operating the AG-HPX370P/AG-HPX371E without a
sound recordist, it is recommended that the FRONT AUDIO
LEVEL control should be used to adjust the audio level.
In advance, check the level meter in the viewfinder screen
and use the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control to adjust the
appropriate audio channel to prevent input of excessive
audio signals.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
Selecting Function for the FRONT
AUDIO LEVEL Control
Use the menu options FRONT VR CH1 and FRONT VR
CH2 in the AUDIO SETUP screen to determine whether or
not the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control should be enabled.
Selecting an input signal in the menu will enable FRONT
AUDIO LEVEL control operations for that input signal.
• When the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control is set to level 10,
it controls AUDIO LEVEL CH1 and CH2.
AUDIO SETUP
FRONT VR CH1
FRONT VR CH2
MIC LOWCUT CH1
MIC LOWCUT CH2
MIC LOWCUT CH3
MIC LOWCUT CH4
LIMITER CH1
LIMITER CH2
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
CH3 and CH4 Recording Levels
Conditions and input levels set in the menu options AUTO
LEVEL CH3 and the AUTO LEVEL CH4 in the AUDIO
SETUP screen change the operation of the audio level of
channels 3 and 4 as shown below. These functions cannot
be manually adjusted.
Each option can be selected in the AUDIO SETUP screen.
Input level
AUTO LEVEL
CH3/CH4
LINE
MIC
ON
AGC* ON
AGC ON
OFF
AGC/LIMITER OFF
LIMITER ON
* AGC: Auto Gain Control
63
Setting Time Data
The camera provides time data such as time codes, user
bits, time of day (real-time) data, which is recorded on each
frame alongside video data. It is also recorded as as data
in clip metadata files.
Time data overview
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
Time code
Use the TCG switch to select Rec Run or Free Run mode.
• Free Run: The time code advances constantly whether
the camera is on or not just like time itself. Recording
using a slave-locked time code input to the TC IN or
DVCPRO/DV connectors is also possible.
• Rec Run: The time code advances only during recording.
This will enable continuation of time codes in previously
recorded clips and when the power is turned off or new
P2 cards are inserted to continue recording.
NOTE
The following events will disrupt time code continuity.
• When clips are deleted
• When a 24P or 24PA frame rate is selected
• When 24PN or 30PN (25PN) is selected
• When a recording is interrupted by a REC WARNING or other
abnormality
User bits
• Two types of user bits are provided internally: (LTC UB:
recorded as LTC, output via the TC OUT connector
as LTC embedded in HD SDI) and VITC (in DVCPRO
recorded in the VIDEO AUX area and output as VITC
embedded in HD SDI).
• LTC UB enables the recording of user settings, time,
date, time codes and similar values, the frame rate data
for camera capture and external input values (via TC IN
or DVCPRO/DV connector input).
• VITC user bits record the frame rate data of camera
capture.
• The user bits in clip metadata record the LTC UB value at
the start of recording.
Date (real time)
• The built-in clock calculates the year, month, day and
time from the internal clock to display on video in the
LCD, viewfinder and VIDEO OUT and other video output.
• The internal clock is not only used to calculate the free
run time code when the power is off and to set the user
bit year, date and time, but also to set file creation dates
when clips are recorded that determine the order of
thumbnails and playback order.
• It is also used for generating clip metadata and UMID
(Unique Material Identifier).
For details, see [Setting Date and Time of Internal Clock]
(page 29).
64
Recording time codes and user bits
When SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080-59.94i, 720-59.94P, 480-59.94i
System setting status
SYSTEM REC
MODE SIGNAL
REC FORMAT
Recorded TC
FRAME
RATE
60i,
30P
—
24P, 24PA
—
—
—
R-RUN/F-RUN*3
DF/NDF
30 frames
DVCPROHD/60i
CAMERA
1080
-59.94i
1394
AVC-I100/60i
AVC-I50/60i
AVC-I100/30PN
AVC-I50/30PN
—
—
R-RUN/F-RUN*7
NDF locked
24 frames
DVCPROHD/60i
—
—
R-RUN/F-RUN*2
DF/NDF
30 frames
—
Other than
24 frames
—
24 frames
—
30 frames
—
Other than
30 frames
—
24 frames
—
Other than
24 frames
—
—
60i, 30P
—
DVCPROHD/30PN
AVC-I100/30PN
AVC-I50/30PN
720
-59.94P
DVCPROHD/24PN
AVC-I100/24PN
AVC-I50/24PN
1394
DVCPROHD/60P
CAMERA
DVCPRO50/60i
DVCPRO/60i
DV/60i
480
-59.94i
1394
R-RUN/F-RUN *3
DF/NDF
30 frames
R-RUN/F-RUN*5
NDF locked
30 frames
AVC-I100/24PN
AVC-I50/24PN
DVCPROHD/60P
AVC-I100/60P
AVC-I50/60P
CAMERA
LTC
24P, 24PA
—
—
—
VITC
Output TC
Displayed TC
LTC and VITC
TC tc
TC OUT embedded in
(24/30
HD SDI
conversion)
Recorded UB
LTC UB
TC: 30 frames
tc: 24 frames Follows UB
MODE.
Same as LTC
In ‘EXT’
value
slaves to
UB in TC IN
connector
Recording
Converted
Converted TC: 24 frames
to 30 frames
to 30 frames
Playback
based on
based on LTC TC: 24 frames
LTC
tc: 30 frames
Follows UB
Records VAUX
MODE.
TC in 1394
TC: 30 frames
In ‘EXT’
Outputs LTC Outputs LTC
input at all
tc: 24 frames slaves to LTC
times *6
UB in 1394
input
VITC UB
Outputs
LTC UB
Outputs LTC Outputs LTC
R-RUN/F-RUN*3
DF/NDF
30 frames
R-RUN/F-RUN*5
NDF locked
30 frames
Outputs LTC Outputs LTC
R-RUN/F-RUN*4
TC: 30 frames
DF/NDF
tc: 24 frames
Every active
frame
30 frames
Follows UB
MODE.
R-RUN locked
Matches
Matches
Same as LTC recorder TC recorder TC
In ‘EXT’
DF/NDF
value
slaves to
Every active
at start of
at start of
UB in TC IN
frame
recording
recording
connector
30 frames
30 frames/s 30 frames/s
R-RUN/F-RUN*7
Converts
NDF locked
and outputs
Every active
Ouputs LTC
LTC to 30
Recording
frame
frames
TC: 24 frames
24 frames
Playback
R-RUN locked
Matches
Matches
TC: 24 frames
NDF
recorder TC recorder TC tc: 30 frames
Every active
at start of
at start of
frame
recording
recording
24 frames
30 frames/s 30 frames/s
Follows UB
Records VAUX
MODE.
R-RUN/F-RUN*2
TC in 1394
TC: 30 frames
In ‘EXT’
DF/NDF
Ouputs LTC Ouputs LTC
input at all
tc: 24 frames slaves to LTC
30 frames
times *6
UB in 1394
input
R-RUN/F-RUN*3
Follows UB
DF/NDF
MODE.
Same as LTC
30 frames
In ‘EXT’
value
slaves to
R-RUN/F-RUN*5 (but not for DV)
UB in TC IN
NDF locked
30 frames
TC: 30 frames connector
Outputs LTC
No input
tc: 24 frames Follows UB
MODE.
*2 Records VAUX
R-RUN/F-RUN
TC in 1394
In ‘EXT’
DF/NDF
input at all
slaves to LTC
30 frames
times (No DV)*6
UB in 1394
input
Output UB
TC OUT
LTC UB
VITC UB
connector embedded embedded
UB *1
in HD SDI *1 in HD SDI
Outputs
LTC UB
Frame rate
data
Frame rate
data
Output
Output
adjusted
adjusted
to Over 60i to Over 60i
based on based on
LTC UB
LTC UB
Records
VITC UB in
1394 input
at all times
Outputs
LTC UB
Outputs
LTC UB
Outputs
LTC UB
Outputs
LTC UB
Frame rate
data
Outputs
VITC UB
Frame rate
data
Output
Output
adjusted to adjusted to
Over 60P Over 60P
based on based on
LTC UB
LTC UB
Records
VITC UB in
1394 input
at all times
Outputs
LTC UB
Frame rate
data
Outputs
LTC UB
Records
VITC UB in
1394 input
at all times
Outputs
LTC UB
Outputs
VITC UB
No input
No input
Ouputs
LTC UB
*1 When UB MODE is FRM. RATE, playback of native clips is the pulldown frame rate read from VITC UB.
*2 In Free Run mode, it is slaved to the value input to the DVCPRO/DV connector. It does not slave it to the time code from
the TC IN connector.
*3 In Free Run mode, it is slaved to the time code input to the TC IN connector.
*4 In Free Run mode, it is slaved to the time code input to the TC IN connector. But not slaved to it during recording.
*5 In Free Run mode, it is slaved when TC input to the TC IN connector is non-drop frame. But not slaved to it during recording.
*6 VAUX TC is time code recorded in the video AUX area in the DVC format.
*7 In Free Run mode, it is slaved to the time code input to the TC IN connector, whose value is converted to 24 frames
when it was NDF 30 frames. But not slaved to it during recording.
65
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
CAMERA
MODE
When SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080-50i, 720-50P, 576-50i
System setting status
SYSTEM REC
MODE SIGNAL
CAMERA
1080-50i
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
1394
Recorded TC
REC FORMAT
CAMERA
MODE
FRAME
RATE
DVCPROHD/50i
50i, 25P
—
R-RUN/
F-RUN*2
25 frames
Records
VAUX TC in
Outputs LTC
1394 input at
all times*5
12-50
frames
R-RUN/
F-RUN*3
25 frames
DVCPROHD/50i
—
DVCPROHD/50P
AVC-I100/50P
AVC-I50/50P
—
—
1394
—
—
DVCPROHD/25PN
AVC-I100/25PN
AVC-I50/25PN
720-50P
Same as LTC
Outputs LTC
value
—
—
DVCPROHD/50P
CAMERA
Outputs LTC
R-RUN/
*4
F-RUN
Same as LTC
25 frames Every active
value
frame
25 frames
R-RUN
Matches
locked
recorder TC
Other than
Every active
at start of
25 frames
frame
recording
25 frames
25 frames/s
1394
Records
VAUX TC in
Outputs LTC
1394 input at
all times*5
—
—
R-RUN/
F-RUN*2
25 frames
50i, 25P
—
R-RUN/
F-RUN*3
25 frames
Same as LTC
value
Outputs LTC
(but not for
DV)
R-RUN/
F-RUN*2
25 frames
Records
VAUX TC in
1394 input at Outputs LTC
all times
(No DV)*5
DVCPRO50/50i
DVCPRO/50i
DV/50i
576-50i
VITC
R-RUN/
F-RUN*3
25 frames
AVC-I100/50i
AVC-I50/50i
AVC-I100/25PN
AVC-I50/25PN
CAMERA
LTC
Output TC
Displayed TC
LTC and VITC
TC tc
TC OUT
embedded in
(24/30
HD SDI
conversion)
—
—
Recorded UB
LTC UB
VITC UB
Output UB
TC OUT
LTC UB
VITC UB
connector embedded embedded
*1
*1
UB
in HD SDI in HD SDI
Follows UB
MODE
• In ‘EXT’
Outputs LTC TC: 25 frames
slaves to
UB in TC IN
connector
Follows UB
MODE
• In ‘EXT’
Outputs LTC TC: 25 frames
slaves to LTC
UB in 1394
input
Follows UB
MODE
• In ‘EXT’
slaves to
UB in TC IN
connector
Outputs LTC
Frame rate
data
Outputs
LTC UB
Outputs
LTC UB
Frame rate
data
Records
VITC UB in
1394 input
at all times
Outputs
LTC UB
Outputs
LTC UB
Outputs
VITC UB
TC: 25 frames
Farme rate
data
Outputs
LTC UB
Outputs
LTC UB
Frame rate
data
Records
VITC UB in
1394 input
at all times
Outputs
LTC UB
Outputs
LTC UB
Outputs
VITC UB
Frame rate
data
Outputs
LTC UB
No input
No input
Matches
recorder TC
at start of
recording
25 frames/s
Follows UB
MODE
• In ‘EXT’
slaves to
UB in TC IN
connector
Follows UB
MODE
• In ‘EXT’
Outputs LTC TC: 25 frames
slaves to LTC
UB in 1394
input
Follows UB
MODE
• In ‘EXT’
TC: 25 frames
slaves to
UB in TC IN
connector
No input
Follows UB
MODE
• In ‘EXT’
TC: 25 frames
slaves to LTC
UB in 1394
input
Records
VITC UB in
1394 input
at all times
Outputs
LTC UB
*1 When UB MODE is FRM.RATE, playback of native clips is the pulldown frame rate read from VITC UB.
*2 In Free Run mode, it is slaved to the value input to the DVCPRO/DV connector. It does not slave it to the time code from
the TC IN connector.
*3 In Free Run mode, it is slaved to the time code input to the TC IN connector.
*4 In Free Run m ode, it is slaved to the time code input to the TC IN connector. But not slaved to it during recording.
*5 VAUX TC is time code recorded in the video AUX area in the DVC format.
66
Setting user bits
Entering the User Bits
The user bits allow information, including memos that use
up to eight-digit hexadecimal numbers (date and time), to
be recorded in the Subcode area.
•T
o slave lock to the user bits input to the TC IN connector,
set to EXT.
• In slave mode, the UB indicator is highlighted.
• A slave relationship, once started, continues even after
input from the TC IN or DVCPRO/DV connector ends.
Note that the following events release user bit slave
status.
• When a UB MODE option is set to something other than
EXT.
• When UB PRESET is performed
• Switching to 1394 in the menu option REC SIGNAL in
the SYSTEM SETUP screen.
• Turning the power off.
The internal user value retains the slave values even after
slave release.
1
Set the COUNTER button to UB.
2
Position the TCG switch at SET.
b
a
d
c
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
Use the setting menu UB MODE on the RECORDING
SETUP screen to select the user bits to record in the
subcode area.
• USER:
Records internal user values.
To set user values, set the TCG switch to SET to open
the setting menu UB PRESET screen.
Set values are retained after the power is turned off.
See also [Entering the User Bits] (this page).
• TIME:
Records the time calculated by the internal clock.
• DATE:
Records the year, month and day time digits from the
internal clock.
• EXT:
Records the user bits input to the TC IN connector.
Recording of 1394 input also records user bits input to
the DVCPRO/DV connector.
• TCG:
Records the time code value.
• FRM. RATE:
Records the frame rate information of camera capture.
A native recorded clip is played back at the same frame
rate as the VITC UB regardless of recorded values. Use
this setting when a PC or other editing device is to use
the user bit frame rate.
For details, see [Frame rate information recorded in
user bits] (page 68).
a RESET button
b COUNTER button
c TCG switch
d CURSOR and SET buttons
67
3
Use CURSOR buttons to set the user bits.
UB PRESET
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
+/- : PUSH /
SEL : PUSH /
PRESET : PUSH SET
q button: Shifts the target (highlighted) digit to the
right.
w button: Shifts the target (highlighted) digit to the
left.
e button: Increases the highlighted number by one.
r button: Decreases the highlighted number by
one.
SET button: Confirms the set user bits.
• Pressing the RESET button while setting the user
bits will reset any user bit setting to 0.
4
Press the SET button to confirm the user bit
value, and position the TCG switch at F-RUN or
R-RUN.
Frame rate information recorded in user
bits
The frame rate value of video data captured and recorded
at a frame rate set in the menu option FRAME RATE
or other options in the SYSTEM SETUP screen can be
recorded in the user bits and be used in editing equipment
(computer editing software).
This type of data is recorded in VITC UB at all times.
Setting the setting menu UB MODE to FRM RATE, records
the information also to the user bits.
In playback of clips recorded in native mode, the same
frame rate information as that obtained in playing back the
user bits in the VIDEO AUX area is also output to the user
bits in the subcode area.
Frame rate information
Frame rate, video pull-down and time code user bits are
related as described below.
Verification
Fixed
information on value
the right-hand
six digits
Media management data
• Update frame flag, active
frame flag
• REC mark
Sequence No. 24P, 24PA: 0-4
Other than above: locked at F
Camera capture mode
Example:
• 60i: 600
• 60P: 608
• 30P: 308
• 24P: 248
• 24PA: 24C
• 24PN: 24C (recording)
• 50i: 502
• 50P: 50A
• 25P: 25A
• P: 9 (720P/30PN or 60P VFR)
• P: D (720P/24PN VFR recording)
• P: B (720P/25PN or 50P VFR)
NOTE
Changing the TCG switch setting without pressing the
SET button disables the set value.
5
Open the setting menu RECORDING SETUP
screen and set the menu option UB MODE to
USER.
Retaining the user bits
The data set for the user bits are automatically saved and
retained even if the video camera-recorder is turned off.
1080i, 480i, 576i mode
Frame rate: 24P over 60i (2:3)
First field of updated frame rate
Time code digit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Video
Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co De Do De Ao Ae Bo Be
Co De Do De Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co De Do De
Sequence No.
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
01
00
10
10
01
01
00
Updated frame information
10
68
10
01
01
00
10
10
Frame rate: 24PA over 60i (2:3:3:2)
Time code digit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
23
24
25
26
27
28
Video
Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co Ce Do De Ao Ae Bo Be
3
Position the TCG switch at SET.
4
Use the CURSOR buttons to set the time code.
29
Co Ce Do De Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co Ce Do De
Sequence No.
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
4
0
1
2
3
4
00
10
10
10
01
00
10
Updated frame information
10
10
01
00
10
10
10
Frame rate: 30P over 60i (2:2) 25P over 50i (2:2)
TC PRESET
REC RUN
Time code digit
00
01
00 h 00 m 00 s 00
h min s frm
+/- : PUSH /
SEL : PUSH /
PRESET : PUSH SET
02
Video
Ao Ae Bo Be Co Ce
Updated frame information
10
10
10
720P mode
q button: S
hifts the target (highlighted) digit to the
right.
w button: S
hifts the target (highlighted) digit to the
left.
e button: Increases the highlighted number by one.
r button: D
ecreases the highlighted number by
one.
SET button: U
se to confirm set time code value.
• Pressing the RESET button will reset any time
code setting to 0.
Frame rate: 24P over 60P (2:3)
Updated frame
Time code digit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Video
A A B B B C C D D D A A B B
C D D D A A B B B C C D D D
Updated frame information
10
10
01
01
00
10
10
01
00
10
10
01
01
00
Frame rate: 30P over 60P (2:2) 25P over 50P (2:2)
Time code digit
00
01
02
Video
A A B B C C
Updated frame information
10
10
10
Setting the Time Code
1
Switch the menu option TC MODE on the
RECORDING SETUP screen to DF or NDF
using the menus. (In 59.94 Hz mode)
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 129).
• Select DF to advance time code in drop frame
mode and NDF in non-drop frame mode. Note that
24P, 24PA and 24PN are always recorded in NDF
mode.
2
Use the COUNTER button to switch to time
code display.
5
Press the SET button to confirm the time code
setting, and use the TCG switch to select a time
code.
• F-RUN steps the time code in free run mode, and
R-RUN set it in recording run mode.
NOTE
• When 24P or 24PA is used, the time code is adjusted
every 5 frames. It is adjusted to multiples of four
for 24PN and to even numbers for 720/30PN. It is
adjusted so that the seconds plus the frames are an
even number for 720/25PN. The time code cannot be
set during recording.
• The set value is not valid if you change the TCG
switch position without pressing the SET button.
Time code function during battery
replacement
Even during battery replacement the backup mechanism
keeps the time code generator functioning.
NOTE
When the POWER switch has been switched ON  OFF 
ON, the backup accuracy of the time code in free run mode is
about ±2 frames.
69
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
3
• Range of available time code settings:
00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:29 (60i, 60P, 30P, 24P,
24PA)
00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:23 (24PN)
00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:24 (50i, 50P, 25P)
VFR (variable frame rate) time code
• In 24PN mode, recording is performed at 24-frame time code, and output is performed at 30-frame time code to match
the 2:3 pull-down scheme used for video output.
• At a frame rate (capture frame rate) of 24P in 24PN mode, the speed of recording and the output time code matches
actual time, but not at any speed other than 24P. (Example: at 60P recording progresses at 60/24 speed)
• Then the camera operates in Rec Run mode and the time code output at start of recording matches the recording time
code.
• This is true also for frame rates other than 30P capture in 30PN mode and 25P capture in 25PN mode.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
24PN recording at 60P capture
Rec start
Video output
0
Rec stop
1
2
3
22
23
24
25
58
59
60
61
62
Rec start
63
67
68
Output time code
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:01
00:11
00:12
00:29
01:00
01:01
02:20
02:20
Skips
Recorded video
0
1
2
3
22
23
24
25
58
59
60
61
62
24/30
conversion
63
67
68
Recorded time code
00:00 00:01 00:02 00:03
00:22 00:23 01:00 01:01
02:10 02:11 02:12 02:13 02:14 02:15
02:16
02:16 02:17
25PN recording at 50P capture
Video output
Rec start
0
Rec stop
1
2
3
22
23
24
25
48
49
50
51
52
Rec start
53
57
58
Output time code
00:00
00:00
00:01
0
2
00:11
00:12
00:24
01:00
01:01
02:04
02:04
Skips
Recorded video
1
3
22
23
24
25
48
49
50
51
52
53
57
58
Recorded time code
00:00 00:01 00:02 00:03
00:22 00:23 00:24 01:00
01:23 01:24 02:00 02:01 02:02 02:03
02:04
02:04 02:05
30PN recording at 15P capture
Rec start
Video output
0
Rec stop
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
14
14
14
14
15
15
Rec start
15
15
20
20
20
20
21
21
Output time code
00:00
00:00
00:01
00:02
00:03
00:28
00:29
01:00
00:16
00:16
00:17
Skips
Recorded video
0
1
14
15
00:00
00:01
00:14
00:15
21
Recorded time code
00:16
00:16
25PN recording at 15P capture
Video output
Rec start
Output time
code
00:00
Recorded
video
Recorded time
code
70
0
0
00:00
Rec stop
0
1
00:01
1
1
00:02
1
2
00:03
13
13
00:22
13
14
00:23
14
14
00:24
15
15
01:01
Rec start
19
00:16
19
19
00:16
19
20
00:16
20
20
00:17
21
00:18
Skips
0
1
2
13
14
15
00:00
00:03
00:02
00:13
00:14
00:15
00:16
21
20
21
00:16
00:17
Externally Locking the Time Code
The time code generator built into your AG-HPX370P/AGHPX371E may be locked to an external generator. It is also
possible to lock an external time code generator to the
internal generator.
Example 2: Connecting two or more AGHPX370P/AG-HPX371Es with
one another, with one being
used as the reference device.
Reference device
VIDEO OUT
TC OUT
As illustrated, both the reference video signals and the time
code must be input.
TC IN
Example 1: L
ocking the time code to
external signals
Reference time
code
GENLOCK IN
VIDEO OUT
TC OUT
TC IN
TC IN
GENLOCK IN
VIDEO OUT
TC OUT
Reference video
signal
GENLOCK IN
NOTE
NOTE
• In addition to an HD Y reference signal, a composite video
signal can also be input as reference signal.
• Input composite video signals when the system mode is 480i
(576i) (SD) and 720P.
• During HD-Y signal input in 720P system mode, GENLOCK
input for the video signal is applied but the time code is
delayed by 1 field.
• If the reference GENLOCK input signal becomes irregular
and recording cannot be normally performed, “TEMPORARY
PAUSE IRREGULAR FRM SIG” blinks in red in the viewfinder
and on the LCD screen and the current clip is divided. The
continuity of the time code cannot be guaranteed. Recording
resumes when the signal returns to normal. Recording
will not resume if interval, one-shot or loop recording is in
progress.
• Set the menu option TC VIDEO SYNCHRO to TC IN in the
OUTPUT SEL screen and the menu option GL PHASE to
COMPOSITE in the OTHER FUNCTIONS screen on both units.
• Setting TC VIDEO SYNCHRO in the OUTPUT SEL screen to TC
IN will supply the time code via TC IN to the next slave device
without delay.
• The subcarrier in the VBS signal of the VIDEO OUT connector
of the camera cannot be externally locked.
To externally lock the time code
Follow the steps below.
1
Turn on the POWER switch.
2
Position the TCG switch at [F-RUN].
3
Set the COUNTER button to TC.
4
Supply a phase-relationship reference
time code (that conforms to the time code
requirements) and reference video signals
to the TC IN and GENLOCK IN connectors,
respectively.
71
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
Connections for externally locking the
time code (examples)
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
• Now the built-in time code generator is locked to the
reference time code.
• When locked to an external time code generator, the
time code is at all times locked to the external time code,
which is displayed as a highlighted value on the counter
indicator. Do not engage the recording mode during the
few seconds it takes for the sync generator to stabilize.
• Once a slave relationship is established, the TC IN and
GENLOCK IN connectors stay in slave status.*
Note that the following events release slave status.
• When TC PRESET is performed
• When the REC SIGNAL option in the SYSTEM SETUP
screen is set to 1394.
• The power is turned off
• The time code mode is switched
• The TCG switch is set to R-RUN
• When REC FORMAT and CAMERA MODE have been
switched
* The slave function locks the time code to the TC IN
input and the device will use this time code even if time
code input should subsequently cease.
Setting the user bits when the time code
is externally locked
To externally lock user bits, set the setting menu UB MODE
(RECORDING SETUP screen) to EXT.
Regardless of an F-RUN or R-RUN setting of the TCG
switch, the time code is slaved to user bit values input to
the TC IN connector.
For details, refer to [Setting Time Data] (page 64) and
[Setting user bits] (page 67).
External synchronisation of the camera
when the time code is externally locked
When the time code is externally locked, the reference
video signals input through the GENLOCK IN connector
gen-lock the camera.
NOTE
• To lock other devices externally to the AG-HPX370P/AGHPX371E, as the master device, make sure that the other
devices are in the same camera mode as the AG-HPX370P/
AG-HPX371E. Note that if some of the connected devices
use interlaced scanning while other devices use progressive
scanning, there may be breaks in the video and time code.
• When 24P, 24PA or 24PN (native) is selected and the time
code is externally locked, be sure to select a non-drop
frame time code. The time code cannot be externally locked
when drop frame mode is selected. When the time code
is externally locked, the video may be distorted, but this
is because of adjustment to 5-frame segments and not a
malfunction.
Outputting the time code externally
To output time code from the camera’s TC OUT connector
to a VTR or other recording device in sync with camera
picture or playback picture, set the setting menu TC VIDEO
SYNCRO (OUTPUT SEL) to VIDEO OUT.
Set the menu option GL SELECT to SDI or COMPOSITE
as required by supplied video output in the OTHER
FUNCTIONS screen and the menu option TC OUT to TCG/
TCR in the OUTPUT SEL screen.
To unlock the externally locked time code
AG-HPX370P/AG-HPX371E
Discontinue external time code supply, then position the
TCG switch at [R-RUN].
Cautions in switching the power source
from battery to external power supply
Connect the DC IN socket with the external power supply
before removing the battery, in order to keep the time code
generator energized. If the battery is removed first, there is
no guarantee that the time code will stay externally locked.
SDI OUT or VIDEO OUT
VIDEO IN
SDI IN
HD SDI IN
TC OUT
TC IN
VTR, etc.
NOTE
When the setting menu TC VIDEO SYNCRO is set to VIDEO
OUT, the time code is output via TC OUT in tune with VIDEO
OUT delay.
72
GENLOCK and time code input/output connection and setup
Camera operating conditions
Recording
format
720P
SDI OUT (720P)
VIDEO OUT
480i (576i)
SDI OUT (480i (576i))
VIDEO OUT
SD (480i (576i))
VIDEO OUT,
SDI OUT (SD)
TC OUT

90H advance

90H advance

120H
advance

120H
advance
90H delay

90H delay

120H delay




×

×
120H delay



No output


GL PHASE
SDI OUT (HD)
SDI
COMPOSITE
SDI
COMPOSITE
SDI
COMPOSITE
SDI
SD (480i (576i))
GENLOCK input and camera output phase
(In phase:  Out of phase: ×)
COMPOSITE
Disabled
Counter Setting and Display
Pressing the COUNTER button to view the counter displays the counter value on the time code indicator in the LCD and in
the viewfinder. The counter value is indicated in “Hour : Minute : Second” format. The counter value is not displayed during
playback.
The menu option REC COUNTER in the DISPLAY SETUP screen can be set to display two types of counters.
TOTAL: provides a continuous count until reset by pressing the COUNTER RESET button. The counter value is retained
when P2 cards are replaced and when the power is turned off.
CLIP: The counter is reset to 0 at the start of each recording and allows you to keep track of clip recording time while
shooting the current clip.
NOTE
• Pressing the RESET button when the counter value is displayed resets the counter to 0.
• The counter value indicates values in the range between 0:00:00 and 9:59:59 in 1-second steps.
73
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
1080i
Video and reference
signal to be output GENLOCK input
externally
SDI OUT (1080i)
1080i
VIDEO OUT
SDI OUT (1080i)
SD (480i (576i))
VIDEO OUT
SDI OUT (720P)
720P
VIDEO OUT
Camera setup
Viewfinder Screen Status Displays
In addition to video, the viewfinder shows messages
indicating camera settings and operating status, center
markers, safety zone markers, zebra patterns and other
indications.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
Viewfinder Status Indication Layout
The illustration below shows the indications (except MODE
CHECK) that are displayed in the viewfinder.
TC
12 : 34 : 56 : 23
12
I - PAUSE
1 9 9 9 min
P 2 L ACK
1394
1080 i
AVC-I100
B 9 0%
USER - 1
CAC
F BC
60
P 3 .2 K
0 dB
ND 1
PROXY
L T . BOX
8 3% ND 1
FEB 2 5
6 0 : 2 4 PN
DRS
=== =====
1/ 2 5 0
C
H
C
H
1
2
2008
S POT
F5 . 6
23 : 59 : 59
Z99
For more information, see the following pages:
Selecting Viewfinder Display
Information
To select items in the viewfinder screen, open the DISPLAY
SETUP screen and turn on or off each item or type.
Refer to the section [Using the menus] (page 129).
DISPLAY SETUP
EVF PEAK LEVEL
EVF PEAK FREQ
EVF SETTING
EVF B. LIGHT
EVF COLOR
ZEBRA1 DETECT
ZEBRA2 DETECT
ZEBRA2
0
LOW
>>>
NORMAL
ON
70%
85%
SPOT
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
74
Screen displays
1
TC
12 : 34 : 56 : 23
12
P - PAUSE
P2 FUL L
8
9
10
11
24
1 9 9 9 min
1 - CL I P
B 9 0%
USER - 1
CAC
F BC
1394
28
1080 i
AVC-I100
60
6
7
25
PROXY
5
P 3 .2K
0 dB
ND 1
L T . BOX
8 3% ND 1
FEB 2 5
6 0 : 2 4 PN
DRS
1
=====
1/ 2 5 0
2 = = =
C
H
C
H
12
1 Time code displays
Each press of the COUNTER button displays (or turns
off) the indications listed below.
• (No indication)
• Counter:
Counter value (during recording only)
• TC: Time code value
TC* is indicated when the time code value
cannot be correctly read from DVCPRO/DV
connector input.
The colon between the seconds and the
frames changes to a period (.) in drop frame
mode.
• tc:
Time code value (frame digits are indicated
in 24 frames)
tc* is indicated when the time code value
cannot be correctly read from DVCPRO/DV
connector input.
The colon between the seconds and the
frames changes to a period (.) in drop frame
mode.
• UB: User bit values
UB* is indicated when the user bit value
cannot be correctly read from DVCPRO/DV
connector input.
2008
S POT
F5 . 6
13
23 : 59 : 59
14 15
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
2
3
4
27 26
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
Z99
16
• FR: Frame rate information for recording
• FR60I: 60i interlace mode (60 fields/s)
• FR60P: 60P progressive mode (60 frames/s)
• FR30P: 30P progressive mode (30 frames/s)
• FR24P*: 24P progressive mode (24 frames/s)
• FR24PA*: 24P advanced mode (24 frames/s)
• FR50I: 50i interlace mode (50 fields/s)
• FR50P: 50P progressive mode (50 fields/s)
• FR25P: 25P progressive mode (25 fields/s)
* In FR24P and FR24PA modes, the last digit contains
the frame conversion sequence information.
NOTE
When TC, tc and UB are locked to TC IN input, the characters in
their icons change to outline characters TC  TC .
When the HOLD button is used to temporarily freeze
indications, the HOLD indication blinks.
2 Warnings
• P2 : Blinks when no P2 card is inserted or the
card is write protected.
• P2 FULL:
Blinks when there is no more space left on
the P2 card.
• P2 LACK:
Blinks in loop rec mode when there is not
enough space left on the P2 card.
•
: Lights when the battery for the internal clock
is depleted.
For details, refer to [Charging the internal
battery] (page 160).
75
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
3 Backup unit displays
• The following indications show the status of backup
units connected to the DVCPRO/DV connector.
• The following indications are not displayed when
the menu option 1394 CONTROL in the OTHER
FUNCTIONS screen is set to OFF.
• 1394 *: Recording
• 1394 h: Recording standby
• 1394 :
The backup unit cannot be controlled.
• 1394: No backup unit is connected.
• 1394 – –:
A backup unit is connected but is not in
recording or recording standby status.
4 Recording format and system frequency indication
• System mode
• 1080i
• 720P
• 480i (576i)
• Recording format
(In 1080i, 720P system mode)
• AVC-I 100: AVC-Intra 100 format
• AVC-I 50: AVC-Intra 50 format
• DVCPRO HD: DVCPRO HD format
(in 480 (576i) system mode)
• DVCPRO50, DVCPRO, DV
• System frequency
• 60 : 59.94 Hz
• 50 : 50 Hz
5 Information display
The following information is displayed depending on the
situation.
• Performance of auto white balance and auto black
balance
• Warning and error indication
• Information on switch and button operations
For details, refer to [Center Information Display]
(page 78).
6 Proxy information display (optional)
This display provides information on proxy card errors
and time remaining in proxy recording on an SD
memory card.
7 Letter box recording display
This display appears in the 480i (576i) recording format
when LETTER BOX is selected in the menu option
ASPECT CONV in the SYSTEM SETUP screen.
8 Y GET brightness display
When the Y GET function is used, the image level at the
center of the image is indicated in a range between 0%
and 109%
9 Calendar
Month:
JAN (January), FEB (February),
MAR (March), APR (April), MAY (May),
JUN (June), JUL(July), AUG (August),
SEP (September), OCT (October),
NOV (November), DEC (December)
Day of the month
Year: 2000 – 2037
Hours
Minutes
Seconds
mmm dd yyyy hh:mm:ss
10 Recording/playback frame rate display
In native recording, the capture frame rate and
recording and playback frame rates are displayed.
Example: 6
0:24PN (recording 60P with the camera
frame rate set to a variable frame rate of
24PN)
Playback applies a 2:3 pull-down to perform 24P over
60P, indicating that 24/60 speed slow playback is
performed.
In standard recording only the capture frame rate is
indicated.
Example: 2
4PA (recording 24PA using 2:3:3:2 pulldown
for over 60i recording)
11 Audio level meter display
HEAD ROOM at -20 dB
C
H1
C
H2
-20dB
0dB
HEAD ROOM at -18 dB
C
H1
C
H2
-18dB
0dB
By assigning MAG A. LVL (level meter magnification)
to a user button makes it possible to switch to display
magnification.
For details, refer to [Audio level meter magnification]
(page 82).
12 Shutter speed
The shutter speed is displayed here.
In synchro scan mode, the display (time (minutes)
display or shutter angle icon display) made in the menu
option SYNC SCAN DISP in the DISPLAY SETUP screen
is used.
13 DRS display
This indicates operation of the dynamic range stretcher
function.
14 Iris display
Displays F values.
• NC appears when the lens connector is not
connected.
15 Auto-iris control displays
• SPOT: Auto iris control for spot light
• BACK: Auto iris control for backlight compensation
This indication also appears when the lens is set to
manual iris, but is not active.
76
16 Zoom position display
Zoom positions are indicated in a range from Z00
(maximum wide angle) to Z99 (maximum zoom).
17 Recommended ND filter display
This indicates the most suitable ND filter to use under
current shooting conditions.
19 Gain display
Indicates the gain value set using the video amplifier.
20 WHITE BAL switch position indication
Indicates the currently selected switch position and
also white balance operation when AWB is preset. In
ATW (Auto Tracking White Balance) mode, ATW is also
indicated and LOCK is displayed when the function is
locked.
21 FBC indication
Appears when the FBC function is engaged.
22 CAC indicator
Indicates that the chromatic aberration function of the
lens is operating.
23 Scene file name display
Indicates the name of currently selected SCENE FILE
(F1 to F6).
24 Remaining battery charge
As the remaining battery charge drops, the display
changes as follows:




.
When the battery is completely discharged,
( ) blinks.
(When the AC adapter is being used, a display
other than
may appear: this is not a sign of
malfunctioning.)
Batteries that indicate battery level in % (percent)
Such batteries indicate remaining battery level as
follows.
• B%:10 %~99 %
Indicates the remaining battery level in %.
• MAX: Indicates that the battery is fully charged.
• EMP: Indicates that the remaining battery level
is less than 10 %.
Batteries that do not indicate capacity in % (percent)
Such batteries indicate the battery level in voltages.
• 13.5 V: Indication of current battery voltage.
26 Media information display
Indicates the slots that contain P2 cards and general
information on the media.
• 1 On:
P2 card ready for recording
• 1 lights green:
P2 card selected for recording
• 1 flashes:
The card is being recognized
• - :
No card inserted
• P :
Write-protected
• F :
Full
• X :
Cannot recognize
• E :
P2 card in an invalid format (formatting will
take care of this problem)
• o :
P2 card slot contains a PROXY card.
27 Recording and playback
• REC: Recording
• PAUSE:
Recording standby
•h:
Playback pause
•q:
Play
• y (t ) :
Fast-forward/fast-forward playback (fastreverse/fast-reverse playback)
• 4X y (4X t ) :
4x speed search
• CLIP h q (CLIP w h ) :
Clip forward (clip reverse), cue up of single
clips
• CLIP&T h q (CLIP&T w h ) :
Cue forward (cue back) to the start point of
clips and text memo points (when the menu
option SEEK SELECT is set to CLIP&T in the
OTHER FUNCTIONS screen)
• START: Indicates that recording has started for a new
clip in one-clip recording mode.
• END: Indicates that compiling to a clip has
stopped in one-clip recording mode.
During DISPLAY OFF, only the REC, START, and END
displays are shown at the top right. (Also displayed at
top right, when pre-recording, loop recording, interval
recording or one-shot recording is set.)
77
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
18 ND filter display
• This indicates the selected ND filter.
• An ND -- indication means that the ND FILTER switch
is incorrectly set (a position other than ND1 to ND4).
Check ND FILTER switch position.
25 Media remaining memory display
• Set the menu option P2CARD REMAIN in the DISPLAY
SETUP screen to ONE-CARD to display the remaining
time on the P2 card being recorded and show the
number of the slot it resides in on the left. TOTAL
displays the remaining time on both cards.
• In a mode check, ONE-CARD and TOTAL are
alternately displayed.
• This display does not appear while remaining memory
is calculated and when the camera is in USB device
mode.
• A mode check during loop recording displays the
standard recording time available to loop recording.
• Indicates remaining time in 1-minute increments
from 0 to 999 minutes. 999 minutes and longer time
periods are also indicated as 999 minutes.
• The display blinks when 2 minutes or less time is left.
Special recording display
This display appears when the menu option REC
FUNCTION in the RECORDING SETUP screen is set to
INTERVAL, ONE SHOT or LOOP and when PRE REC is
set to ON.
• L – : LOOP (loop recording)
• I – : INTERVAL, ONE SHOT
• P – : PRE REC
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
28 One-clip recording mode display
• 1-CLIP: Indicates that recording has started for a new
clip in one-clip recording mode.
• 1CLIP:
Indicates that recordings can be compiled to
a previous clip in one-clip recording mode.
Center Information Display
The following information displays (for details, refer to
page 76) are provided.
P2 card recording and playback data
indications
• BOS
Beginning of stream. No more data is available in the
rearward playback direction.
• CANNOT PLAY
Appears when playback is disabled.
• CARD ERR (1) (2) (1/2) :
The number identifies the P2 card that is giving
trouble.
• UPDATING: Reading card data
• CANNOT REC
Appears when recording cannot be started by pressing
the REC button.
• EOS
End of stream. No more data is available in the forward
playback direction.
• PRE REC ON (OFF) (INVALID)
Appears when the user button to which pre-recording
has been assigned is pressed.
• SHOT MARK ON (OFF) (INVALID)
SHOT MARK appears when the user button or the lens
RET button to which it has been assigned is pressed.
• SLOT SEL (INVALID)
Appears when pressing the user button to which SLOT
SEL is assigned.
• TEXTMEMO (INVALID)
TEXT MEMO appears when the user button or the lens
RET button to which it has been assigned is pressed.
Errors and warnings
Errors and warnings appear when something goes wrong
with the camera or a P2 card malfunctions. If the problem
cannot be solved by turning off the camera and turning it
back on, try replacing the card and if that does not help, it
may be necessary to consult your supplier.
• 1394
This error occurs in a 1394 connection or when signal
faults occur.
78
• 1394 INITIAL ERROR: a connection error
• 1394 INPUT ERROR: an input error
• 1394 INPUT ERROR (OTHER FORMAT):
(different input format)
• COPY INHIBITED:
This indicates that a copy-guarded signal
entered DV format input from the DVCPRO/
DV connector.
• CLIP DISCONTINUED
This message appears in one-clip recording mode
when conformity errors occur in a complied clip and the
next recording cannot be complied to the clip.
• DIR ENTRY NG CARD
This message indicates that the directory on the card
has become corrupted and that normal recording
cannot be guaranteed if operation continues. Make a
quick backup of card data and reformat the card.
• EXTERNAL1394 DISCONNECT
This message appears when the menu option 1394
CONTROL in the OTHER FUNCTIONS screen is set to
EXT and recording is attempted without connecting an
external device to the DVCPRO/DV connector.
• FORMAT ERR !
This indicates a P2 card that does not meet the P2 card
standard
• INCOMPATIBLE CARD
This message indicates that the inserted card does not
meet required standards and cannot be used.
It may also appear when a proxy card is inserted when
the power is on.
• LOW BATTERY
This message indicates that the battery is depleted.
• REC WARNING
This is displayed during a recording error. Do the
recording over. If this does not solve the problem,
consult your supplier.
• CARD ERR (1) (2) (1/2): The number indicates the P2
card that is giving trouble.
• Turn the power off if the warning continues.
• If the warning persists after rerecording, replace
the card with another card.
• ERROR: Other causes
• OVER MAX# CLIPS: The limit for the number of clips
that can be recorded to one P2 card (up to
1000 clips) has been reached.
• PULL DOWN ERROR: Video pull-down sequence
error in a mode such as 24P (25P)
• REC RAM OVERFLOW: Overflow of recording memory
• RUN DOWN CARD
This message indicates that a P2 card has been
overwritten the maximum number of times and that
normal recording cannot be guaranteed if operation
continues.
It is best to replace such P2 cards with a new card.
• SYSTEM ERROR
This message indicates that a system error has
occurred. This type of error can often be corrected by
turning off the power and turning it back on again.
• CAM MICON ERROR: The microprocessor in the
camera is not responding.
• P2 CONTROL ERROR: a P2 control error has
occurred.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
• P2 MICON ERROR: The P2 microprocessor does not
respond
• TEMPORARY PAUSE
IRREGULAR FRM SIG:
This message indicates that the input GENLOCK
reference signal is irregular and that recording
has been paused.
• TURN POWER OFF
This message indicates that an abnormal event has
occurred, for example, that a card was removed during
access or that a system mode change was made.
Turn the power off and then turn it back on again.
• WIRELESS RF
This message indicates that reception from the wireless
receiver is poor.
Camera status display
• ABB
ABB indicator
• ATW ACTIVE
Appears when the AUTO W/B BAL switch is set to AWB
and ATW is running.
• ATW (ATW LOCK)
Appears when the WHITE BAL switch is set to B and
ATW has been assigned.
• AUTO KNEE (ON/OFF)
Displayed when changing the AUTO KNEE switch
position.
• AWB
AWB indicator
• AWB P3.2K/AWB P5.6K
Displays the color temperature assigned to PRST when
the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST. Also displayed
when AWB is performed in the PRST position.
• BACK LIGHT (OFF)
Displayed during iris control when back light status is
changed by pressing the user button to which BACK
LIGHT is assigned.
• DRS ON (OFF)
Displayed when DRS operation has been changed.
• GAIN**dB
Displayed when GAIN is switched.
• ND NG
Displayed when the ND filter is not positioned correctly.
• SCENE******
Displays the name of a scene file selected by turning
the SCENE FILE dial.
• SHUTTER 1/**** (OFF)
Displayed when the shutter speed is changed.
• SPOT LIGHT (OFF)
Displayed during iris control when back light status is
changed by pressing the user button to which SPOT
LIGHT is assigned.
• FBC ON (OFF)
Displayed when FBC operation has been changed.
79
Checking and displaying shooting status
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
• Hold down the DISP/MODE CHK button in recording
standby or during recording to display the settings of
each shooting function, the list of functions assigned
to USER buttons and all other information. Release the
button to return to the regular screen.
• Press the DISP/MODE CHK button during recording
standby or recording clears all displays. Press again to
return to the regular display.
• These settings are maintained when the unit is turned off
and also when switching media and operating mode.
• The following items can be displayed in the viewfinder
and on the LCD monitor by pressing the DISP/MODE
CHK button or by configuring the menu option OTHER
DISPLAY in the DISPLAY SETUP screen.
Displays that
MODE CHECK
brings up 
Displays that DISPLAY
OFF clears 
DISP/MODE CHK button
Displays opened or hidden by settings in the
OTHER DISPLAY option
–: Not affected, : Opens, ×: Clears
ALL
PARTIAL
OFF
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Other menus that clear
displays
–: Not affected
No
Displays
1
2
3



Is not cleared
Is not cleared
Is not cleared



×
×
–
×
Is not cleared
–
–
–
–

Is not cleared
–
–
–
–




Is not cleared

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Date/Time




×
–












–




–
–




–
–
×
×
×
×
–
LEVEL METER
–
–
–
–
Zoom




×
–
18
Time code displays
Warnings
Backup unit displays
Recording format and
system frequency
indication
Information display
Proxy information display
(optional)
Letter box recording display
Y GET brightness display
Calendar
Recording/playback frame
rate display
Audio level meter display
Shutter speed
DRS display
Iris display
Auto-iris control displays
Zoom position display
Recommended ND filter
display
ND filter display



×
–
19
Gain display



×
–
20
WHITE BAL switch
position indication



×
–
21
22
23
FBC indication
CAC indicator
Scene file name display



×

Does not indicate 0 dB
 Displays only ATW.
LOCK, P3.2K and
P5.6K

–
×
×
–
×
–
–
–
–
–
CARD/BATT
–
–
CARD/BATT
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
24 Remaining battery charge

Media remaining memory
display

26 Media information display

25
27 Recording and playback
80



–



 Goes on when battery
–
charge drops
 Goes on when battery
–
charge drops
 Lights when SLOT SEL

is performed
 Appears at top right
only during recording
and in special recording
modes



–
CARD/BATT *1
–
× Lights when SLOT
CARD/BATT
SEL is performed
× Appears at top
right only during
recording and in
–
special recording
modes
(Continued on the next page)
No
Displays
Displays that
MODE CHECK
brings up 
28
One-clip recording mode
display

Displays that DISPLAY
OFF clears 

Displays opened or hidden by settings in the
OTHER DISPLAY option
–: Not affected, : Opens, ×: Clears
ALL
PARTIAL
OFF
× Appears when
recording to a clip is


started or stopped
Other menus that clear
displays
–: Not affected
–
*1 Only the warning that a P2 card has not been inserted is not displayed.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
MODE CHECK indication
MODE CHECK provides an almost complete set of camera information.
Items 1 to 5 below are provided only by MODE CHECK.
5
4
TC
12 : 34 : 56 : 23
1 2 1 9 9 9 min B 9 0 %
P2 FUL L
P - P A U S E D I ONC 1 6 0 U S E R - 1
1 - CL I P
CAC
1394
F BC
S
L
O
T
1
:
N
O
T
S
U
P
P
O
R
T
E
D
1080 i
1
S L O T 2 : P ROX Y
AVC-I100
A B B NG
MA I N : S L O T S E L
AWB N G 3
60
2
1 : T E X T MEMO
P 3 .2K
PROXY
2
:
P
R
E
R
E
C
0 dB
L T . BOX
R E T : S HO T MA R K
ND 1
8 3% ND 1
FEB 2 5 2 0 0 8 2 3 : 5 9 : 5 9
6 0 : 2 4 PN
DRS
S POT
1
=====
1/ 2 5 0
F5 . 6
Z99
2 = = =
C
H
C
H
1 P2 card slot status display
Displays status for P2 card slots 1 and 2.
• ACTIVE:
Indicates cards that are ready for read and write operations (includes cards selected for recording)
• ACCESSING:
Indicates a card that is currently read or being written to
• INFO READING:
Card in the recognition phase
• FULL: No more space available on the P2 card
• PROTECTED:
The P2 card is write-protected.
• NOT SUPPORTED:
The P2 card cannot be used or recognized.
• FORMAT ERROR:
The P2 card is not properly formatted.
• NO CARD:
No card has been inserted.
• PROXY: (optional)
Proxy card
• No indication:
The camera is in the USB DEVICE mode
2 Information on user button and lens RET button assignment
Information to check what functions are assigned to user buttons and the lens RET button are provided in the following
sections.
For details, refer to [Assigning functions to USER buttons] (page 61).
For details, refer to [RET SW] (page 138).
3 AWB, ABB error display
A mode check indicates when AWB and ABB fail to operate normally.
4 Battery type
This indicates the battery type selected for detection of remaining battery charge.
5 One-clip recording mode display
For details, refer to [One-clip recording mode display] (page 78).
81
Center marker display
A center marker is displayed when the menu option
MARKER in the DISPLAY SETUP screen is set to ON.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
NOTE
The center marker display appears only on the LCD monitor
and in the viewfinder. It is not superimposed on signals output
via the VIDEO OUT and SDI OUT connectors.
Audio level meter magnification
Press the user button to which MAG A. LVL has been
assigned to display a magnification of the audio level meter
(available also when LEVEL METER in the DISPLAY SETUP
menu is set to OFF).
Press the button again to return to normal audio level meter
size.
Turning on MODE CHECK during audio level meter
magnification clears the audio level meter display. After
MODE CHECK use, the audio level meter reappears at
normal size.
TC
12 : 34 : 56 : 23
12
P - PAUSE
P2 FUL L
1394
1 9 9 9 min
1 - CL I P
B 9 0%
USER - 1
�
1080 i
AVC-I 100
60
P 3 .2K
0 dB
ND 1
PROXY
Safety zone markers
A safety zone marker is displayed when the menu option
SAFETY ZONE is selected in the DISPLAY SETUP screen.
• OFF: Not displayed
• 90%: indicates the display area on a normal household
TV
L T . BOX
W.L. : C H 1
-30
-20
-10
0 dB
REAR : C H 2
2
1
3
4
5
1 Channel display
This displays the currently monitored audio channel.
• 4:3: Indicates display area available at a 4:3 aspect ratio.
• 13:9: Indicates the display area available at a 13:9 aspect
ratio.
2 Input system display
This displays the audio input system (AUDIO IN switch).
• FRONT
• W.L. (WIRELESS)
• REAR
3 Standard level bar
This bar indicates a -20 dB or -18 dB headroom level
depending on the menu option HEADROOM setting in
the AUDIO SETUP menu.
4 Peak hold display
Holds the audio peak level indication for 1 second.
• 14:9: Indicates the display area available at a 14:9 aspect
ratio.
 NOTE
• The safety zone is not displayed when 4:3, 13:9 or 14:9 is
selected when SYSTEM MODE is set to 480-59.94i (576-50i)
and ASPECT CONV is set to SIDE CROP or LETTER BOX.
• Safety zone markers appear only on the LCD monitor and in
the viewfinder. They are not superimposed on signals output
via the VIDEO OUT and SDI OUT connectors.
82
5 Excessive level indicator
An audio level that is set too high is indicated in red.
Zebra pattern display
The AG-HPX370P/AG-HPX371E can display two zebra
patterns.
Turning the ZEBRA switch on displays the zebra pattern
set in the menu in the viewfinder and LCD monitor. A menu
setting makes it possible to also display the zebra pattern
on video output via the VIDEO OUT connector.
Description
Specifies
whether or
not the zebra
pattern is
superimposed
on VIDEO OUT
signals.
ZEBRA switch
Use the DISPLAY SETUP screen to set the level of zebra
pattern display.
Item
Setting
Description
Sets the level of the
ZEBRA1
50%…70%…109%
right-leaning zebra
DETECT
pattern 1.
Sets the level of the
ZEBRA2
50%…85%…109%
left-leaning zebra
DETECT
pattern 2.
Selects the ZEBRA2
ZEBRA2
ON, SPOT, OFF
type.
Underlined values indicate factory defaults.
SPOT: A video level between ZEBRA1 and ZEBRA2
displays a zebra pattern.
Image level
109%
ON
ZEBRA 2
OFF
SPOT
ZEBRA 2
DETECT
ZEBRA 1
DETECT
0%
To display a zebra pattern on video output via the VIDEO
OUT connector, make the required settings in the OUTPUT
SEL screen.
83
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
OUTPUTSEL screen
Item
Setting
ON:
Displays the zebra pattern
shown on the LCD monitor
and viewfinder of this
camera also in video
VIDEO OUT output via the VIDEO OUT
connector.
ZEBRA
OFF:
The zebra pattern is not
displayed in video output
from the VIDEO OUT
connector.
Focus assist function
Pressing the FOCUS ASSIST button magnifies the image at
the center to facilitate focusing.
Set the menu option FOCUS BAR to ON in the DISPLAY
SET UP screen to display the FOCUS BAR.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
FOCUS ASSIST button
NOTE
This function magnifies only the image at the center of the
LCD monitor and viewfinder. It is not superimposed on signals
output via the VIDEO OUT and SDI OUT connectors.
EXPANDED: (FOCUS ASSIST button)
Trebles the size of the center of the image.
The status indication and the zebra pattern disappears
and EXPANDED appears at the top of the screen.
EXPANDED
EXPANDED
• The EXPANDED display is available only during
recording and does not work in external input mode.
NOTE
In VIDEO OUT and SDI OUT, the center of the image is not
magnified and status indications do not appear.
FOCUS BAR: (DISPLAY SETUP menu)
The length of the bar indicates whether the image is in
focus.
The FOCUS BAR extends to the far right when the
image is in focus.
Out of focus
84
The bar extends to the
right when the image is
in focus.
Adjusting and setting the LCD monitor
Using the LCD Monitor
1
Turn on the POWER switch of the AGHPX370P/AG-HPX371E.
Use the subscreen in the menu option LCD
SETTING in the DISPLAY SETUP screen
to adjust screen color level, brightness and
contrast.
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 129).
• At LCD SETTING of the DISPLAY SETUP screen,
select CHANGE.
Slide the OPEN button in the arrow A direction
to open the LCD monitor.
DISPLAY SETUP
MARKER
SAFETY ZONE
FOCUS BAR
LCD SETTING
SELF SHOOT
LCD BACKLIGHT
SYNC SCAN DISP
DATE/TIME
ON
90%
ON
RETURN
CHANGE
NORMAL
sec
OFF
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
5
Use the JOG dial button to select an item.
LCD SETTING
NOTE
The LCD monitor opens to an angle of 120 degrees.
Attempts to open it further will damage the monitor.
3
Adjust the angle of the LCD monitor for most
convenient viewing.
• The monitor can turn up to 180 degrees towards
the lens and up to 90 degrees towards you.
NOTE
LCD COLOR LEVEL
[ ]
[+]
LCD BRIGHTNESS
[ ]
[+]
LCD CONTRAST
[ ]
[+]
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
6
Press the JOG dial button, and turn the JOG
dial button to adjust the selected item.
LCD SETTING
To prevent camera-recorder failure, do not use force
when adjusting the monitor (when open).
LCD COLOR LEVEL
[ ]
[+]
LCD BRIGHTNESS
[ ]
[+]
LCD CONTRAST
[ ]
[+]
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
NOTE
• Pressing the RESET button when a value that can be
adjusted is selected in the setting menu LCD SETTING will
return the setting to its factory default.
• When closing the LCD monitor make sure that it is shut tight.
• In an environment with sudden temperature changes,
condensation may form on the liquid crystal surface of the
monitor. If this happens, wipe off the moisture with a soft, dry
cloth.
85
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
2
4
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
• When a cloth is used to wipe dew or dirt off the LCD monitor,
discoloration may appear on the screen. This is not a
malfunction. The discoloration disappears in a few minutes.
• When the camera-recorder is very cold, the video image
in the LCD monitor will appear slightly darker immediately
after the power is turned on. Once the interior of the camerarecorder warms up, the LCD monitor delivers normal
brightness.
• The image on the LCD monitor may remain if the battery or
the power plug of an external DC power supply is removed
when the camera is on. This is normal and not a malfunction.
This image will disappear if the camera is left idle.
• Image lag may increase at low temperatures, but this is not a
malfunction.
Self-portrait Shooting
When shooting with the LCD display angled 180 degrees
towards the lens, you can set the menu option SELF
SHOOT to MIRROR, to horizontally flip the video image on
the LCD display, and allow you to view a mirror image while
shooting.
Note that only the video image on the LCD monitor is
horizontally flipped, not the actual video being recorded.
This function clears any status display, waveform and
vectorscope display on the LCD monitor. Setting menus
and thumbnail displays are not flipped horizontally.
Waveform monitor function
Assign the WFM function to a user button and press that
user button to display a waveform for an image in the
LCD monitor. Another press of the WFM button closes the
waveform display.
• The menu option WFM (page 138) in the SW MODE
screen allows you to switch between the waveform and
vectorscope displays.
• The waveform display does not appear in the viewfinder.
• The waveform display does not appear when the focus
assist (EXPANDED) function is used.
• The waveform display cannot be recorded.
86
Adjusting and Setting up the Viewfinder
Adjusting Right and Left Viewfinder
Position
2
Loosen the viewfinder left-right positioning
rings.
1
2
Slide the viewfinder right and left to find a
position that facilitates viewing.
DISPLAY SETUP
EVF PEAK LEVEL
EVF PEAK FREQ
EVF SETTING
EVF B. LIGHT
EVF COLOR
ZEBRA1 DETECT
ZEBRA2 DETECT
ZEBRA2
Viewfinder left-right positioning ring
Tighten the viewfinder left-right positioning
rings.
Diopter Adjustment
1
2
Use the subscreen in the menu option EVF
SETTING in the DISPLAY SETUP screen to
adjust screen brightness and contrast.
For details on menu operations, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 129).
• Select CHANGE in the EVF SETTING.
Tighten
3
Turn on the POWER switch.
0
LOW
RETURN
CHANGE
ON
100%
85%
SPOT
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
3
Use the JOG dial Button to select items to set.
EVF SETTING
Turn on the POWER switch on the camera.
• Look at the image in the viewfinder.
Turn the diopter adjusting ring until you get the
sharpest possible image in the viewfinder.
EVF BRIGHTNESS
[ ]
[+]
EVF CONTRAST
[ ]
[+]
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
Diopter adjusting ring
4
Press the JOG dial button to select an item and
turn the button to make adjustments.
EVF SETTING
EVF BRIGHTNESS
[ ]
[+]
EVF CONTRAST
[ ]
[+]
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
87
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
1
Using the Viewfinder
NOTE
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
• Pressing the RESET button when an adjustable value is
selected in the setting menu EVF SETTING will return that
setting to its factory default.
• The LCD monitor will appear darker than usual if the camera
recorder is cold when it is turned on. The display will return
to its normal brightness as it warms up.
• The issues described below are viewfinder phenomena that
may occur under certain conditions but do not indicate a
malfunction. Nor do they affect recording or output signals.
- Primary colors (red, blue and green) may be seen when
moving eye position in the viewfinder.
-A
t low temperature, the screen image may have an irregular
pink cast.
- When the camera is off, there may be black stripes across
the screen. They disappear when the camera is turned on.
• Image lag may increase at low temperatures, but this is not a
malfunction.
Emphasizing Image Outlines
Emphasizing outlines of images in the viewfinder and on
the LCD monitor makes it easier to focus.
This function does not affect video output from the camera
or video recorded by the camera.
1
Adjust EVF PEAK LEVEL and EVF PEAK
FREQ in the DISPLAY SETUP screen.
DISPLAY SETUP
EVF PEAK LEVEL
EVF PEAK FREQ
EVF SETTING
EVF B. LIGHT
EVF COLOR
ZEBRA1 DETECT
ZEBRA2 DETECT
ZEBRA2
0
LOW
>>>
NORMAL
ON
100%
85%
SPOT
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
Setting the viewfinder to
monochrome mode
Set the menu option EVF COLOR to OFF in the DISPLAY
SETUP screen to change the viewfinder to monochrome
mode.
88
Handling setup data
Configuration of setup data files
SD CARD
AG-HPX370P/AG-HPX371E
SCENE FILE
(Factory defaults)
F1 Default value
F2 Default value
SCENE FILE
(Current operating status values)
SCENE FILE
(Saved camera values)
F1 Current value
F1 Saved value
SCENE FILE
screen INTIAL *1
F2 Current value
SCENE FILE screen
LOAD/SAVE *1
F2 Saved value
F3 Default value
F3 Current value
F3 Saved value
F4 Default value
F4 Current value
F4 Saved value
F5 Default value
F5 Current value
F5 Saved value
F6 Default value
F6 Current value
F6 Saved value
*1: SCENE FILE dial unit
*2: All files F1 to F6
USER FILE
(Factory defaults)
USER FILE initial value
CARD FUNCTIONS screen
SCENE FILE � LOAD/SAVE *2
SCENE FILE
(SD CARD)
F1
F2
F3
SCENE
FILE 1
F4
F5
F6
F1
F2
F3
SCENE
FILE 2
F4
F5
F6
F1
F2
F3
SCENE
FILE 3
F4
F5
F6
F1
F2
F3
SCENE
FILE 4
F4
F5
F6
USER FILE
(Current operating status values)
USER FILE
(Saved camera values)
USER FILE
(SD CARD)
Current USER FILE values
Saved USER FILE values
USER FILE1
OTHER FUNCTIONS screen
USER FILE � INTIAL
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
This camera makes it possible to save a scene file to each of the F1 to F6 positions on the SCENE FILE dial.
Use of an SD memory card makes it possible to save up to four of the F1 to F6 files on an SD card for later retrieval.
The setting menu values can be stored as a user file in the camera and up to four files can be stored on the SD memory
card.
The setting data files are configured as shown below.
OTHER FUNCTIONS screen
USER FILE � LOAD/SAVE
CARD FUNCTIONS screen
USER FILE � LOAD/SAVE
USER FILE2
USER FILE3
USER FILE4
NOTE
• Running the menu option MENU INIT in the OTHER FUNCTIONS screen returns all current operating status values and saved
camera values in the F1 to F6 scene files as well as in the user file to their factory defaults. This function does not return the
TIMEZONE setting to its factory default.
• Setting data file operations may end in error during playback or when the menu option PC MODE is set to ON in the SYSTEM
SETUP screen. Set PC MODE to OFF before performing file operations.
• SCENE FILE and USER FILE settings cannot be operated when recordings can be compiled to a previous clip in one-clip
recording mode (i.e., when “1CLIP” is displayed). Close the menu and press the STOP button for about 2 seconds to stop the
clip compiling process, and then perform the operation.
89
Formatting, Writing and Reading
an SD memory card
Setting Data Using an SD memory card
By saving up to four files of setup menu settings on an
SD or SDHC memory card (optional accessory), you can
create a setup card that will allow you to quickly configure
camera settings before recording.
Handling SD memory cards
Open the CARD FUNCTIONS screen from the setting
menu to format SD memory cards, write setting data to SD
memory cards and to read data stored on an SD memory
card.
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
CARD FUNCTIONS
An SD memory card may be inserted or removed, either
before or after the power is turned on.
SCENE FILE
USER FILE
SD CARD FORMAT
To insert an SD memory card
RETURN
CHANGE
>>>
Open the slot cover, insert the SD memory card (optional
accessory) in the slot with the label side of the card facing
upwards and close the slot cover.
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
Use of SD memory cards in a non-SD/SDHC format
formatted on a device other than this camera will display
a FORMAT ERROR message at the top right of the screen.
Reformat such SD cards in the camera before use.
See [To format an SD memory card] (this page).
To format an SD memory card
NOTE
SD memory cards may be formatted via the thumbnail screen.
For more information, see [Formatting SD memory cards]
(page 124).
NOTE
• An SD memory card must be inserted with the right side
facing the slot. If the card cannot be inserted, it may the
wrong side up or back-to-front. Do not force it into the slot.
Check the card before reinserting it.
• Use only SD memory cards that conform to the SD standard
or the SDHC standard in this camera.
Be sure to read [SD memory card precautions] (page 24)
regarding SD memory handling.
To remove the SD memory card
Open the slot cover and make sure that the BUSY lamp is
not on before pushing the SD memory card further into the
slot and releasing it. This will cause the SD memory card to
pop out of the slot. Remove the SD memory card and close
the slot cover.
SD memory cards must not be used or stored
in an environment where they may be
• Exposed to high temperatures/humidities;
• Exposed to water droplets; or
• Electrically charged.
For storage, the SD memory card must be kept inserted
into the AG-HPX370P/AG-HPX371E with the lid closed.
90
1
Select SD CARD FORMAT item in CARD
FUNCTIONS, then press the JOG dial button.
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 129).
2
Select EXCUTE, then press the JOG dial
button.
CARD FUNCTIONS
SCENE FINE
USER FILE
SD CARD FORMAT
>>>
>>>
RETURN
EXECUTE
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
3
Select YES in the confirmation screen and
press the JOG dial button.
• “SD CARD FORMAT OK” appears and the SD
memory card is formatted.
NOTE
• Each position of the SCENE FILE dial stores settings for
specific shooting situations.
• When shooting, you can retrieve the necessary file
instantly using scene file dial.
• You can also use menu options to change set scene file
values. A modified scene file can be saved to each scene
file dial position.
The card will not be formatted if the following message
appears when the JOG dial button is pressed:
Error message
SD CARD FORMAT NG
NO CARD
(No SD memory card
inserted.)
SD CARD FORMAT NG
ERROR
(SD memory card cannot be
formatted.)
SD CARD FORMAT NG
WRITE PROTECT
(SD memory card is writeprotected.)
SD CARD FORMAT NG
CANNOT ACCESS
(SD memory card not
accessible).
Remedy
Insert an SD memory card.
The card may be defective.
Replace the card.
Remove the card and
cancel the protect.
The SD memory card is
not accessible. When the
current access operation
ends, reformat the card.
SCENE FILE dial
• Note that changing scene files during recording will
not change VFR and frame rate settings. To make such
changes, set the camera to recording standby status.
 Factory setting
• F1: SCENE
File suitable for normal shooting.
• F2: SCENE FLUO.
File suitable for shooting under fluorescent lights, ie.
indoors.
• F3: SCENE SPARK
File suitable for SD shooting with a greater range of
resolution, coloring and contrast.
• F4: SCENE B-STR
File for increasing the contrast of dark areas, such as
when shooting sunsets.
• F5: SCENE CINE V
File suitable for shooting movie-like scenes where the
contrast is to be emphasized.
• F6: SCENE CINE D
File suitable for shooting movie-like scenes where the
dynamic range is to be emphasized.
NOTE
Changes to scene files do not affect SYSTEM MODE settings.
Use the SYSTEM SETUP screen to make such changes.
91
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
Check that no important data remains on a card before
formatting since data erased by formatting cannot be
recovered.
How to Use Scene File Data
Changing scene file settings
4
 Example1: C
hange the name of the scene
file.
1
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
2
When the screen shown below appears, use
the JOG dial button to enter a 6-character file
name.
• Turning the JOG dial button changes the character
display in the following order: space () 
alphabet (A to Z)  numerics (0 to 9) 
symbols (; : < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^_-./).
• If the RESET button is pressed when the filename
has been set, the characters are cleared.
Turn the scene file dial, then select the scene
file to be changed.
Select the menu option NAME EDIT in the
SCENE FILE screen, then press the JOG dial
button.
NAME EDIT
SW POSITION F3
S P A R K
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 129).
SCENE FILE F3:SPARK
MATRIX
SKIN TONE DTL
V DETAIL FREQ
NAME EDIT
NORM1
OFF
THIN
RETURN
CHANGE
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
• After you finish setting the filename, press the
MENU button. This completes the NAME EDIT
change. A change that has been confirmed is
retained after a power down and is not affected by
dial position. Items set for the scene file are also
retained.
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
3
Select CHANGE and press the JOG dial button.
SCENE FILE F3:SPARK
MATRIX
SKIN TONE DTL
V DETAIL FREQ
NAME EDIT
NORM1
OFF
THIN
RETURN
CHANGE
 Example2: Save the F1 scene file to the
camera.
1
Select the menu option LOAD/SAVE/INT in the
SCENE FILE screen, then press the JOG dial
button.
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 129).
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
SCENE FILE
LOAD SAVE INIT
VFR
FRAME RATE
(SYNCHRO SCAN)
DETAIL LEVEL
V DETAIL LEVEL
DETAIL CORING
CHROMA LEVEL
RETURN
LOAD
SAVE
INITIAL
0
0
0
0
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
92
2
Saving scene files and other
settings on SD memory cards
Select SAVE and press the JOG dial button.
SCENE FILE
RETURN
LOAD
SAVE
INITIAL
0
0
0
0
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
3
Select YES and press the JOG dial button.
• To return to the menu level above, press the
MENU button.
SCENE FILE
SAVE ?
YES
PUSH SET
NO
You can save up to four scene file settings or other settings
as files on an SD memory card, and you can also load
them from the card.
• Current scene file settings are automatically saved in the
camera and written to an SD memory card. When data
has been read from an SD memory card, the current
settings are rewritten at the same time as the data saved
inside the unit.
• The data in all the scene files, F1 to F6, is rewritten.
Be sure to read [Handling SD memory cards] (page 90)
regarding SD memory handling.
The following procedure shows how to save scene files.
1
2
Set the unit’s POWER switch to ON.
Select the menu option SCENE FILE in the
CARD FUNCTIONS screen, then press the
JOG dial button.
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 129).
• “PROCESSING” appears and the following
message is shown when all settings have been
completed.
3
Select CHANGE and press the JOG dial button.
• Select the menu option USER FILE for other
settings.
CARD FUNCTIONS
SCENE FILE
USER FILE
SD CARD FORMAT
SAVE
RETURN
CHANGE
>>>
COMPLETED !
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
• After changing the scene file settings, to return to the
settings to the previously saved values, select LOAD in
step 2 and perform the operation described in step 3.
• To return the scene file settings to their factory defaults,
select INITIAL in step 2 and perform the operation
described in step 3.
• To save and read user file settings or return them to
their factory defaults, open the setting menu OTHER
FUNCTIONS screen and run USER FILE in the same way
as when handling scene files.
4
Select the file number (1 to 4) using the JOG
dial button.
• Press the JOG dial button again to confirm the
setting.
SCENE FILE(SD CARD)
FILE SELECT
READ
WRITE
FILE 1
FILE 2
FILE 3
FILE 4
TITLE RELOAD
1
>>>
>>>
NO FILE
NO FILE
NO FILE
NO FILE
>>>
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
93
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
LOAD SAVE INIT
VFR
FRAME RATE
(SYNCHRO SCAN)
DETAIL LEVEL
V DETAIL LEVEL
DETAIL CORING
CHROMA LEVEL
5
Select WRITE and press the JOG dial button,
then select EXECUTE and press the JOG dial
button.
SCENE FILE(SD CARD)
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording
FILE SELECT
READ
WRITE
FILE 1
FILE 2
FILE 3
FILE 4
TITLE RELOAD
1
>>>
RETURN
EXECUTE
NO FILE
NO FILE
NO FILE
>>>
To title a file
1
2
6
Press the cursor button, turn the JOG dial
button to move to YES and again press the
JOG dial button.
• In the following example, TITLE 1 is the filename.
• When writing is completed, WRITE OK appears.
Use the JOG dial button to select characters,
then press the JOG dial button to move to the
next character.
• You can input any of the following characters:
Space, A to Z, 0 to 9, : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^_-./
• You can erase all characters using the RESET
button.
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
Perform steps 1 to 5.
3
4
When all entries have been made, move the
cursor to the right of the entered title.
Select YES and press the JOG dial button.
SCENE FILE(SD CARD)
SCENE FILE(SD CARD)
WRITE FILE 1
YES
PUSH SET
NO
TITLE EDIT
T I T L E 1
WRITE FILE 1
YES
PUSH SET
NO
TITLE EDIT
T I T L E 1
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
• “WRITE OK” appears when the title is written.
To load a file
NOTE
Perform steps 1 to 4. Select READ in step 5, select
EXECUTE and press the JOG dial button. READ OK
appears when loading completes.
Like scene files, process user files by using the menu
option USER FILE in the CARD FUNCTION screen.
• If WRITE NG FORMAT ERROR appears, format the SD
memory card.
• If WRITE NG WRITE PROTECT appears, change the lock tab
position to enable writing.
• If WRITE NG CANNOT ACCESS appears, quit all other
operations (such as playback) before proceeding.
• If WRITE NG ERROR appears, the SD memory card may be
defective. Replace it.
Reloading Files From an SD Memory Card
Perform steps 1 to 3, move to TITLE RELOAD so that YES
is displayed in step 5, and press the JOG dial button.
The file is reloaded.
94
Chapter 5 Preparation
Power Supply
A battery or an external DC power supply can be used as
the power supply for the camera-recorder.
2
Insert the battery and slide it in the direction of
the arrow.
Using a Battery
Release lever
Chapter 5 Preparation
The following is a list of batteries that have been tested and
verified to work with the camera.
Anton/Bauer batteries
PROPAC14, TRIMPACK14
HYTRON50, HYTRON140
DIONIC90, DIONIC160
IDX batteries
NP-L7, ENDURA7, ENDURA10
Sony batteries
BP-GL65/95
PAG batteries
PAGL95
NOTE
NOTE
• Although other batteries may be used by changing the menu
setting, it is recommended that you use batteries that have
been tested and verified to work with camera.
• Charge the battery with the battery charger before using it.
(Please refer to the battery charger’s instruction manual for
information about charging.)
Removing the battery
Completely push down and hold the release lever
on the battery holder. Then, slide the battery in the
opposite direction to the arrow while holding the lever
down.
Mounting the Battery and Setting
the Battery Type
Using an Anton/Bauer Battery
1
3
Set the battery type.
• Select the battery type listed under BATTERY
SELECT. Select the menu option BATTERY
SELECT from the setting menu BATTERY SETUP
screen.
Mount an Anton/Bauer battery.
Power supply output connector for lighting
(DC OUT 12 V 4.5 A)
Anton/Bauer Battery
Lighting control switch
NOTE
The Anton/Bauer battery holder includes both a power
supply output connector for lighting and a lighting
control switch, which are convenient when attaching a
light. Please contact Anton/Bauer for information about
the lighting system.
95
When using a V-mount type battery
When using an NP battery
Mount the V-mount adapter plate. Insert the plate and slide
it as shown below.
• To remove the plate, slide the release lever downwards.
1
2
Chapter 5 Preparation
Release lever
Mount a V-mount adapter plate on the camera.
Refer to [When using a V-mount type battery] (this
page).
Attach a holder plate on the NP battery case.
• When the battery plate comes with a packing, first
insert the packing in the battery case.
(1) R
emove the screw at the bottom of the cover
and remove the cover.
(2) L
ine up the openings in the battery case and
battery plate and use the supplied screws to
fasten the case to the plate.
(3) T
ighten the power supply connector screw.
(4) Insert the removed top cover in the direction of
the arrow.
(5) L
ine up the openings in the lower cover (metal
part) and the case and use the securing screw
to fasten them together.
Setting the battery type
• Select the battery type listed under BATTERY SELECT.
Select the menu option BATTERY SELECT from the
setting menu BATTERY SETUP screen.
• When using a battery not listed under BATTERY SELECT:
If it is a NiCd battery, select “NiCd14 (14 V)” and set each
item according to the battery characteristics. If it is not a
NiCd battery, select TYPE A or TYPE B and set each item
according to the battery characteristics. For details, refer
to [BATTERY SETUP screen] (page 144).
NOTE
• For information about the V-mount adapter plate, please
contact the store where you purchased the camera-recorder.
• With the V-mount adapter plate installed, % (percent) values
cannot be displayed when using batteries that show the
remaining battery capacity.
96
Use of the external DC power
supply
1
Connect the external DC power supply to the
DC IN socket on the unit.
DC IN Socket
External DC power supply
2
• When using an external power supply other than the
AC adapter, check the DC IN socket pin information
to ensure correct polarity. If a +12 V power supply is
accidentally connected to the GND terminal, this could
cause a fire or personal injury.
Turn “ON” the power switch of the external DC
power supply. (If the power switch is available
on the external DC power supply)
4
1
2
3
Turn the camera-recorder power switch ON.
3
Pin No.
Signal
1
GND
2, 3
—
4
+12 V
CASE
Frame GND
NOTE
• When both the battery and the external DC power supply are
connected, power is supplied from the external DC power
supply. The battery can be removed or mounted while using
an external DC power supply.
• When using an external DC power supply, make sure you
turn on the external DC power supply before turning on the
camera-recorder’s power switch. If this sequence is reversed,
the camera-recorder may malfunction due to slow rising of
the external DC power supply voltage.
• To connect a battery to the DC IN connector, select BATTERY
in the menu option EXT DC IN SEL, and select the battery
type in the menu option BATTERY SELECT in the BATTERY
SETUP screen. Note that with these settings, the “%”
indication cannot be displayed, even for batteries capable of
indicating remaining power.
97
Chapter 5 Preparation
DC cable
Use of external DC power supply
Make sure that the output voltage of the external DC
power supply meets the rated voltage of the camera before
making a connection.
The output current of the external DC power supply should
be large enough to provide the connected camera with its
total amperage needs with a reasonable margin.
Use the following formula to calculate the total amperage
of the camera.
total power consumption ÷ voltage
When the power is turned on, a rush current occurs. If the
power supply is insufficient during this time, the camera
may be damaged. Therefore, we recommend using an
external DC power supply that provides at least twice the
total power consumed by the camera and all the devices
connected to the unit that power on when the camera
powers on (example: lens, wireless microphone receiver).
The DC cable should be a two-core 18 AWG (or larger)
shielded cable (nominal cross-sectional area: 0.824 mm2).
Mounting and Adjusting the Lens
3
Mounting the Lens
1
Lower the lens lever to firmly tighten the lens.
Raise the lens clamping lever and remove the
mount cap.
Lens Clamping Lever
Chapter 5 Preparation
4
Secure the cable through the cable clamp, and
plug it into the LENS connector.
Mount Cap
2
Cable
clamp
To mount the lens, align the indentation at the
top center of the lens mount with the center
mark of the lens.
Mark
LENS Connector
For details on the current provided by the lens
terminal, refer to page 175.
5
Adjust the lens flange back.
For details, refer to [Adjusting the Lens Flange
Back] (page 99).
NOTE
• Please refer to the lens instruction manual for
guidance on lens handling.
• When the lens is removed, install the mount cap to
protect the device.
98
Adjusting the Lens Flange Back
If images are not clearly focused at both telephoto and
wide-angle positions during zoom operations, adjust the
flange back (distance from the lens mounting surface to the
image formation surface).
Once adjusted, the flange back does not need to be
re-adjusted as long as the same lens is mounted on the
camera.
NOTE
1
2
Set the zoom ring to the wide-angle position
and turn the F.f (flange focus) ring to adjust
focus.
• Do not move the distance ring during focusing.
8
9
Repeat Steps 5 to 7 until the lens is in focus at
both the telephoto and wide-angle positions.
Firmly tighten the F.f ring clamping screw.
Chapter 5 Preparation
Please also refer to the lens instruction manual for directions
on adjustment and locations of individual lens parts.
7
Mount the lens on the camera.
• Make sure you connect the lens cable.
Set the lens iris to manual, and fully open the
iris.
Approximately 3 m
3
Place the flange back adjustment chart about
3 m from the lens and adjust the lighting on
the chart to obtain an appropriate video output
level.
• If the video level is too high, use the filters or the
shutter.
4
Loosen the F.f (Flange focus) ring clamping
screw.
NOTE
F.b (Flange back) may be indicated on some lenses.
5
6
Set the zoom ring to the telephoto position,
either manually or by electric drive.
Shoot the flange back adjustment chart and
turn the distance ring to adjust focus.
99
White Shading Compensation
The camera can use DEFAULT (fixed value) and three user
adjustable functions (USER1, USER2, USER3) to store
white shading compensation data.
Select SHADING SELECT in the setting menu LENS SETUP
screen to set compensation data. Selecting OFF turns off
shading compensation.
NOTE
Chapter 5 Preparation
If white shading adjustments are made while the video image
is distorted due to GENLOCK, the adjustments may not be
correct. Wait for the video image to return to normal before
performing white shading adjustments again.
Selecting White Shading Compensation
Data
1
Select SHADING SELECT in LENS SETUP,
then press the JOG dial button.
or details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
F
menus] (page 129).
LENS SETUP
SHADING SELECT
SHADING(USER)
CAC
CAC PROPERTY
CAC CARD READ
CAC FILE DELETE
CAC FILE INIT
IRIS ADJUST
DEFAULT
>>>
ON
>>>
>>>
>>>
>>>
>>>
White Shading Adjustment
NOTE
Coloring may occur in the vertical direction near the open
setting of the lens iris even when the white shading has been
adjusted. This is an optical characteristic and not indicative of
a failure.
1
Place the camera in the adjustment mode.
(1) M
ount a lens on the camera.
• Do not forget to connect the lens cable.
(2) T
urn the shutter switch off and set 0 dB gain.
(3) If the lens comes with an extender, disengage it.
(4) O
pen the setting menu LENS SETUP screen
and select USER1, USER2 or USER3 under
SHADING SELECT.
(5) U
se the JOG dial button to select SHADING
(USER), select EXECUTE and press the JOG dial
button.
• The message “CHECK LUMINANCE LEVEL
ZEBRA ON VF” appears.
LENS SETUP
SHADING SELECT
SHADING(USER)
CAC
CAC PROPERTY
CAC CARD READ
CAC FILE DELETE
CAC FILE INIT
IRIS ADJUST
USER1
RETURN
EXECUTE
>>>
>>>
>>>
>>>
>>>
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
2
Use the JOG dial button to select DEFAULT,
USER1, USER2, USER3 or OFF and press the
JOG dial button.
• To adjust the white shading, select USER1, USER2
or USER3.
• The USER1, USER2 or USER3 settings do not
contain any compensation data by default.
• DEFAULT stores compensation data that suits
XT17x4.5BRM-K14. For lenses other than those
above, perform the “White Shading Adjustment”
described below.
LENS SETUP
SHADING SELECT
SHADING(USER)
CAC
CAC PROPERTY
CAC CARD READ
CAC FILE DELETE
CAC FILE INIT
IRIS ADJUST
DEFAULT
USER1
USER2
USER3
OFF
>>>
>>>
>>>
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
100
CHECK LUMINANCE LEVEL
ZEBRA ON VF
SHADING: USER1 SET OK?
YES
NO
PUSH SET
2
Set the image.
CHECK LUMINANCE LEVEL
ZEBRA ON VF
SHADING: USER1 SET OK?
YES
NO
PUSH SET
3
6
If the lens is provided with an extender, turn on
the extender function and perform steps 2 to 5
again.
• The white shading adjustment need not be
readjusted when the extender is later turned off.
Setting Chromatic Aberration
Compensation (CAC)
The CAC function of the camera corrects the registration
error caused by the slight chromatic aberration that the
lens cannot compensate for. This minimizes color bleeding
into the surrounding image areas.
Lenses compatible with the CAC function whose CAC data
is registered in the camera will automatically start CAC
operation.
CAC data for the following lenses have been stored in the
camera as default values.
Model numbers of
Camera indication
compatible lenses
XT17X4.5BRM-K14
XT17x4.5BRM-K14
NOTE
NOTE
• Adjust the white shading in sunlight, under halogen
lamp light or other light source that does not flicker.
Fluorescent light and mercury lamps tend to flicker
and should not be used for this adjustment.
• Adjust the light source if the lens iris is out of the
range between F4 and F11.
• Make sure the electronic shutter is set to off.
• One of the lens model number appearing in the menu
represents the lens group.
• The CAC function in this camera operates in horizontal
direction only.
• The CAC function does not operate at +24 dB.
• The CAC function may not operate normally in macro
shooting.
• For details on new lenses compatible with this function and
any changes to this function after the release of this camera,
visit the support desk at the following website.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
Adjust white and black balance.
(1) Set the WHITE BAL switch to A or B and use the
AUTO W/B BAL switch to make an automatic
white balance adjustment.
(2) Use the AUTO W/B BAL switch to make an
automatic black balance adjustment.
(3) Again, use the AUTO W/B BAL switch to make
an automatic white balance adjustment.
4
Repeat the operation in step 2-(2).
5
Adjust white shading.
Checking CAC Operating Status
When the menu is not open, the CAC indication at the top
right of the screen indicates that the CAC function is on.
(1) Use the JOG dial button to select YES and press
the JOG dial button.
(2) The message “SHADING ACTIVE” appears on
the screen during adjustment.
(3) When the adjustment ends after a few seconds,
the message “SHADING OK” appears.
• When an error message such as “SHADING NG
LEVEL OVER” or “SHADING NG LOW LIGHT”
appears, adjust the iris.
• The adjusted value is automatically stored in
memory (USER1, USER2, USER3).
101
Chapter 5 Preparation
(1) Shoot a solid white sheet of paper.
(2) Set the lens iris to manual and adjust the iris so
that a zebra pattern fills the entire viewfinder
screen.
• When the piece of paper is unevenly lit, the
zebra pattern will not cover the entire screen.
Adjust as required.
• Make sure that the white paper is not exposed
to multiple light sources (example, fluorescent
lighting or halogen lamps) of different color
temperatures.
Checking CAC data number and CAC data
during operation
1
2
Loading CAC File From an SD Card
1
Open the LENS SETUP screen.
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 129).
Chapter 5 Preparation
Turn the JOG dial button to select CAC
PROPERTY and select DISPLAY to open the
CAC PROPERTY screen.
2
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 129).
Use the JOG dial button to select CAC CARD
READ. Then select EXECUTE to open the CAC
CARD READ screen.
LENS SETUP
• The CAC property list appears.
SHADING SELECT
SHADING(USER)
CAC
CAC PROPERTY
CAC CARD READ
CAC FILE DELETE
CAC FILE INIT
IRIS ADJUST
LENS SETUP
SHADING SELECT
SHADING(USER)
CAC
CAC PROPERTY
CAC CARD READ
CAC FILE DELETE
CAC FILE INIT
IRIS ADJUST
Open the LENS SETUP screen.
DEFAULT
>>>
ON
RETURN
DISPLAY
>>>
>>>
>>>
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
3
CAC Property
a
Use the JOG dial button to select the CAC file
to load. Then select YES and press the JOG
dial button.
CAC CARD READ
CAC PROPERTY
ACTIVE CAC FILE NO : 1
FILE NO : 1
MAKER
: FUJINON
TYPE
:
XT17X4.5BRM-K14
VERSION : 1.00-00-0.00
DATA ERROR
PLEASE READ CAC CARD
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
b
ZT17X4.5BRM-K1
c
d
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
CAC FILE READ
a Current CAC data number
b Data number of CAC you wish to check
Turn the JOG dial to select.
c CAC data of the specified file (b)
d Error messages
The file cannot be used if an error message appears.
Initialize the CAC data or reload the CAC file from an
SD card.
For details, see [Initializing CAC File] (page 103) or
[Loading CAC File From an SD Card] (this page).
102
DEFAULT
>>>
ON
>>>
RETURN
EXECUTE
>>>
>>>
CAC FILE NO:1
YES
NO
READ?
PUSH SET
NOTE
• The camera can load up to 8 files.
When an attempt is made to load a new file while 8 files have
already been loaded, “READ NG CAC FILE FULL” appears. To
load a new file, delete an existing file before loading the new
file.
For details, see [Deleting CAC File] (this page).
• “READ NG FORMAT ERROR” indicates the file cannot be
used and will not be loaded. Make sure the file is in a format
the camera supports and that the file on the SD card is not
corrupted.
Initializing CAC File (Returning Data to
Their Factory Defaults)
1
2
1
2
Use the JOG dial button to select CAC FILE
INIT, select EXECUTE and press the JOG dial.
LENS SETUP
SHADING SELECT
SHADING(USER)
CAC
CAC PROPERTY
CAC CARD READ
CAC FILE DELETE
CAC FILE INIT
IRIS ADJUST
Open the LENS SETUP screen.
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 129).
Use the JOG dial button to select CAC FILE
DELETE, select EXECUTE and press the JOG
dial.
LENS SETUP
SHADING SELECT
SHADING(USER)
CAC
CAC PROPERTY
CAC CARD READ
CAC FILE DELETE
CAC FILE INIT
IRIS ADJUST
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 129).
DEFAULT
>>>
ON
>>>
>>>
RETURN
EXECUTE
>>>
DEFAULT
>>>
ON
>>>
>>>
>>>
RETURN
EXECUTE
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
3
Select YES in the confirmation screen and
press the JOG dial button.
• CAC FILE INIT  PROCESSING  COMPLETED
(these three appear in succession) to indicate that
initialization has been completed.
• The LENS SET UP screen appears after
completion.
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
CAC FILE INIT
CAC FILE INITIAL?
3
YES
Use the JOG dial to select the CAC file to be
deleted. Then select YES and press the JOG
dial button.
PUSH SET
NO
“-----” is indicated when deletion ends.
CAC FILE DELETE
1:XT17X4.5BRM-K14
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
NOTE
This operation deletes all files loaded into the camera and
returns the four CAC data files to their factory defaults.
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
CAC FILE DELETE
CAC FILE NO:1
YES
DELETE?
PUSH SET
NO
103
Chapter 5 Preparation
Deleting CAC File
Open the LENS SETUP screen.
Preparing for Audio Input
Take the following steps to prepare the camera for
connecting audio input devices.
4
When Using the Front Microphone
Set the AUDIO IN switch to [FRONT]
depending on the audio channel to be
recorded.
The AG-MC200G microphone kit (optional) includes a
microphone that can be mounted on the camera.
Chapter 5 Preparation
1
Open the microphone holder.
Viewfinder
AUDIO IN Switch
Microphone holder
2
Clamping Screw
3
Connect the microphone cable to the MIC IN
jack on the camera.
MIC IN Jack
104
Using a wireless receiver
Mount the microphone and tighten the clamping
screw.
1
Remove the lid, install the wireless receiver and
screw it down.
2
Set the AUDIO IN switch to W.L. for the audio
channels that will be recorded.
Chapter 5 Preparation
AUDIO IN Switch
• Set the menu option WIRELESS TYPE in the
AUDIO SETUP screen to DUAL for a 2-channel
wireless receiver.
When Using Audio Devices
1
2
3
Connect the audio device to the AUDIO IN jack
with the XLR cable.
Set the AUDIO IN switch to [REAR] for the
channel to which the XLR cable is connected.
Set the LINE/MIC/+48V selector switch on the
rear panel to [LINE].
LINE/MIC/+48V Selector Switch
AUDIO IN Jack
AUDIO IN Switch
105
Attaching Accessories
Mounting the Camera on a Tripod
Use an optional (SHAN-TM700) tripod adapter to place the
camera on a tripod.
1
Attach the tripod adapter to the tripod.
Removing the Camera from the Tripod
Adapter
While holding the red lever down, move the black lever in
the direction of the arrow, and slide the camera backward
to remove it.
Tripod adapter
Chapter 5 Preparation
Red Lever
Black Lever
NOTE
Pan head
NOTE
Use the holes in the tripod adapter that will make
it possible to position the camera over the tripod
adapter’s center of gravity.
Also, make sure that the diameter of the selected hole
matches the diameter of the pan head screw.
If the tripod adapter’s pin does not return to its original
position after the camera has been removed, hold the red lever
down and move the black lever in the direction of the arrow
again, in order to return the pin to its original position.
Please note that the camera cannot be mounted if the pin
remains in the center.
Attaching the Shoulder Strap
Attach the shoulder strap to the shoulder strap bracket.
To detach the shoulder strap, first open the hooks, then
detach the strap.
Shoulder Strap
2
Attach the camera to the tripod adapter.
• Slide the camera forward along the grooves until
you hear a “click”.
Press to open the
hook.
NOTE
Make sure that the shoulder strap is securely attached.
106
Attaching the Rain Cover
When using the SHAN-RC700 Rain Cover
Attaching the Eye Cup
Attach the eye cup by aligning the projections on the eyepiece
and the eye cup.
Projections (4)
Chapter 5 Preparation
Tighten the cord
Eyepiece
Eye cup
Secure with the surface fastener
Secure with the surface fastener
Attaching the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL
Control Knob
If you use the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control frequently,
attach the accessory knob so that it can be easily
operated.
FRONT AUDIO LEVEL Control
Screw
Knob (Accessory)
Marks
Screw (Accessory)
Remove the screw in the center of the FRONT AUDIO
LEVEL control, and attach the accessory knob using the
screw (included). When attaching the knob, be sure to
align the marks on the control with the marks on the knob.
107
DC OUT Connector and External REC Start/Stop Switch Connection
The DC OUT connector on the camera can output a 1.5 A
current.
Connecting an external switch to this connector enables
REC Start and Stop control.
An LED can be connected and used as a tally lamp, which
is convenient when the camera is mounted on a crane
during recording.
Chapter 5 Preparation
DC OUT connector
(Connection example)
4
1
3
2
Cable connector
HR10A-7P-4P(73)
Hirose Electric Co.
(For details on connecting
the connector, refer to
page 174.)
LED
Resist­
ance
REC
Start/Stop
1: GND
2: TALLY OUT
The AG-HPX370P/AG-HPX371E has open collector
output
TALLY ON:
Low impedance
TALLY OFF:
High impedance
3: REC Start/Stop switch
This pin is connected in parallel with the REC button
and the lens VTR button.
4: +12 V
NOTE
Be sure to check polarity before connecting an external device
as incorrect connection could lead to damage.
108
Connecting the AJ-RC10G Remote Control Unit
• Some functions can be remote controlled when the
remote control unit AJ-RC10G (optional accessory) is
connected to the camera.
• When the AJ-RC10G is connected, the camera
automatically enters remote control mode after the power
switches of both the camera and the AJ-RC10G are
turned ON.
• Be sure to turn the POWER switches on the camera and
the AJ-RC10G off before connecting or disconnecting the
controller cable.
• Use only designated cables or designed option cables to
connect the AJ-RC10G. Use of other cables could result in
equipment damage.
• The USER buttons and MENU button do not work when
the AJ-RC10G is connected.
• Refer to the Operating Instructions of the AJ-RC10G
included in the supplied CD-ROM.
• For details on the current provided by the REMOTE
terminal, refer to page 174.
AJ-RC10G
Connecting the AG-EC4G Extension Control Unit
• Some functions can be remote controlled when the
AG-EC4G extension control unit (optional accessory) is
connected to the camera.
• When the AG-EC4G is connected, the camera
automatically enters remote control mode after the power
switches of both the camera and the AG-EC4G are
turned ON.
REMOTE connector
NOTE
• Be sure to turn the POWER switches on the camera and
the AG-EC4G off before connecting or disconnecting the
controller cable.
• Use only designated cables or designated option cables to
connect the AG-EC4G. Use of other cables could result in
equipment damage.
• The USER buttons and MENU button do not work when
the AG-EC4G is connected.
• For details on the current provided by the REMOTE
terminal, refer to page 174.
AG-EC4G
109
Chapter 5 Preparation
REMOTE connector
NOTE
Chapter 6 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails
A clip is a data group that includes the images and sounds created from one shooting session, together with additional
information such as text memos and meta data.
The following manipulations can be performed using the cursor and SET buttons, while checking the images displayed on
the LCD monitor:
• Playback, delete, copy or restore the clip.
• Add or delete a shot mark and a text memo on the clip thumbnail.
• Copy part of a clip by using the text memo.
• Use a text memo to change thumbnail images
• Format P2 cards and SD memory cards.
• Uploading and editing clip metadata from the SD memory card
Thumbnail Operations
Chapter 6 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails
Thumbnail Manipulations Overview
Thumbnail screens are configured as follows:
THUMBNAIL
OPERATION
ALL CLIP
SAME FORMAT CLIPS
SELECTED CLIPS
MARKED CLIPS
TEXT MEMO CLIPS
DELETE
FORMAT
REPAIR CLIP
RE-CONNECTION
COPY
EXCH. THUMBNAIL
DEVICE SETUP
EXIT
PROPERTY
CLIP PROPERTY
CARD STATUS
SLOT CLIPS
SETUP
EXIT
INDICATOR
DATA DISPLAY
DATE FORMAT
THUMBNAIL SIZE
PLAYBACK RESUME
THUMBNAIL INIT
EXIT
HDD
EXPORT
EXPLORE
SETUP
EXIT
110
DEVICES
PROPERTY SETUP
EXIT
META DATA
LOAD
RECORD
USER CLIP NAME
INITIALIZE
PROPERTY
EXIT
Thumbnail Screen
Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail
screen on the LCD monitor. Pressing the THUMBNAIL
button again returns the display to the regular display.
When switching is done from the regular screen display to
the thumbnail screen display, all the clips will be displayed
on the thumbnail screen.
Pressing the THUMBNAIL MENU button allows you to
navigate the thumbnail menu.
NOTE
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
9 10
2 Slot numbers and HDD status
This function indicates on which P2 card the selected
clip is recorded. The number of the slot that contains
the appropriate P2 card is indicated in yellow. If the
clip is recorded on more than one P2 card, then the
numbers of all slots that contain the appropriate cards
are indicated. The numbers of the other slots are shown
in white if they contain P2 cards.
When the following P2 card is inserted, the slot number
is displayed with a pink frame.
 RUN DOWN CARD
(A P2 card on which the maximum number of
overwrites has been exceeded.)
 DIR ENTRY NG CARD
(A P2 card on which the directory structure is not
supported.)
The USB HDD section is indicated as follows:
 Other than the USB HOST mode: gray
 Not connected in USB HOST mode: gray
 HDD recognized and usable in USB HOST mode:
white
 HDD recognized and thumbnails shown in USB
HOST mode: yellow
 HDD recognized and data unable to be copied in
USB HOST: red
3 Time Display
You can set this to display the time code at the start
of clip recording, the user bits at the start of clip
recording, the shooting time, the shooting date, the
shooting date and time or USER CLIP NAME.
11 12 13 14 15
1 Display Mode
Displays thumbnail types and other information
screens.
ALL:
Display all clips.
SAME FORMAT:
The clips in the same format as the system
format are shown. To check the format,
consult system mode and REC FORMAT
indicated on the STATUS screen of the
viewfinder.
For details, see [Viewfinder Screen Status
Displays] (page 74).
SELECT: The clips selected with the SET button are
shown.
MARKER:
Display clips with shot marks.
TEXT MEMO:
Display clips with text memo data.
4 Recording mode
The recording mode for the clip on which the pointer is
located is indicated.
5 System mode
The format for the clip on which the pointer is located is
indicated.
6 Duration
The duration of the clip on which the pointer is located
is indicated.
7 USB HOST mode indicator
Indicated when the mode has been switched to USB
HOST.
111
Chapter 6 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails
When the TCG switch is set to “SET” to set the time code and
user bits or when the camera menu is open, the THUMBNAIL
button does not work.
SLOT n: This indicates a specific clip on the P2 card.
(n: slot number 1 or 2)
UPDATING..:
Indicated when the unit is updating the
screen or reading data. When the screen is
being updated, the rotating icon is indicated.
For details, refer to [Switching the Thumbnail Display]
(page 114).
8 Clip Number
The numbers set by the camera for all the clips
recognized correctly by the P2 card. These numbers
are allocated in chronological order, by shooting dates
and times.
If clips cannot be played because of different recording
formats, they are displayed in red.
9
Chapter 6 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails
X Defective Clip Indicator and
? Unknown Clip indicator
This marker is displayed for defective clips, which may
result from a variety of causes, e.g., powering-down
during recording.
Clip with yellow defective clip indicators can be
restored in some cases. Please refer to [Restoring
Clips] (page 118) for more information.
A clip displayed with a red defective clip indicator
cannot be restored and must be deleted. If the clip
cannot be deleted, format the P2 card.
? is displayed for clips such as those which differ in
format from the P2 standard.
10 ! Incomplete Clip Indicator
Indicates that although a clip is recorded across
multiple P2 cards, one of these cards is not inserted
into a P2 card slot.
11 M Shot Mark Indicator
This marker is displayed for a clip with a shot mark
attached. For details, refer to [Shot Marker (SHOT
MARK) Recording Function] (page 46).
12 P Indicator for clips with proxy
This marker is displayed for clips with proxy attached.
13 T Text Memo Indicator
This marker is displayed for a clip with a text memo
attached.
14 E Edit Copied Clip Indicator
In models which support edit copying, such as the AJHPM110, this marker is displayed on clips which have
undergone edit copying. For more information about
edit copying, see the instruction manual for a model
that supports edit copying.
15 W Wide Clip Indicator
This marker is displayed for clips recorded with the 16:9
aspect ratio. However, it does not accompany clips in
HD format.
112
Selecting Thumbnails
Multiple thumbnails can be randomly selected in the
thumbnail screen.
1
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer
(yellow frame) to the desired clip and press the
SET button.
• The frame around the selected thumbnail changes
to a blue frame. Press the SET button again to
deselect the clip.
Additional clips can be selected by repeating
step 1.
It is possible to display only the selected thumbnails in the
thumbnail screen for playback. Please refer to [Switching
the Thumbnail Display] (page 114) for more information.
1
2
3
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer over
the desired clip.
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
• The clip at pointer position is played back on the
LCD monitor.
• After the clip at the cursor location has been
played, subsequent clips are played back in order.
When the last clip has been played, the thumbnail
screen appears.
NOTE
NOTE
• To move the pointer to the first or last clip, hold down the
SHIFT button and press the up and down cursor ([ / ])
buttons.
• To select a sequence of clips, select the first clip and move
the pointer to another clip. Then hold down the SHIFT button
and press the SET button. This will select all clips from the
clip selected first to the clip at the pointer and all clips in
between.
• To cancel selected clips, hold down the SHIFT button while
pressing the EXIT button.
• When playing back clips, it is not necessary
to “select” the clips (blue frames around the
thumbnails).
• Clips with clip numbers displayed in red cannot be
played.
• During playback, pressing the REW button starts 4X
speed reverse playback, and the FF button starts 4X
speed fast playback. Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to
return to normal playback.
• During clip playback, pressing the PLAY/PAUSE button
will temporarily stop (pause) the process.
During a pause, pressing the REW button moves the
pause position to the beginning of the clip. Pressing
the REW button again moves the pause position to the
beginning of the previous clip.
During a pause, pressing the FF button moves the pause
position to the beginning of the next clip.
• Pressing the STOP button during clip playback stops the
playback and returns the display to the thumbnail screen.
NOTE
a
b c d e f
a
b
c
d
LCD monitor
THUMBNAIL button
EXIT button
e q r wcursor buttons
g SET button
e THUMBNAIL MENU button
f SHIFT button
• When playback is stopped, the position of the pointer moves
to the clip that was being played back, regardless of where
playback started.
• When the PLAY/PAUSE button is pressed again, playback will
start from the beginning of the clip on which the pointer is
positioned. To begin playback from the last stop position, set
PLAYBACK RESUME to on. Refer to [Setting the Thumbnail
Display Mode] (page 124) for further details.
• After closing the thumbnail screen by pressing the
THUMBNAIL button, pressing the PLAY/PAUSE button plays
back the first clip (i.e., the clip with the earliest recording
date and time), not the clip on which the pointer was last
positioned.
113
Chapter 6 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails
2
Playing back Clips
Switching the Thumbnail Display
The display can be switched so that only those clips
matching the specified conditions are displayed in the
thumbnail screen.
1
2
Select THUMBNAIL from the thumbnail menu.
• Switch the thumbnail display by selecting one of
the following items:
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button.
• The thumbnail menu opens.
Chapter 6 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails
a
a THUMBNAIL MENU button
114
3
ALL CLIP:
Display all clips.
SAME FORMAT CLIPS:
Displays clips of the current system
format.
SELECTED CLIPS:
Display randomly selected clips.
MARKED CLIPS:
Display clips with shot marks attached.
TEXT MEMO CLIPS:
Display clips with text memo data
attached.
SLOT CLIPS:
Display clips recorded in the P2 card
inserted in the specified slot. When this
item is selected, “SLOT1” to “SLOT2”
are displayed as a sub-menu. Select the
desired slot to display the clips.
SETUP: Please refer to [Setting the Thumbnail
Display Mode] (page 124) for information
about this item.
EXIT:
Close the sub-menu.
Changing thumbnails
It is possible to replace thumbnails with images that
include previously attached text memos while images are
recorded or played back.
1
4
5
Select THUMBNAIL  TEXT MEMO CLIPS to
display thumbnails of the clips with text memos.
Place the pointer on the clip of the thumbnail
that you intend to change, and then press
SET button. Move the pointer to the text memo
display on the lower row.
Select the thumbnail that you intend to
replace, place the pointer on it, and then select
OPERATION  EXCH. THUMBNAIL on the
thumbnail menu.
Press SET button. When the YES/NO
confirmation window is displayed, select YES
by using the cursor button and the SET button.
• The menu closes and the thumbnail for the clip is
replaced.
Shot Mark
A shot mark can be added to a clip thumbnail to
distinguish this clip from other clips.
1
2
3
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer
over the clip to which you want to attach a shot
mark.
Press the USER button or RET button to which
the shot mark function has been assigned.
• This adds a shot mark to the thumbnail of the
clip at the pointer position.
To delete a shot mark, place the pointer on the
clip a second time and press the USER button or
RET button to which the shot mark function has
been assigned.
USER MAIN, USER1 and USER2 buttons
NOTE
• A shot mark can be attached during recording.
• Adding shot marks after recording stops, attaches the shot
mark to the most recently recorded clip.
Please refer to [Shot Marker (SHOT MARK) Recording Function]
(page 46) for more information.
• When adding a shot mark to (or deleting the shot mark from)
a clip recorded across multiple P2 cards, do this with all
these P2 cards inserted into P2 card slots.
115
Chapter 6 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails
3
Display clip properties by selecting PROPERTY  CLIP
PROPERTY on the thumbnail menu to confirm the position of
the thumbnail (the number of frames from the top of the
clip). Since thumbnails come generally from the top of the clip,
“0” is displayed.
Add text memos to images that you intend to
change.
• For details on how to add text memos, refer to
[Text Memo Recording Function] (page 46).
2
NOTE
Text Memo
During recording or playback, you can add text memos to
clips. Text memos can be used to play back clips at some
point or break clips into chunks and copy the necessary
portions.
Playing back a clip at the position where
a text memo is recorded
1
Adding a text memo
Chapter 6 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails
Text memos can be added in one of the following ways.
 Press the USER button or RET button to which the text
memo function has been assigned during recording or
playback.
This adds text memos where respective button was
pressed.
 Pressing the USER button or RET button to which the text
memo function has been assigned when a thumbnail
screen is open, adds a text memo at the beginning of a
clip.
2
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and
select THUMBNAIL  TEXT MEMO CLIPS
from the thumbnail menu.
• The clip thumbnails with text memos attached
are displayed in the upper section of the LCD
monitor. The lower section of the LCD monitor
shows information about the text memo on the clip
selected by the pointer.
Thumbnail display
USER MAIN, USER1 and USER2 buttons
Shows the still image that the text
memo is related to.
Shows the total number of text memos
attached to the clip.
NOTE
One clip can have up to 100 text and voice memos in
combination. Note that the unit is not capable of adding or
showing voice memos.
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
3
Move the pointer over the clip that contains the
desired text memo to playback and press the
SET button.
• The pointer moves to the lower part of the LCD
monitor.
The pointer moves down.
116
4
With the pointer located in the lower part, move
the pointer to the desired text memo number
using the cursor right and left buttons (p/o).
Then, press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
NOTE
• Pressing the REC button in the text memo screen will not
start recording.
• Text memo thumbnails for AVC-Intra format clips that cannot
be played back appear in gray.
1
2
2
3
3
4
Move the pointer to the desired text memo, and
then press the SET button.
• YES and NO appear to confirm deletion. Use the
cursor buttons and the SET button to select YES.
The text memo is deleted.
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button to select
OPERATION  COPY.
Use the cursor buttons and the SET button to
select the slot to copy to and select YES.
• Copying starts.
• The portion between the selected text memo and
the next one is copied. If no text memo is found
after the selected memo, then the remainder of the
clip after the selected text memo is copied.
• If multiple text memos are selected, the selected
sections are copied.
• When the clip is being copied, the unit indicates
the progress of the copy process and cancellation
status. To discontinue the copy process, press the
SET button. Then, a YES/NO confirmation screen
is displayed. Use the cursor buttons and SET
button to select YES.
Select the desired text memo by carrying out
steps 1-3 for [Playing back a clip at the position
where a text memo is recorded] (page 116).
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button to select
OPERATION  DELETE from the thumbnail
menu.
Move the pointer to the desired text memo, and
then press the SET button.
• You can select more than one text memo.
Deleting a text memo
1
Select a desired text memo in a clip by carrying
out steps 1-3 for [Playing back a clip at the
position where a text memo is recorded]
(page 116).
NOTE
In clip division and copying using the text memo function, the
area copied may be automatically modified depending on the
recording format of the clip.
Deleting Clips
1
2
3
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer to
the clip to be deleted and press the SET button
to select the clip.
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and
select OPERATION  DELETE from the
thumbnail menu.
117
Chapter 6 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails
• Playback will start from the time code position of
the text memo where the pointer is located.
If the STOP button is pressed during playback
or playback finishes at the end of the clip, the
thumbnail screen appears again with the pointer
located on the text memo where playback started.
• Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button to select
EXIT or press the EXIT button to return the pointer
to the upper part of the thumbnail screen.
Using a text memo to break a clip and
copy the necessary portion
4
The following screen appears. Use the cursor
buttons and the SET button to select YES.
Reconnection of Incomplete Clips
Incomplete clips may be generated when clips recorded
on multiple P2 cards (connected clips) are separately
copied to different cards. The reconnection function
generates one clip (the original, connected clip) from
incomplete clips.
1
Chapter 6 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails
2
• The clip is deleted. All selected clips (in blue
frames) are deleted by this operation.
NOTE
To interrupt deleting, press the SHIFT and EXIT buttons or
the SET button to cancel the operation.
Partially deleted clips cannot be restored by canceling.
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
Use the cursor and SET button to select
incomplete clips to reconnect.
• Usually, thumbnails of incomplete clips (clips with
marker) are displayed in line.
3
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and
select OPERATION  RE-CONNECTION from
the thumbnail menu.
• When a confirmation screen asks you to confirm
that you want to reconnect the clip, use a cursor
button and the SET button to select YES if you
want to reconnect the clip.
Restoring Clips
Restores clips that are defective as a result of sudden
powering-down during recording, or removal of the P2 card
being accessed.
NOTE
NOTE
Clips that are connected as a group must be grouped together
or they will be displayed as incomplete clips.
Only those clips with yellow defective clip indicators can be
restored. Delete the clips with red defective clip indicators. If
the clip cannot be deleted, format the P2 card.
During restoration of the clips, however, the defective-clip
indicator may change from yellow to red, resulting in inability
to restore the clips.
1
2
3
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer over
the clip you want to restore (defective clips are
indicated by defective clip indicators).
Press the SET button to select the clip.
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button, and
select OPERATION  REPAIR CLIP from the
thumbnail menu.
• When a confirmation screen asks you to confirm
that you want to repair the clip, use a cursor button
and the SET button to select YES if you want to
restore the clip.
118
Copying Clips
Selected clips can be copied to the P2 card in the desired
slot or SD memory card.
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer to
the desired clip and press the SET button.
NOTE
Clips cannot be copied when recordings can still be compiled
to a previous clip in one-clip recording mode (i.e., when
“1CLIP” is displayed). Close the menu and press the STOP
button for about 2 seconds to stop the clip compiling process,
and then perform the operation.
3
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and
select OPERATION  COPY from the
thumbnail menu.
• Select slot 1-2 or SD memory card as the
destination.
Setting of Clip Meta Data
Information such as the name of the person who shot the
video, the name of the reporter, the shooting location, or a
text memo can be read from the SD memory card, and can
be recorded as Clip Meta Data.
Reading the SD memory card that
contains the Clip Meta Data (metadata
upload file)
2
• When a confirmation screen asks you to confirm
that you want to copy the clip, use a cursor button
and the SET button to select YES if you want to
copy the clip.
Insert the SD memory card that contains the
Clip Meta Data (metadata upload file).
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
NOTE
Press the THUMBNAIL button while pressing DISP/
MODE CHK button when a thumbnail is displayed to
move to step 4.
3
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and
Select META DATA  LOAD from the thumbnail
menu, and press the SET button.
NOTE
• Do not turn off the power or remove a P2 card while data is
being copied. Otherwise the P2 card may fail or defective
clips may be generated. Delete any defective clips that are
generated and copy them again.
• When clips are copied to P2 cards, all the information on
the clips is copied. However, when they are copied to the SD
memory card *1, video and sound information is not copied,
only thumbnails, clip metadata, icons, voice memo, text
memo, proxy, and real-time metadata.
• When there is insufficient recording capacity on the
destination, the message “LACK OF REC CAPACITY!” is
displayed, and copying will not proceed. When clips selected
for copying contain defective clips, the message “CANNOT
COPY” appears and copying will not proceed. If the selected
clips include clips already on the destination P2 card,
copying will not proceed.
• To interrupt copying, press the SHIFT and EXIT buttons or
the SET button. The clip that was being copied is deleted at
the destination.
• When identical clips exist on the destination card, the
“OVERWRITE?” is displayed. Select “YES” or “NO”.
*1 R
egarding SD memory cards to be used, see [SD memory
card precautions] (page 24).
4
Names of metadata upload files stored on
the SD memory card are displayed *1. Select
the desired files using the cursor buttons, and
choose YES.
• Uploading starts.
• Uploaded metadata is retained even if the power
is turned off.
• For more information on confirmation of uploaded
data, see [Checking and modifying read
metadata] (page 120).
*1 Press the cursor button (o) to display the full
name of the file, up to 100 characters, at the
cursor position. Press the cursor button (p) to
return to the previous location.
119
Chapter 6 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails
1
Clip Meta Data items
Clip Meta Data includes the following items: Underlined
items can be set by reading the metadata upload file on
the SD memory card. Other items are set automatically
during shooting. Using the latest update version of P2
Viewer, metadata upload files can be written to SD memory
cards using a PC. Download the latest update version of P2
Viewer from the support desk at the following website, and
install it on your PC.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
Regarding SD memory cards to be used, see [SD memory
card precautions] (page 24).
Chapter 6 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails
NOTE
Files edited using software other than P2 Viewer are displayed
as “UNKNOWN DATA!”, and may not be read.
GLOBAL CLIP ID:
Displays the global clip ID, which indicates the
shooting status of the clip.
USER CLIP NAME:
Displays the clip name specified by the user.*1
VIDEO: Displays [FRAME RATE] (frame rate of the clip),
[PULL DOWN], and [ASPECT RATIO].
AUDIO: [SAMPLING RATE] (sampling frequency of
recorded sound) and [BITS PER SAMPLE]
(digitized bit[s] of recorded sound).
ACCESS:Displays [CREATOR] (person who recorded the
clip), [CREATION DATE] (date when the clip was
recorded), [LAST UPDATE DATE] (date of the
latest update of the clip), and [LAST UPDATE
PERSON] (person who made the latest update of
the clip).
DEVICE: Displays [MANUFACTURER] (name of the
device manufacturer), [SERIAL NO.] (serial
number of the device) and [MODEL NAME]
(model name of the device).
SHOOT *2:Displays [SHOOTER] (name of the person who
shot the video), [START DATE] (start date of
shooting), [END DATE] (end date of shooting),
and [LOCATION] ALTITUDE/LONGITUDE/
LATITUDE/SOURCE/PLACE NAME (altitude,
longitude, latitude, and source of the information
and name of the location).
SCENARIO:
Displays [PROGRAM NAME], [SCENE NO.], and
[TAKE NO.].
NEWS: Displays [REPORTER] (name of the reporter),
[PURPOSE] (purpose of shooting), and
[OBJECT] (object of shooting).
MEMO*3: Displays [NO.] (the number of the text memo),
[OFFSET] (location of the frame with added text
memo in relation to the beginning of the clip),
[PERSON] (person who recorded the text memo
added to the clip), and [TEXT] (contents of the
text memo).
120
THUMBNAIL:
Displays the location of the frame (frame offset)
and the size (height and width) of the image
selected as the thumbnail image.
*1 The USER CLIP NAME recording method is selectable.
For details, refer to [Selecting the USER CLIP NAME
recording method] (page 121).
*2 During recording, the camera does not automatically set
altitude, latitude and longitude of the shoot.
Such data can be set in the property of a recorded clip.
*3 Be sure to enter [TEXT] when entering MEMO. It is not
possible to record only [PERSON] or [OFFSET].
NOTE
This unit only displays printable ASCII characters.
Checking and modifying read metadata
The unit allows you to check details of metadata read from
SD memory cards.
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button to select
META DATA  PROPERTY from the thumbnail
menu.
• Then the screen shown below appears.
3
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer to
the item to confirm and press the SET button.
• Use this function to check loaded metadata
settings.
Selecting the USER CLIP NAME recording
method
TYPE2
4
While viewing metadata settings, use the cursor
buttons to move the pointer to the desired
option. Then, press the SET button.
• A soft keyboard screen is displayed, allowing you
to modify the setting.
If clip metadata has been
read in
If no clip metadata has been
read in or if the setting for
recording clip metadata has
been turned off
USER CLIP NAME to be
recorded
Uploaded data + COUNT
value*1
Same as CLIP NAME
*1 T
he COUNT value is indicated as a four-digit number.
The COUNT value is incremented each time a new clip
is captured if clip metadata has been read in and TYPE2
has been selected as the recording method.
The COUNT value can be reset using the following
procedure.
Select META DATA  PROPERTY from the thumbnail
menu, then select USER CLIP NAME to display the
menu shown below. Select “COUNT RESET” with the
cursor and press the SET button to reset the COUNT
value to 1.
To set whether or not the uploaded
metadata is recorded
Set “ON”/“OFF” in META DATA  RECORD from the
thumbnail menu. The factory setting is “OFF”.
NOTE
When an 8 GB or larger capacity P2 is used and the recording
session exceeds the prescribed duration (DVCPRO HD and
the AVC-Intra100: about 5 minutes; AVC-Intra50: about 10
minutes) or spans more than one P2 card, the recording will
automatically be split into separate clips. At this time, each clip
will be provided with its own COUNT value.
121
Chapter 6 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails
Select META DATA  USER CLIP NAME from the thumbnail
menu to select the recording method. Two options are
available: TYPE1 and TYPE2.
TYPE1(Factory defaults)
USER CLIP NAME to be
recorded
If clip metadata has been
Uploaded data
read in
If no clip metadata has been
read in or if the setting for
Same as GLOBAL CLIP ID
recording clip metadata has
(UMID data)
been turned off
Example of recording (DVCPRO HD) a clip on one P2 card:
Recording start
Recording pause
Recording duration = Approx.7 min
Clip 1
COUNT value
= 0001
Clip 2 COUNT value
= 0002
Approx. 5 min
Approx. 2 min
Example of recording a clip on two P2 cards:
Recording start
Recording pause
Chapter 6 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails
Clip 1
COUNT value
= 0003
Clip 2 COUNT value
= 0004
1st card
2nd card
If the clip thumbnails are displayed as shown in the
example above or their properties are indicated using a P2
device, the thumbnail and COUNT value of clip 1 will be
displayed.
Clearing uploaded metadata
Select META DATA  INITIALIZE from the thumbnail
menu, and press the SET button. Select YES when the
confirmation screen is displayed.
122
Setting of Proxy (optional)
Installing the video encoder card (AJ-YAX800G, optional
accessory) in P2 card slot 2 makes it possible to set up the
proxy recording function.
The video encoder card is not recognized when inserted if
the power for the unit is turned on. Insert the video encoder
card after turning off the power for the unit.
Select OPERATION  DEVICE SETUP  PROXY from the
thumbnail menu to specify the setting.
For details on how to install and set up the video encoder
card, refer to the User’s Guide of the video encoder card.
Formatting a P2 Card
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and
select OPERATION  FORMAT from the
thumbnail menu.
• When “PROXY CARD ERROR” is indicated in the viewfinder,
either check the video encoder card or set the unit so that
proxy recording is not performed.
3
The following screen appears. Use the cursor
buttons and the SET button to select YES.
• The selected P2 card is formatted.
NOTE
Check that no important data remains on a card before
formatting since data erased by formatting cannot be
recovered.
123
Chapter 6 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails
• When the screen shown below appears, select the
slot number of the P2 card you want to format and
press the SET button.
• Select EXIT if formatting is not required.
NOTE
• The proxy function cannot be set when recordings can still
be compiled to a previous clip in one-clip recording mode
(i.e., when “1CLIP” is displayed). Close the menu and
press the STOP button for about 2 seconds to stop the clip
compiling process, and then perform the operation.
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
Formatting SD memory cards
SD memory cards can also be formatted from the
thumbnail screen. With an SD memory card inserted into
the unit, perform the following operation:
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
Chapter 6 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and
select OPERATION  FORMAT from the
thumbnail menu.
• Select “SD CARD” and press the SET button when
the screen shown below appears.
• Select “EXIT” if formatting is not required.
3
Setting the Thumbnail Display
Mode
The thumbnail display mode can be customized to suit
your preferences.
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and
select THUMBNAIL  SETUP from the
thumbnail menu.
• The following screen appears.
INDICATOR:
Select which indicators you want to show on
thumbnails and which you want to hide.
The following screen appears. Use the cursor
buttons and the SET button to select YES.
• ALL HIDE:
ON:
No indicators are displayed.
OFF:
Indication/No indication will be set
depending on the following menu.
The factory settings are as follows.
• MARKER:
Switches the shot mark marker between
indication and no indication (ON/OFF). The
factory setting is ON (indication).
• TEXT MEMO:
Switches the text memo marker between
indication and no indication (ON/OFF). The
factory setting is ON (indication).
• The SD memory card is formatted.
NOTE
• You can also use the menu option SD CARD FORMAT in the
CARD FUNCTIONS screen to format SD memory cards.
For details, refer to [Formatting, Writing and Reading an SD
memory card] (page 90).
• Check that no important data remains on a card before
formatting since data erased by formatting cannot be
recovered.
124
• WIDE:
Switches the wide marker between indication
and no indication (ON/OFF). The factory
setting is ON (indication).
• PROXY:
Switches the proxy marker between
indication and no indication (ON/OFF). The
factory setting is ON (indication).
DATA DISPLAY:
The time display field of the clip offers a choice
of Time Code (TC), User Bits (UB), Shooting
Time (TIME), Shooting Date (DATE), Shooting
Date and Time (DATE/TIME) or USER CLIP
NAME. The factory setting is Time Code.
DATE FORMAT:
You can specify the display order for the
shooting date as either Year/Month/Day (Y-MD), Month/Day/Year (M-D-Y) or Day/Month/ Year
(D-M-Y).
The factory setting is Month/Day/Year.
This setting is reflected in the recording date
shown in the clip property and the shooting date
shown when DATE is selected under the item
DATA DISPLAY.
PLAYBACK RESUME:
Selecting a position to restart playback after
stopping playback on the thumbnails screen
using the STOP button.
ON:
Playback starts from the stop position.
OFF:
Playback starts from the beginning of
the clip indicated by the pointer.
Note that if the pointer is moved after stopping
playback, the playback will restart from the
beginning of the clip indicated by the pointer
regardless of this setting. Also, attempting to
play back from the end of all the available clips
will cause the screen to flash momentarily,
indicating that the there are no more clips which
can be played back.
THUMBNAIL INIT:
Returns the above thumbnail display settings
to their factory default values. Move the cursor
to this option, and press the SET button. Select
YES in the confirmation screen that appears.
EXIT:
Returns to the previous menu.
Properties display clip properties and P2 card status.
It is possible to edit and rewrite recorded clip metadata
while clip properties are displayed.
Clip Property
From the thumbnail menu, select PROPERTY  CLIP
PROPERTY. The following screen appears.
1
2
3
4
5
1 Clip Number
2 Thumbnail
3 Clip Information
Indicates the indicators added to the clip and the
number of text and voice memos added to the clip.
The
mark appears if the clip is recorded on a writeprotected P2 card.
NOTE
The unit is not capable of recording or playing back voice
memos.
4 Clip Information
Displays detailed information about the clip.
CLIP NAME:
Display clip names.
START TC:
The time code value at the start of the recording.
START UB:
The user bit value at the start of the recording.
DATE:
The date of the recording.
TIME:
The time at the start of the recording.
DURATION:
The time length of the clip.
V_FORMAT:
The recording format for the clip.
FRAME RATE:
The frame rate for the playback.
125
Chapter 6 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails
THUMBNAIL SIZE:
For the size of thumbnails displayed on one
screen, either LARGE (3 X 2 thumbnails
displayed) or NORMAL (4 X 3 thumbnails
displayed) can be selected. The factory default
value is NORMAL.
Properties
REC RATE:
The recording frame rate is displayed. (Only
displayed for clips recorded using native recording
with the VFR function.)
5 Clip Meta Data
Displays more detailed data about the clip. Use the
cursor buttons to move the pointer, and press the
SET button to check the detailed content. For more
information on displayed metadata, see [Setting of Clip
Meta Data] (page 119).
Modification of recorded clip metadata
Chapter 6 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails
1
2
4
Press OK on the keyboard to write the modified
metadata on the clip and return to the metadata
window.
NOTE
• LOCATION (recording location data) data for a SHOOT
cannot be deleted independently. Thus by setting ALTITUDE
to empty will also delete the LONGITUDE and LATITUDE
settings.
• The metadata for a clip with the ! incomplete clip indicator
cannot be modified. Metadata on clips recorded on multiple
P2 cards must be modified when all P2 cards that contain the
data are inserted.
• Any MEMO with 101 characters or more cannot be modified.
Display the window for detailed clip metadata
that you intend to modify in the clip properties
window.
P2 Card Status Display
Place the cursor on the item to be modified
using the cursor button.
Select PROPERTY  CARD STATUS from the thumbnail
menu to set the desired indication mode (remaining free
space or used memory capacity) for the P2 card status
display.
• The metadata that can be modified are shown like
[CREATOR] in the following figure.
 P2 Card Status Display Settings
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
• The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD
monitor.
Press the THUMBNAIL MENU button and
select PROPERTY  PROPERTY SETUP 
P2 CARD CAP from the thumbnail menu.
• The following screen appears. Select the P2 card
status display settings from the P2 CARD CAP
menu option.
3
Press the SET button.
• The input window (soft keyboard) for modifying
metadata is displayed.
• Use the keyboard to modify the metadata.
REMAIN:
Show remaining free space on the P2 card as
the P2 card status display. (Factory setting)
USED:
Show used memory capacity on the P2 card as
the P2 card status display.
Use the keyboard operations described in
[Checking and modifying read metadata]
(page 120).
126
 Contents of P2 Card Status Display
Settings
DIR ENTRY NG CARD:
The directory structure on the P2 card is not
supported.
For details on P2 card status indications, refer to [2. P2
Card Status (remaining free space)].
From the thumbnail menu, select PROPERTY  CARD
STATUS. The following screen appears.
When “REMAIN” is selected:
1
When “USED” is selected:
2
1
2
3
3
5
4
4
1 Write-protect Mark
The mark appears if the P2 card is write-protected.
2 P2 Card Status (remaining free space)
The remaining memory capacity of the P2 card is indicated
by a bar graph and percentage. The bar graph indicator
moves to the left as the remaining free space decreases.
The following indications may appear, depending on the
card status:
FORMAT ERROR!:
An unformatted P2 card is inserted.
NOT SUPPORTED!:
An unsupported card is inserted in the camera.
NO CARD!:
No P2 cards are inserted.
Use the cursor button to place the cursor on the P2
card for data you want to access and press the SET
button to display detailed information about the P2
card to check individual information such as the serial
number and the user ID.
3 P2 Card Remaining Capacity/Total Capacity
Displays the P2 card remaining capacity and total
capacity in minutes. The total remaining capacity for
each P2 card will not show actual capacity since only
time in minutes is displayed.
Note that the indicated capacity will vary according to
the frame rate in native recording with VFR operation.
4 Total remaining free space for the slot
Displays the total remaining free space for both slots.
Please note that the remaining capacity of a writeprotected P2 card is not included in the total remaining
capacity.
5 Warning symbol
Inserting the following type of P2 cards will display the
( ) symbol.
RUN DOWN CARD:
The maximum number of overwrites on the P2 card
has been exceeded.
1 Write-protect Mark
The mark appears if the P2 card is write-protected.
2 P2 Card Status (used memory capacity)
The used memory capacity of the P2 card is indicated
by a bar graph and a percentage figure. The bar
graph indicator moves to the right as the used memory
capacity increases.
The following indications may appear, depending on
the card status:
FORMAT ERROR!:
An unformatted P2 card is inserted.
NOT SUPPORTED!:
An unsupported card is inserted in the camera.
NO CARD!:
P2 cards are not inserted.
Use the cursor button to place the cursor on the P2
card for data you want to access and press the SET
button to display detailed information about the P2
card to check individual information such as the serial
number and the user ID.
3 P2 Card used memory capacity/Total Capacity
Displays the used memory capacity on a P2 card and
the total capacity, in minutes. Because fractions are
truncated, the figure shown for used memory capacity
on a P2 card may differ from the figure for total capacity.
The used memory capacity of a write-protected P2 card
is displayed as 100 %.
Note that the indicated capacity will vary according to
the frame rate in native recording with VFR operation.
4 Total used memory capacity for all slots
Displays the total used memory capacity for both slots.
5 Warning symbol
Inserting the following type of P2 cards will display the
( ) symbol.
RUN DOWN CARD:
The maximum number of overwrites on the P2 card
has been exceeded.
127
Chapter 6 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails
5
DIR ENTRY NG CARD:
The directory structure on the P2 card is not
supported.
For details on P2 card status indications, refer to [2. P2
Card Status (used memory capacity)]
SD memory card Status Display
The status display enables a confirmation of the SD
memory card formatted condition, available memory
capacity etc. From the thumbnail menu, select PROPERTY
 DEVICES  SD CARD.
If the format is compatible with SD standards, the message
Chapter 6 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails
SD STANDARD : SUPPORTED
If the format is not compatible with SD standards, the
message
SD STANDARD : NOT SUPPORTED
is displayed. If this is the case, writing or reading will
not be successful. Format the card with the unit. For
more information on formatting SD memory cards, see
[Formatting SD memory cards] (page 124).
NOTE
The indication of remaining capacity on an SD memory card
(PROXY REM) provides only a rough estimate of remaining
capacity and may differ from actual remaining capacity. SD
and SDHC memory cards with Speed Class Ratings may
indicate recording times that are significantly lower than actual
capacity, especially when used for recording a large number
of short video clips. The remaining capacity is displayed only
when proxy recording is set up to record on an SD memory
card. For details on setup procedures, refer to the User’s
Guide of the video encoder card (AJ-YAX800G, an optional
accessory).
Video Encoder Card Status Display
(optional)
Attaching the video encoder card (AJ-YAX800G, optional),
select PROPERTY  DEVICES  PROXY from the
thumbnail menu.
The slot in which the video encoder card is inserted, and
version information is displayed.
128
Chapter 7 Menu Operations
Viewfinder and LCD Menus
Using the menus
2
Use the setup menus to change the settings to suit the
scenes you are shooting or what you are recording.
• If the thumbnail menu is displayed, press the
THUMBNAIL button to clear the display.
• The menu items indicated in the blue characters cannot
be used.
Use the JOG dial button (or the Up and Down
cursor buttons) to highlight the function you
want to change.
MAIN MENU
1.SCENE FINE
2.SYSTEM SETUP
3.SW MODE
4.RECORDING SETUP
5.AUDIO SETUP
6.OUTPUT SEL
7.DISPLAY SETUP
8.BATTERY SETUP
a
3
Press the JOG dial button to display the items.
SW MODE
LOW GAIN
MID GAIN
HIGH GAIN
ATW
ATW TYPE
W.BAL.PRESET
USER MAIN
USER1
0dB
6dB
12dB
OFF
1
3.2K
Y GET
BACK LIGHT
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
b
a JOG dial button
Use the JOG dial button to highlight the item
you want to change.
SW MODE
b MENU button
1
4
Press the MENU button to end any mode other
than recording.
• Hold down the MENU button for about 1 second.
• The function screen appears in the viewfinder and
on the LCD screen.
MAIN MENU
LOW GAIN
MID GAIN
HIGH GAIN
ATW
ATW TYPE
W.BAL.PRESET
USER MAIN
USER1
0dB
6dB
12dB
OFF
1
3.2K
Y GET
BACK LIGHT
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
1.SCENE FINE
2.SYSTEM SETUP
3.SW MODE
4.RECORDING SETUP
5.AUDIO SETUP
6.OUTPUT SEL
7.DISPLAY SETUP
8.BATTERY SETUP
PUSH MENU TO EXIT
129
Chapter 7 Menu Operations
PUSH MENU TO EXIT
5
Use the JOG dial button to change the setting
value.
SW MODE
LOW GAIN
MID GAIN
HIGH GAIN
ATW
ATW TYPE
W.BAL.PRESET
USER MAIN
USER1
0dB
6dB
12dB
OFF
1
3.2K
5.6K
BACK LIGHT
PUSH MENU TO RETURN
Chapter 7 Menu Operations
6
To change other settings, repeat steps 4 and 5.
• When you finish, press the MENU button to return
to the function screen.
7
To change other functions, repeat steps 2 to 5.
• To exit the function screen and return to the normal
screen, press the MENU button again.
NOTE
Direct close function
When the MENU button is pressed and held down after making
a menu setting, the setting menu screen closes without first
returning to the previous setting menu.

To quickly change settings (MASTER PED and H PHASE
only)
• Fast UP
Hold down the JOG dial button while turning it upwards
and maintain this position.
• Fast DOWN
Hold down the JOG dial button while turning it downwards
and maintain this position.
Initializing the menu settings
The menu settings contain both the user file settings and
the scene file settings. You can initialize them separately.
To initialize scene files (i.e. all the
settings other than the scene file
settings)
Select INITIAL in USER FILE of the OTHER FUNCTIONS
screen. The current menu settings of user file will return to
the factory settings.
To initialize the scene file
From the 6 scene files, select the one you want to initialize
with the SCENE FILE dial. Then in the SCENE FILE screen,
LOAD/SAVE/INIT, select INITIAL.
The settings for only the selected scene file are returned to
the factory settings.
• This does not affect the other scene files.
130
Initializing user files and scene files
simultaneously
You can return the user files and the six scene files to their
factory defaults by selecting YES in the menu option MENU
INIT in the OTHER FUNCTIONS screen.
Setup menu structure
MAIN MENU
SCENE FILE
(page 133)
SYSTEM SETUP
(page 135)
SYSTEM MODE
REC SIGNAL
REC FORMAT
CAMERA MODE
SCAN REVERSE
ASPECT CONV
SETUP
PC MODE SELECT
PC MODE
LOW GAIN
MID GAIN
HIGH GAIN
ATW
ATW TYPE
W.BAL.PRESET
USER MAIN
USER1
USER2
RET SW
WFM
AUTO KNEE SW
RECORDING SETUP
(page 138)
REC FUNCTION
ONE SHOT TIME
INTERVAL TIME
START DELAY
PREREC MODE
TC MODE
UB MODE
ONE CLIP REC
START TEXT MEMO
AUDIO SETUP
(page 140)
OUTPUT SEL
(page 142)
SDI SELECT
SDI META DATA
SDI EDH
DOWNCON MODE
VIDEO OUT CHAR
VIDEO OUT ZEBRA
TC OUT
TC VIDEO SYNCRO
DISPLAY SETUP
(page 143)
EVF PEAK LEVEL
EVF PEAK FREQ
EVF SETTING
EVF B. LIGHT
EVF COLOR
ZEBRA1 DETECT
ZEBRA2 DETECT
ZEBRA2
MARKER
SAFETY ZONE
FOCUS BAR
LCD SETTING
SELF SHOOT
LCD BACKLIGHT
SYNC SCAN DISP
DATE/TIME
LEVEL METER
ZOOM
CARD/BATT
P2CARD REMAIN
OTHER DISPLAY
MENU BACK
REC COUNTER
BATTERY SETUP
(page 144)
Chapter 7 Menu Operations
SW MODE
(page 137)
LOAD/SAVE/INIT
VFR
FRAME RATE
(SYNCHRO SCAN)
DETAIL LEVEL
V DETAIL LEVEL
DETAIL CORING
CHROMA LEVEL
CHROMA PHASE
COLOR TEMP Ach
COLOR TEMP Bch
MASTER PED
A.IRIS LEVEL
DRS EFFECT
GAMMA
KNEE
MATRIX
SKIN TONE DTL
V DETAIL FREQ
NAME EDIT
FRONT VR CH1
FRONT VR CH2
MIC LOWCUT CH1
MIC LOWCUT CH2
MIC LOWCUT CH3
MIC LOWCUT CH4
LIMITER CH1
LIMITER CH2
AUTO LEVEL CH3
AUTO LEVEL CH4
25M REC CH SEL
TEST TONE
F.MIC POWER
R.MIC POWER
MONITOR SELECT
F.MIC LEVEL
R.MIC CH1 LEVEL
R.MIC CH2 LEVEL
HEADROOM
WIRELESS WARN
WIRELESS TYPE
1394 AUDIO OUT
EXT DC IN SEL
BATTERY SELECT
BATTERY MODE
PROPAC14 NEAR
TRIMPAC14 NEAR
HYTRON50 NEAR
HYTRON140 NEAR
DIONIC90 NEAR
DIONIC160 NEAR
NP-L7 NEAR
ENDURA7 NEAR
ENDURA10 NEAR
ENDURA-D NEAR
PAG L95 NEAR
BP-GL65/95 NEAR
NiCd14 NEAR
NiCd14 END
TYPE A FULL
TYPE A NEAR
TYPE A END
TYPE B FULL
TYPE B NEAR
TYPE B END
NEAR END CANCEL
131
CARD FUNCTIONS
(page 146)
SCENE FILE
USER FILE
SD CARD FORMAT
LENS SETUP
(page 146)
OTHER FUNCTIONS
(page 147)
USER FILE
1394 CONTOROL
1394 CMD SEL
ACCESS LED
ALARM
CLOCK SETTING
TIME ZONE
GL PHASE
H PHASE
SEEK SELECT
MENU INIT
Chapter 7 Menu Operations
DIAGNOSTIC
(page 148)
OPTION MENU*1
(page 148)
SHADING SELECT
SHADING (USER)
CAC
CAC PROPRETY
CAC CARD READ
CAC FILE DELETE
CAC FILE INIT
IRIS ADJUST
VERSION
MODEL NAME
SERIAL NO.
OPERATION
1394 STATUS
1394 CONFIG
*1 To open the OPTION MENU, hold down the DISP/MODE CHK button and press the MENU button.
132
Setup menu list
SCENE FILE screen
Item
LOAD/SAVE/INIT
VFR
Notes
•A
change in scene files affects only
the scene file at the current scene dial
position.
• Not available when compiling to a clip
in one-clip recording mode.
• Available only in 720P system mode.
(This message does not appear in
modes other than 720P.)
• This setting cannot be made when
REC SIGNAL is 1394.
FRAME RATE
Adjusts the frame rate and exposure time at 720P
• Available only in 720P system mode
when VFR is on.
and when VFR is set to ON.
(When SYSTEM MODE is set to 720-59.94P)
(This message does not appear in
12, 15, 18, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 30, 32, 34,
modes other than 720P.)
• This setting cannot be made when
36, 40, 44, 48, 54, 60 FRAME
(When SYSTEM MODE is set to 720-50P)
REC SIGNAL is 1394.
• A change to 24 fps may cause the
12, 15, 18, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 30, 32,
34, 37, 42, 45, 48, 50 FRAME
screen to flicker momentarily.
(SYNCHRO SCAN)
Displays synchro scan shutter speeds to enable the
• Displayed in blue when not set to
operator to synchronize the camera to computer
synchro scan mode and when the
monitors.
SYNCHRO SCAN switch settings are
• This function only displays the shutter speeds. Use
not available.
the SYNCHRO SCAN switch to set a shutter speed. • When SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080• Set values (displayed values) are assigned to the
50i, 720-50i or 576-50i, performing the
current scene file and manipulated using the LOAD,
INITIAL option of the scene files will
SAVE and INIT functions.
set the default value to 1/50.0.
For details, refer to [Placing the Camera-recorder in
SYNCHRO SCAN Mode] (page 59).
1/60.0
DETAIL LEVEL
Adjusts the level of image outline correction (in
horizontal and vertical directions).
–7 ... 0 *1... +7
V DETAIL LEVEL
Adjusts the level of correction in vertical direction.
–7 ... 0 *1 ... +7
DETAIL CORING
Adjusts the level of noise reduction of the detail signal.
–7 ... +5 *1 ... +7
•A
djust towards – for a clearer image. Noise
increases slightly.
• Adjust towards + for less noise.
CHROMA LEVEL
Adjusts the chroma level.
–7 ... 0 *1 ... +7
CHROMA PHASE
Makes fine adjustments to the chroma phase.
–7 ... 0 *1 ... +7
COLOR TEMP Ach
Makes fine adjustments to the color temperature (after
Ach white balance adjustment).
–7 ... 0 *1 ... +7
COLOR TEMP Bch
Makes fine adjustments to the color temperature (after
Bch white balance adjustment).
–7 ... 0 *1 ... +7
*1 The factory default when the SCENE FILE dial is set to F1.
____ indicates the factory setting
133
Chapter 7 Menu Operations
Setting
Loads, saves and initializes settings of the scene file
assigned to the current scene dial position (one F1
– F6 scene file).
LOAD: Loads data stored in camera memory.
SAVE: Saves current values in camera memory.
INITIAL: Returns settings to their factory defaults.
Enables or disables variable frame rate (VFR) mode at
720P.
ON: VFR operation
OFF: VFR off
Item
MASTER PED
Setting
Adjusts the black master pedestal that serves as the
video reference.
–100 ... +15 *1 ... +100
Notes
• Hold down the JOG dial button and
turn it downwards or upwards and
maintain this position to quickly
change values.
• When a remote control unit (AJRC10G) or extension control unit (AGEC4G) is connected, use the M-PED
control on the remote control unit or
extension control unit to adjust.
A. IRIS LEVEL
Chapter 7 Menu Operations
Sets the AUTO IRIS target value.
–10 ... 0 *1 ... +10
DRS EFFECT
Sets the compression level in high-brightness areas of • Not available at 1080/30P or 1080/24P
the DRS (dynamic range stretcher) function.
(1080/25P) mode.
This function compresses the video signal level to
extend the dynamic range making it possible to
correctly render highlight areas without overexposure
and loss of detail that would otherwise occur.
1, 2, 3 *1
• Higher numbers mean a higher compression level of
high-brightness areas and more noise in dark areas.
GAMMA
Selects the gamma curve.
• A change in settings during DRS
HD NORM *1: Gamma setting for HD recording.
operation will not change video quality.
LOW: Applies a gently rising gamma curve to lowbrightness areas for a balanced look.
SD NORM: Normal video setting inherited from the
DVX100 series.
HIGH: Applies a steep gamma curve to low brightness
areas to expand the tonality of dark areas for video
with greater brightness. Contrast softens as a result.
B.PRESS: Produces sharper contrast than LOW.
CINE-LIKE D: Applies a gamma curve to produce
video with a cine-like feel.
CINE-LIKE V: Applies a gamma curve to produce
high-contrast video with a cine-like feel.
• A lens aperture set lower than normal video level
(approx. 1/2) is recommended when using cine-like
gamma to enjoy the full benefit of the function.
• A change in settings during DRS
KNEE
Sets the compression level (knee point) of the high
brightness video signals received through the MOS
operation will not change video quality.
sensor to avoid overexposure.
HIGH: High setting (compression starts at approx.
100 %)
MID: Medium setting (compression starts at approx.
90 %)
LOW *1: Low setting (compression starts at approx.
80 %)
MATRIX
Selects the MATRIX table to reproduce color during
shooting.
NORM1 *1: Ensures proper color rendition when
shooting out in the open or under halogen lighting.
NORM2: Produces more vivid colors than NORM1.
FLUO: Ensures proper color rendition when shooting
indoors under fluorescent lighting.
CINE-LIKE: Produces a tone similar to movie film. .
SKIN TONE DTL
Turns the skin tone detail on or off.
When on, reduces detail to hide any skin blemishes.
ON, OFF *1
*1 The factory default when the SCENE FILE dial is set to F1.
____ indicates the factory setting
134
Item
V DETAIL FREQ
NAME EDIT
Setting
Sets vertical detail.
THIN: Produces fine detail.
MID: Produces less detail and wider edging.
THICK: Produces even less detail and the widest
edging effect.
• Progressive recording made at THIN or MID cause
horizontal lines or oblique lines that are almost
horizontal to flicker when viewed on a normal monitor
TV (60i (50i): Interlace). THIN and MID settings will
produce higher resolution video than THICK when
shooting progressive footage that will later be edited.
Edits the name of scene files selected using the
SCENE FILE dial.
Notes
Item
SYSTEM MODE
REC SIGNAL
REC FORMAT
Setting
Specifies the signal format used by this camera.
1080-59.94i, 1080-50i, 720-59.94P, 720-50P,
480-59.94i, 576-50i
• When a setting is changed, the message “TURN
POWER OFF” appears. Then turn the power off and
turn it back on again.
Selects the input signal in the DVCPRO format.
CAMERA: Records the camera recording signal.
1394: Records signals input to the DVCPRO/DV
connector.
• This function is always set to CAMERA when the
power is turned on.
Selects the recording codec as well as shooting and
recording modes.
(when SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080-59.94i)
AVC-I100/60i, AVC-I100/30PN,
AVC-I100/24PN: Uses the AVC-I 100 codec for
recording. Shooting and recording at 60i, 30PN (native
recording) and 24PN (native recording).
AVC-I 50/60i, AVC-I 50/30PN,
AVC-I 50/24PN: Uses the AVC-I 50 codec for
recording. Shooting and recording at 60i, 30PN (native
recording) and 24PN (native recording).
DVCPROHD/60i: Uses the DVCPRO HD codec
for recording. Use CAMERA MODE options to set
shooting mode. Recording is locked to 60i.
(When SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080-50i)
AVC-I100/50i, AVC-I100/25PN:
Uses the AVC-I 100 codec for recording. Shooting and
recording at 50i, 25PN (native recording).
AVC-I50/50i, AVC-I50/25PN:
Uses the AVC-I 50 codec for recording. Shooting and
recording at 50i, 25PN.
DVCPROHD/50i:
Uses the DVCPRO HD codec for recording. Use
CAMERA MODE options to set shooting mode.
Recording is locked to 50i.
(Continued on the next page)
Notes
•N
ot available in USB DEVICE mode.
•N
ot available when compiling to a clip
in one-clip recording mode.
• The default setting for the AGHPX371E is 1080-50i.
•N
ot available when the menu option
REC FORMAT is set to AVC-Intra or
DVCPRO HD during native recording.
• Not available when compiling to a clip
in one-clip recording mode.
• Not available when 1080i or 720P
is set in SYSTEM MODE and REC
SIGNAL is 1394.
• Not available in USB DEVICE mode.
• Not available when compiling to a clip
in one-clip recording mode.
____ indicates the factory setting
135
Chapter 7 Menu Operations
SYSTEM SETUP screen
Item
REC FORMAT
Chapter 7 Menu Operations
CAMERA MODE
SCAN REVERSE
ASPECT CONV
SETUP
Setting
(Continued from the previous page)
(when SYSTEM MODE is 720-59.94P)
AVC-I100/60P, AVC-I100/30PN,
AVC-I100/24PN: Uses the AVC-I 100 codec for
recording. Shooting and recording at 60i, 30PN (native
recording) and 24PN (native recording).
AVC-I 50/60P, AVC-I 50/30PN, AVC-I 50/24PN:
Uses the AVC-I 50 codec for recording. Shooting and
recording at 60i, 30PN (native recording) and 24PN
(native recording).
DVCPRO HD/60P, DVCPRO HD/30PN,
DVCPRO HD/24PN: Uses the DVCPRO HD codec
for recording. Shooting and recording at 60P, 30PN
(native recording) and 24PN (native recording).
(When SYSTEM MODE is set to 720-50P)
AVC-I100/50P, AVC-I100/25PN:
Uses the AVC-I 100 codec for recording. Shooting and
recording at 50i, 25PN (native recording).
AVC-I50/50P, AVC-I50/25PN:
Uses the AVC-I 50 codec for recording. Shooting and
recording at 50i, 25PN (native recording).
DVCPROHD/50P, DVCPROHD/25PN
Uses the DVCPRO HD codec for recording. Shooting
and recording at 50i, 25PN (native recording).
(when SYSTEM MODE is 480-59.94i)
DVCPRO50/60i, DVCPRO/60i, DV/60i: These use
DVCPRO50, DVCPRO and DV codecs, respectively.
Use CAMERA MODE options to set shooting mode.
Recording is locked at 60i.
(When SYSTEM MODE is set to 576-50i)
DVCPRO50/50i, DVCPRO/50i, DV/50i:
Uses the DVCPRO50, DVCPRO and DV codec for
recording respectively. Use CAMERA MODE options
to set shooting mode. Recording is locked at 50i.
Sets the shooting mode of the camera during
DVCPRO HD codec at 1080-59.94i (1080-50i) or
during 480-59.94i (576-50i).
(When SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080-59.94i or 48059.94i)
60i, 30P, 24P, 24PA
(When SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080-50i or 576-50i)
50i, 25P
Cancels the image inversion that occurs with film
lenses and anamorphic lenses.
ON, OFF
Selects the aspect ratio for recording at 480i (576i).
SIDE CROP: Crops the right and left edges of the
image.
LETTER BOX: Adds black bands at the top and
bottom of the image.
SQUEEZE: Compresses the image horizontally.
Selects the setup level for the 480i video signal.
0%: Setup is switched to 0 % for both VIDEO OUT
output and recording.
7.5% A: Setup is switched to 7.5 % for VIDEO OUT
output and 0 % for recording.
Notes
•N
ot available when 1080i or 720P
is set in SYSTEM MODE and REC
SIGNAL is 1394.
• Not available in USB DEVICE mode.
• Not available when compiling to a clip
in one-clip recording mode.
• Does not appear when SYSTEM
MODE is set to 720-59.94P (720-50P).
• Not available in the following
conditions.
-W
hen the REC SIGNAL option is set
to 1394.
- When SYSTEM MODE is set to 108059.94i (1080-50i) and REC FORMAT
is set to something other than
DVCPROHD/60i (50i).
- When compiling to a clip in one-clip
recording mode.
•N
ot available when SYSTEM MODE is
set to 1080-59.94i (1080-50i) or 72059.94P (720-50P).
• This item is not displayed when
SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080-50i,
720-50P, 576-50i.
____ indicates the factory setting
136
Item
PC MODE SELECT
PC MODE
SW MODE screen
Item
LOW GAIN
MID GAIN
HIGH GAIN
ATW
ATW TYPE
W.BAL.PRESET
Setting
Sets the gain value assigned to the L position of the
GAIN switch.
–3dB, 0dB, 3dB, 6dB, 9dB, 12dB
Sets the gain value assigned to the M position of the
GAIN switch.
–3dB, 0dB, 3dB, 6dB, 9dB, 12dB
Notes
Sets the gain value assigned to the H position of the
GAIN switch.
–3dB, 0dB, 3dB, 6dB, 9dB, 12dB
Allows you to assign the ATW (Auto Tracking White
• A USER button to which ATW has
Balance) function to the WHITE BAL switch. (For
been assigned cannot be used to turn
details, refer to page 56.)
ATW off when the WHITE BAL switch is
Bch: Controls the ATW function when the WHITE BAL
set to B position and this menu is set
switch is set to B position.
to Bch.
OFF: Does not assign the ATW function to the WHITE
BAL switch.
Selects type of ATW (Auto Tracking White Balance)
function operation.
1: Standard ATW operation
2: Further restricts the color of the light source range
that is tracked than setting 1.
ATW operation reduces the risk of miscalculating light
sources.
Sets the color temperature assigned to the PRST
position of the WHITE BAL switch.
3.2K, 5.6K
____ indicates the factory setting
137
Chapter 7 Menu Operations
Setting
Notes
Sets camera operating mode when PC MODE is set to • Not available when PC MODE is set
ON and an external device is connected via USB.
to ON.
USB HOST: Selects USB 2.0 for connecting an
external hard disk drive. (For details, refer to
page 150.)
USB DEVICE: Makes it possible to connect the
camera to a computer via USB 2.0 to enable use
of a P2 card as mass storage. (For details, refer to
page 149.)
Operates the camera according to mode selected
•N
ot available when compiling to a clip
using PC MODE SELECT.
in one-clip recording mode.
ON: Operates in PC MODE.
OFF: Terminates PC MODE and returns the camera to
normal operation.
• This function is always set to OFF when the power is
turned on.
Item
USER MAIN
USER1
USER2
Chapter 7 Menu Operations
RET SW
WFM
Setting
Notes
hen a remote control unit (AJSets the function assigned to the USER MAIN button. • W
REC REVIEW, SPOTLIGHT, BACKLIGHT, ATW,
RC10G) or extension control unit (AGATWLOCK, GAIN: 24 dB, Y GET, DRS, TEXT MEMO,
EC4G) is connected, the SPOTLIGHT
SLOT SEL, SHOT MARK, MAG A. LVL, PRE REC,
and BACKLIGHT functions are not
PC MODE, WFM, FBC
available.
For details, refer to [Assigning Functions to USER
buttons] (page 61).
Sets a function assigned to the USER1 button. The
functions that can be assigned to this button are the
same as for the USER MAIN button.
BACKLIGHT (factory default setting)
For details, refer to [Assigning Functions to USER
buttons] (page 61).
Sets a function assigned to the USER2 button. The
functions that can be assigned to this button are the
same as for the USER MAIN button.
TEXT MEMO (factory default setting)
For details, refer to [Assigning Functions to USER
buttons] (page 61).
Sets the function assigned to the RET button on the
lens.
REC REVIEW, TEXT MEMO, SHOT MARK, INHIBIT
• When INHIBIT is selected, the RET button function is
disabled.
Selects the waveform displayed in the LCD monitor
when the user button to which WFM has been
assigned is pressed.
WAVE: Displays a waveform.
VECTOR: Vectorscope display
WAVE/VECT: Each press of the button, switches
the settings in the following order: OFF  WAVE
AUTO KNEE SW
(waveform)  VECTOR  OFF.
Selects the function of the OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE.
•W
hen set to 1080/30P or 1080/24P
ON: Setting AUTO KNEE to ON turns on the AUTO
mode, selecting DRS produces the
KNEE function.
same effect as selecting ON.
OFF: The AUTO KNEE function is not available even
when AUTO KNEE is set to ON.
DRS: Setting AUTO KNEE to ON turns on the DRS
(Dynamic Range Stretcher) function. (For details, refer
to page 12.)
RECORDING SETUP screen
Item
REC FUNCTION
Setting
Notes
•N
ot available in the following
Sets special recording modes.
NORMAL: The special recording modes are not used. conditions.
-W
hen REC SIGNAL is set to 1394
INTERVAL: Sets interval recording.
-W
hen REC FORMAT is set to native
ONE SHOT: Sets one-shot recording.
LOOP: Sets loop recording.
recording.
- When SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080For details, refer to [Special Recording Modes]
(page 42).
59.94i or 480-59.94i; and CAMERA
• This function is always set to NORMAL when the
MODE is set to 24P or 24PA.
- When compiling to a clip in one-clip
power is turned on.
recording mode.
____ indicates the factory setting
138
Item
ONE SHOT TIME
INTERVAL TIME
START DELAY
PREREC MODE
UB MODE
ONE CLIP REC
START TEXT MEMO
Notes
•A
vailable only when REC FUNCTION
is set to ONE SHOT.
•A
vailable only when REC FUNCTION
is set to INTERVAL.
• Available only when REC FUNCTION
is set to INTERVAL or ONE SHOT.
•N
ot available in the following
conditions.
-W
hen REC SIGNAL is set to 1394
-W
hen SYSTEM MODE is set to 72059.94P (720-50P) and VFR is set to
ON.
- When REC FORMAT is set to native
recording.
- When SYSTEM MODE is set to 108059.94i or 480-59.94i; and CAMERA
MODE is set to 24P or 24PA.
- When REC FUNCTION is set to
something other than NORMAL.
Sets count correction when using the internal time
•T
his item is not displayed when
code generator.
SYSTEM MODE is set to 50 Hz.
• Not available when operating at 24P,
DF: Drop frame time code
NDF: Non drop frame time code
24PA and 24PN is set to ON. Then
For details, refer to [Setting the Time Code] (page 69). NDF is used at all times.
Sets the data recorded in the camera user bits.
USER, TIME, DATE, EXT, TCG, FRM.RATE
For details, refer to [Setting user bits] (page 67).
•N
ot available in the following
Sets one-clip recording mode.
ON, OFF
conditions.
- When REC FUNCTION is set to
For details, refer to [One-clip recording] (page 44).
something other than NORMAL.
- When REC SIGNAL is set to 1394.
- When VFR is set to ON
Sets whether to automatically add a text memo at the • Not available when REC FUNCTION is
recording start position each time you start recording.
set to something other than NORMAL.
• The text memo that is added when this
ON, OFF
is set to ON indicates the recording
start position.
For details on recording the text memo
as text information, refer to [Setting of
Clip Meta Data] (page 119).
____ indicates the factory setting
139
Chapter 7 Menu Operations
TC MODE
Setting
Sets the duration for one-shot recording.
1frm, 2frm, 4frm, 8frm, 16frm, 1s
For details, refer to [One-shot recording (ONE SHOT
REC)] (page 43).
Sets the time interval of interval recording.
2frm, 4frm, 8frm, 16frm, 1s, 2s, 5s, 10s, 30s, 1min,
5min, 10min
For details, refer to [Interval recording (INTERVAL
REC)] (page 43).
This delays the start of interval and one-shot recording
by about 1 second.
ON, OFF
Sets PRE REC.
ON, OFF
For details, refer to [Pre-recording (PRE REC)]
(page 42).
AUDIO SETUP screen
Item
FRONT VR CH1
Chapter 7 Menu Operations
Setting
Notes
Enables/disables Front Audio Level control of CH1
•W
hen the AUDIO SELECT CH1 switch
input.
is set to AUTO and auto adjustment
FRONT: Enables Front Audio Level control of
mode is active, the Front Audio Level
microphone input to CH1.
control is disabled regardless of these
W.L.: Enables Front Audio Level control of audio from
settings.
a wireless receiver input to CH1.
REAR: Enables Front Audio Level control of rear input
that is input to CH1.
ALL: Enables Front Audio Level control when front,
wireless, rear and other inputs are input to CH1.
OFF: Disables Front Audio Level control of CH1.
FRONT VR CH2
Enables/disables Front Audio Level control of CH2
• When the AUDIO SELECT CH2 switch
input.
is set to AUTO and auto adjustment
Same setting as FRONT VR CH1.
mode is active, the Front Audio Level
OFF (factory default setting)
control is disabled regardless of these
settings.
MIC LOWCUT CH1*1
Sets the CH1 microphone low-cut filter.
FRONT: Operates for the front microphone input.
W.L.: Operates for wireless receiver input.
REAR: Operates for the rear microphone input.
OFF: Turns off the filter for all inputs.
MIC LOWCUT CH2*1
Sets the CH2 microphone low-cut filter.
Same setting as MIC LOWCUT CH1.
OFF (factory default setting)
MIC LOWCUT CH3*1
Sets the CH3 microphone low-cut filter.
Same setting as MIC LOWCUT CH1.
OFF (factory default setting)
MIC LOWCUT CH4*1
Sets the CH4 microphone low-cut filter.
Same setting as MIC LOWCUT CH1.
OFF (factory default setting)
LIMITER CH1
Sets the CH1 limiter.
• When the AUDIO SELECT CH1 switch
ON, OFF
is set to AUTO and auto adjustment
mode is active, the limiter is disabled
regardless of these settings.
LIMITER CH2
Sets the CH2 limiter.
• When the AUDIO SELECT CH2 switch
ON, OFF
is set to AUTO and auto adjustment
mode is active, the limiter is disabled
regardless of these settings.
AUTO LEVEL CH3
Selects the method for setting CH3 level.
ON: Engages the auto adjustment mode. The limiter is
not available.
OFF: Locks the level. The limiter operates on all inputs
except the line input of the rear.
AUTO LEVEL CH4
Selects the method for setting CH4 level.
Same setting as AUTO LEVEL CH3.
ON (factory default setting)
*1 The frequency characteristics for a microphone low-cut filter is 200 Hz – 10 kHz.
____ indicates the factory setting
140
Setting
Selects the audio channels to be recorded in the
DVCPRO and DV formats.
2CH: Only recorded on CH1 and CH2.
4CH: Records on all four channels.
TEST TONE
Selects the test signal.
NORMAL: Outputs test tones to channels 1, 2, 3 and
4 when the OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE selector switch is
set to BARS and the AUDIO IN switch CH1 is set to
FRONT.
ALWAYS: Outputs test tones to channels 1, 2, 3 and
4 at all times when the OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE selector
switch is set to BARS.
CHSEL: Outputs test tones to channels selected by
setting the AUDIO IN switch CH1 or CH2 to FRONT
and the OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE selector switch is set to
BARS. (Test tones are not output to CH3 and CH4.)
OFF: Does not output a test tone.
Turns on and off the phantom power supply for the
front microphone.
ON, OFF
Turns on and off the phantom power supply for the
rear microphone.
ON: Turns on the phantom power supply to the
microphone when the rear LINE/MIC/+48V switch is
set to +48V.
OFF: Does not supply phantom power to the
microphone even when the rear LINE/MIC/+48V switch
is set to +48V.
Switches the output signal to AUDIO OUT, earphones
and speaker when the MONITOR SELECT switch is
set to ST.
STEREO, MIX
Selects the input level for the front microphone.
–40dB, –50dB, –60dB
Selects the input level for the rear microphone
connected to CH1.
–50dB, –60dB
Selects the input level for the rear microphone
connected to CH2.
–50dB, –60dB
Sets the headroom (standard level).
• The default setting for the AG18dB, 20dB
HPX371E is 18 dB.
Sets whether a warning should be output when
wireless receiver reception is poor.
ON, OFF
Selects wireless receiver type.
SINGLE: 1-channel receiver
DUAL: 2-channel receiver
•W
hen DUAL is selected for a 1-channel wireless
receiver, CH2 and CH4 will stay mute.
F.MIC POWER
R.MIC POWER
MONITOR SELECT
F.MIC LEVEL
R.MIC CH1 LEVEL
R.MIC CH2 LEVEL
HEADROOM
WIRELESS WARN
WIRELESS TYPE
Notes
•N
ot available in the following
conditions.
-W
hen SYSTEM MODE is 1080-59.94i
(1080-50i) or 720-59.94P (720-50P).
- When SYSTEM MODE is set to 48059.94i (576-50i) and REC FORMAT is
set to the DVCPRO50 codec.
- REC SIGNAL is set to 1394
(operation depends on 1394 input
status).
- When compiling to a clip in one-clip
recording mode.
Chapter 7 Menu Operations
Item
25M REC CH SEL
____ indicates the factory setting
141
Item
1394 AUDIO OUT
Setting
Notes
Selects audio channel output to 1394 OUT in DVCPRO • Available only when SYSTEM MODE
or DV mode.
is set to 480-59.94i (576-50i) and REC
CH1/CH2, CH3/CH4
FORMAT is set to DVCPRO or DV.
OUTPUT SEL screen
Item
SDI SELECT
Chapter 7 Menu Operations
Setting
Notes
Sets the signal format type output from the SDI OUT
•N
ot available when SYSTEM MODE is
connector.
set to 480-59.94i (576-50i). Then 480i
AUTO: Depends on SYSTEM MODE setting.
(576i) is output at all times.
1080i*1: Outputs 1080-59.94i (1080-50i) also when
SYSTEM MODE setting is 720-59.94P (720-50P).
480i (576i): Output is locked to 480-59.94i (576-50i)
regardless of SYSTEM MODE setting.
SDI METADATA
Sets metadata (UMID) superimposition onto SDI OUT.
ON: Superimposes metadata.
OFF: Does not superimpose metadata.
SDI EDH
Sets EDH superimposition when SDI OUT is an SD
signal (480i (576i)).
ON: Superimposes EDH.
OFF: Does not superimpose EDH.
• Not available when SYSTEM MODE is
DOWNCON MODE
Sets downconverter output (VIDEO OUT and 480i
(576i) SDI OUT) in HD mode (1080i, 720P).
set to 480-59.94i (576-50i).
SIDE CROP, LETTER BOX, SQUEEZE
VIDEO OUT CHAR
Specifies whether or not characters are superimposed • T
his setting is disabled when a remote
on VIDEO OUT signals.
control unit (AJ-RC10G) or extension
ON: Superimposes characters.
control unit (AG-EC4G) is connected,
OFF: Does not superimpose characters.
in which case the settings on the
remote control unit or extension control
unit have priority.
VIDEO OUT ZEBRA
Specifies whether or not zebra pattern is
superimposed on VIDEO OUT signals.
ON: Displays a zebra pattern also on images output
via the VIDEO OUT connector.
OFF: The zebra pattern is not displayed in video
output from the VIDEO OUT connector.
TC OUT
Sets the time code type output from the TC OUT
connector.
TCG: Outputs the time code generator value of the
camera at all times.
TCG/TCR: Outputs time code generator value during
camera recording and outputs the played back time
code during video playback.
TC VIDEO SYNCRO
Sets the delay of time code output from the TC OUT
connector.
TC IN: Does not delay output of input to TC IN
connector.
VIDEO OUT: Outputs the time code in line with delay
of video output from the VIDEO OUT connector.
*1 Use 1080i selected in a SYSTEM MODE setting of 720-59.94P (720-50P) for checking video.
____ indicates the factory setting
142
DISPLAY SETUP screen
Item
EVF PEAK LEVEL
EVF PEAK FREQ
EVF SETTING
EVF B.LIGHT
ZEBRA1 DETECT
ZEBRA2 DETECT
ZEBRA2
MARKER
SAFETY ZONE
FOCUS BAR
LCD SETTING
SELF SHOOT
LCD BACKLIGHT
SYNC SCAN DISP
____ indicates the factory setting
143
Chapter 7 Menu Operations
EVF COLOR
Setting
Notes
Adjusts the peaking level of the viewfinder and the
LCD monitor.
–7 ... 0 ... +7
Adjusts the peaking frequency of the viewfinder and
the LCD monitor.
HIGH, LOW
Adjusts viewfinder brightness and contrast on a
subscreen.
(Subscreen)
EVF BRIGHTNESS
EVF CONTRAST
Adjusts viewfinder backlight brightness.
HIGH, NORMAL, LOW
Selects whether the viewfinder image will be displayed
in color or monochrome.
ON: Color display
OFF: Monochrome display
Sets the level of the right-leaning zebra pattern 1.
50% ... 70% ... 109%
Sets the level of the left-leaning zebra pattern 2.
50% ... 85% ... 109%
Selects ZEBRA2 type. (For details, refer to page 83.)
ON, SPOT, OFF
Turns center marker displayed in the viewfinder and
on the LCD monitor on and off. (For details, refer to
page 82.)
ON, OFF
• The safety zone is not displayed when
Sets the safety zone displayed in the viewfinder and
on the LCD monitor. (For details, refer to page 82.)
4:3, 13:9 or 14:9 is selected when
90%, 4:3, 13:9, 14:9, OFF
SYSTEM MODE is set to 480-59.94i
(576-50i) and ASPECT CONV is set to
SIDE CROP or LETTER BOX.
The length of the focus bar indicates accuracy of
•T
his function is not interlocked with the
focusing.
FOCUS ASSIST button.
ON: Displays the focus bar.
OFF: Does not display the focus bar.
Makes it possible to set video color level, brightness
and contrast displayed in the LCD monitor in a
subscreen.
(Subscreen)
LCD COLOR LEVEL
LCD BRIGHTNESS
LCD CONTRAST
Sets the LCD screen display when taking self portraits.
NORMAL: The LCD image is not inverted sideways.
MIRROR: The LCD image is inverted sideways.
• LCD monitor status displays do not appear when this
function is set to MIRROR to shoot self portraits.
Adjusts LCD monitor backlight brightness.
HIGH, NORMAL, LOW
• Brightness may change when settings
Selects synchro scan shutter display.
sec: Indicates shutter speed in fractions.
are modified.
deg: Provides a shutter angle indication.
Item
DATE/TIME
LEVEL METER
ZOOM
CARD/BATT
P2CARD REMAIN
Chapter 7 Menu Operations
OTHER DISPLAY
MENU BACK
REC COUNTER
Setting
Sets the date and time display.
TIME: Hours, minutes and second display
DATE: Year, month and day display
TIME&DATE: Hours, minutes, seconds and year,
month and day display
OFF: Not displayed
Sets the Audio Level Meter display.
ON, OFF
Sets the lens zoom value display.
ON, OFF
Sets the remaining P2 card capacity and battery
charge.
ON, OFF
Determines how remaining P2 card capacity is
displayed.
TOTAL: Displays value for both cards.
ONE-CARD: Indicates the remaining capacity of the
card that is being recorded.
Sets display of other data.
PARTIAL: Displays some of the data.
ALL: Displays all data.
OFF: Not displayed
Select whether to lower the transparency of the
background to make menu text easier to read.
ON: Lowers background transparency. (However, the
transparency of LCD SETTING and EVF SETTING is
not lowered.)
OFF: Does not lower background transparency.
Selects counter operation during recording.
TOTAL: Provides a continuous count until reset by
pressing the COUNTER RESET button.
CLIP: Clears the count value at start of recording and
counts time of recording.
Notes
BATTERY SETUP screen
Item
EXT DC IN SEL
BATTERY SELECT
BATTERY MODE
PROPAC14 NEAR
TRIMPAC14 NEAR
Setting
Selects external DC power supply type.
AC ADAPTER: AC adapter
BATTERY: Battery
Sets the battery type.
PROPAC14, TRIMPAC14, HYTRON50, HYTRON140,
DIONIC90, DIONIC160, NP-L7, ENDURA7,
ENDURA10, ENDURA-D, PAG L95, BP-GL65/95,
NiCd14, TYPE A, TYPE B
Sets near end.
AUTO: Automatically selects one of the battery types
selected in BATTERY SELECT.
MANUAL: Manually sets the near end voltage.
Sets the near end voltage for PROPAC14. (Adjustable
in 0.1 V units.)
11.0 V ... 13.5 V ... 15.0 V
Sets the near end voltage for PROPAC14. (Adjustable
in 0.1 V units.)
11.0 V ... 13.4 V ... 15.0 V
Notes
____ indicates the factory setting
144
Item
HYTRON50 NEAR
HYTRON140 NEAR
DIONIC90 NEAR
DIONIC160 NEAR
NP-L7 NEAR
ENDURA10 NEAR
ENDURA-D NEAR
PAG L95 NEAR
BP-GL65/95 NEAR
NiCd14 NEAR
NiCd14 END
TYPE A FULL
TYPE A NEAR
TYPE A END
TYPE B FULL
TYPE B NEAR
TYPE B END
NEAR END CANCEL
Notes
Chapter 7 Menu Operations
ENDURA7 NEAR
Setting
Sets the near end voltage for HYTRON50. (Adjustable
in 0.1 V units.)
11.0 V ... 13.4 V ... 15.0 V
Sets the near end voltage for HYTRON140.
(Adjustable in 0.1 V units.)
11.0 V ... 13.1 V ... 15.0 V
Sets the near end voltage for DIONIC90. (Adjustable
in 0.1 V units.)
11.0 V ... 13.7 V ... 15.0 V
Sets the near end voltage for DIONIC160. (Adjustable
in 0.1 V units.)
11.0 V ... 13.3 V ... 15.0 V
Sets the near end voltage for NP-L7. (Adjustable in 0.1
V units.)
11.0 V ... 13.6 V ... 15.0 V
Sets the near end voltage for ENDURA7. (Adjustable
in 0.1 V units.)
11.0 V ... 13.4 V ... 15.0 V
Sets the near end voltage for ENDURA10. (Adjustable
in 0.1 V units.)
11.0 V ... 13.4 V ... 15.0 V
Sets the near end voltage for ENDURA-D. (Adjustable
in 0.1 V units.)
11.0 V ... 13.4 V ... 15.0 V
Sets the near end voltage for PAG L95. (Adjustable in
0.1 V units.)
11.0 V ... 13.8 V ... 15.0 V
Sets the near end voltage for BP-GL65/95. (Adjustable
in 0.1 V units.)
11.0 V ... 13.4 V ... 15.0 V
Sets the near end voltage for NiCd14. (Adjustable in
0.1 V units.)
11.0 V ... 13.5 V ... 15.0 V
Sets the end voltage for NiCd14. (Adjustable in 0.1 V
units.)
11.0 V ... 13.1 V ... 15.0 V
Sets the full voltage for TYPE A. (Adjustable in 0.1 V
units.)
12.0 V ... 15.7 V ... 17.0 V
Sets the near end voltage for TYPE A. (Adjustable in
0.1 V units.)
11.0 V ... 13.7 V ... 15.0 V
Sets the end voltage for TYPE A. (Adjustable in 0.1 V
units.)
11.0 V ... 13.3 V ... 15.0 V
Sets the full voltage for TYPE B. (Adjustable in 0.1 V
units.)
12.0 V ... 16.0 V ... 17.0 V
Sets the near end voltage for TYPE B. (Adjustable in
0.1 V units.)
11.0 V ... 13.1 V ... 15.0 V
Sets the end voltage for TYPE B. (Adjustable in 0.1 V
units.)
11.0 V ... 12.8 V ... 15.0 V
Sets to cancel battery near end warning. ON, OFF.
ON, OFF
• When set to ON, pressing the DISP/MODE CHK
button stops the flashing of warning and tally lamps.
____ indicates the factory setting
145
CARD FUNCTIONS screen
Item
SCENE FILE
Chapter 7 Menu Operations
Setting
Notes
Reads/writes scene files from/onto the SD memory
• Not available when compiling to a clip
card.
in one-clip recording mode.
FILE SELECT: Selects scene files (1 to 4).
READ: Reads the selected scene file (1 – 4) settings
stored on the SD memory card.
WRITE: Saves the current scene file (1 – 4) settings to
the SD memory card.
TITLE RELOAD: Reloads title list.
USER FILE
Reads/writes user files (files other than SCENE FILES) • Not available when compiling to a clip
from/onto the SD memory card.
in one-clip recording mode.
FILE SELECT: Selects user files (1 to 4).
READ: Reads the user file (1 – 4) settings stored on
the SD memory card.
WRITE: Saves the current user file (1 – 4) settings to
the SD memory card.
TITLE RELOAD: Reloads title list.
SD CARD FORMAT
Formats SD memory cards.
•N
ot available when compiling to a clip
in one-clip recording mode.
• Setting data file operations may end in error during playback or when the menu option PC MODE is set to ON in the
SYSTEM SETUP screen. Set the menu option PC MODE to OFF before making file operations.
LENS SETUP screen
Item
SHADING SELECT
SHADING (USER)
CAC
CAC PROPERTY
CAC CARD READ
CAC FILE DELETE
CAC FILE INIT
IRIS ADJUST
Setting
Sets one of the following shading compensation
parameters.
DEFAULT: Standard lens setting
USER1: User setting 1
USER2: User setting 2
USER3: User setting 3
OFF: Sets shading compensation to OFF.
Selects whether or not to set shading parameters to
SHADING SELECT USER 1, 2 and 3.
Notes
•N
ot available in the following
conditions.
- When SHADING SELECT is set to
DEFAULT or OFF.
Determines whether or not to use the lens chromatic
aberration compensation (CAC) function.
ON: Uses CAC
OFF: Does not use CAC.
Displays currently used CAC file number and CAC file
data loaded in the camera.
Loads CAC file data from the SD card.
•N
ot available when compiling to a clip
in one-clip recording mode.
Displays a list of CAC files loaded in the camera and
delete selected files.
Returns the CAC files loaded in the camera to their
factory default settings.
Forcibly sets the iris.
F2.8, F16
____ indicates the factory setting
146
OTHER FUNCTIONS screen
Item
USER FILE
1394 CONTROL
ACCESS LED
ALARM
CLOCK SETTING
TIME ZONE
GL PHASE
H PHASE
SEEK SELECT
MENU INIT
Notes
•N
ot available in the following
conditions.
- When USB DEVICE mode is
enabled.
- When compiling to a clip in one-clip
recording mode.
• Not available in AVC-Intra mode and
DVCPRO HD native mode.
• Not available during interval, one-shot
and loop recording.
• Not available in AVC-Intra mode and
DVCPRO HD native mode.
• Not available during interval, one-shot
and loop recording.
• This setting cannot be initialized by
performing the MENU INIT option and
the INITIAL option in USER FILE.
• Not available when SYSTEM MODE is
set to 480-59.94i (576-50i).
• Hold down the JOG dial button and
turn it downwards or upwards and
maintain this position to quickly
change values.
Selects the position that is cued up when the FF or
REW button is pressed while playback is paused.
CLIP: Start point of clips
CLIP&T: Start point of clips and text memo add points
• Not available in the following
Restores all setting menu values including all scene
files (F1 to F6) and the user file to their factory
conditions.
- When USB DEVICE mode is
defaults.
enabled.
- When compiling to a clip in one-clip
recording mode.
____ indicates the factory setting
147
Chapter 7 Menu Operations
1394 CMD SEL
Setting
Saves user files to camera memory, loads them into
camera memory or initializes them. (For details, refer
to page 89.)
LOAD, SAVE, INITIAL
• This does not affect options in the SCENE FILE
screen.
Selects the method the camera uses for controlling
external devices connected to the DVCPRO/DV
connector. (For details, refer to page 155.)
EXT: Controls only the external device, but does not
transfer data to the camera for recording.
BOTH: Controls both the external device and the
camera, and also records.
CHAIN: When there is no more space left for recording
in the camera, recording is automatically made to the
external device.
OFF: No control
Determines how recording is stopped when the
camera controls an external device connected to the
DVCPRO/DV connector.
REC_P: Engages REC/PAUSE status.
STOP: Stops recording.
Determines whether or not the P2 CARD ACCESS LED
should light.
ON, OFF
Sets the alarm sound output when an alarm occurs.
HIGH, LOW, OFF
Sets the internal calendar (date)
For details, see [Setting Date and Time of Internal
Clock] (page 29).
Sets the time difference relative to Greenwich Mean
Time (GMT).
–12:00 ... 0:00 ... +13:00
For details, see [Setting Date and Time of Internal
Clock] (page 29).
Selects the output signal whose phase is locked to
the signal input to the GENLOCK IN connector in HD
(1080i, 720P) mode. (For details, refer to page 73.)
HD SDI: The HD SDI is locked to the genlock input.
COMPOSITE: The down-converted composite signal
(VIDEO OUT or SDI OUT 480i (576i) signal) is locked
to the genlock input.
Adjusts the horizontal phase when phase is locked to
the signal input to the GENLOCK IN connector.
–512 ... 0 ... +511
DIAGNOSTIC screen
Item
VERSION
Chapter 7 Menu Operations
MODEL NAME
SERIAL NO.
OPERATION
Setting
Indicates the version of the firmware used in this
camera.
A subscreen provides details on which firmware
versions are used.
(Subscreen)
CAM SOFT: Camera microprocessor software
SYSCON SOFT: Software for system control
microprocessor
P2CS BL2-1: Boot program 1 for P2 control
microprocessor
P2CS BL2-2: Boot program 2 for P2 control
microprocessor
P2CS KR: P2 control microprocessor kernel
P2CS AP: P2 control microprocessor application
VUP: System software used for updating all camera
firmware
VUP FS: File system for updating the camera
CAM1 FPGA: Camera 1 FPGA configuration ROM
CAM2 FPGA: Camera 2 FPGA configuration ROM
CAM3 FPGA: Camera 3 FPGA configuration ROM
DM FPGA: Main FPGA configuration ROM
Indicates the model name of this camera.
Indicates serial number of this camera.
Indicates the time of the camera has been on.
Notes
OPTION MENU screen
Open this menu by holding down the DISP/MODE CHK button and when shooting status appears press the front MENU
button. Use this function to check connection status during nonlinear editing.
Item
Setting
Notes
1394 STATUS
Opens the subscreen that shows 1394 status.
(Subscreen)
FORMAT: Format of input or output signals
RATE: Transfer rate of input or output signals
60/50: Signal system of input or output signals
CH: Channel of input or output signals
SPEED: Transfer rate of input or output signals
STATUS: Status of signals output or input via the
IEEE1394 digital interface
VIDEO: Status of input or output video signals
AUDIO: Status of input or output audio signals
1394 CONFIG
Opens a menu for configuring 1394 functionality.
DFLT, 1-255
• Use DFLT for normal operation.
____ indicates the factory setting
148
Chapter 8 Connecting to External Devices
Functionality Provided by Connections to USB 2.0 Connector
Connecting to a computer in USB
device mode
A USB 2.0 connection to a computer or other device allows
you to use P2 cards in the camera as mass storage.
Procedures for making connections to a
computer
1
Connect a USB cable to the USB 2.0 connector.
• A USB 2.0 cable is not supplied with the AGHPX370P/AG-HPX371E. Use a commercially available
USB cable (with shielding or other noise-reduction
measures) that supports USB 2.0.
• The camera supports USB cable lengths up to 5
meters. However, we recommend use of a USB cable
shorter than 3 meters.
You can use the menu option USER MAIN/USER1/
USER2 in the SW MODE screen to assign PC MODE
settings to a user button.
Note that the USER button functions are not available
when the menu is open.
To make a USB connection, you must first install the P2
software on the supplied CD-ROM on the computer. Select
the “AG-HPX370” driver. This USB driver supports only
the Windows operating system. For details, refer to the
installation manual.
NOTE
• A USB driver must be installed on the computer.
• Use a computer that supports USB 2.0 since the camera
supports only USB 2.0.
• Connect only one camera to a computer via USB.
• Do not remove P2 cards when the camera is connect to a
computer via USB.
• In a USB connection, the P2 CARD ACCESS LED is on only
when the card is accessed.
• In USB device operation, recording, playback and clip
thumbnail operations are not available.
• When a USB device is running, the remaining capacity of P2
cards is not indicated. Audio is not output through the SDI
OUT or DVCPRO/DV connector and the AUDIO level meters
do not appear.
• The USB lamp on the camera lights during USB
connection and USB DEVICE CONNECT appears in the
center of the viewfinder. If a normal connection cannot
be established, the USB lamp blinks and DISCONNECT
appears in the viewfinder.
USB LED
USB 2.0 Connector (DEVICE)
2
Set the menu option PC MODE SELECT in the
SYSTEM SETUP screen to USB DEVICE and
set PC MODE to ON.
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 129).
SYSTEM SETUP
SYSTEM MODE
REC SIGNAL
REC FORMAT
CAMERA MODE
SCAN REVERSE
ASPECT CONV
SETUP
PC MODE SELECT
1080-59.94i
CAMERA
AVC-I100/60i
60i
OFF
SIDE CROP
0%
USB DEVICE
(Viewfinder display)
USB DEVICE
CONNECT
PUSH MENU TO EXIT
149
Chapter 8 Connecting to External Devices
NOTE
NOTE
3
Terminating USB mode
Use one of the following three methods.
• Set the camera POWER switch to OFF.
• Set the PC MODE option in the SYSTEM SETUP
screen to OFF.
• Press the USER button to which PC MODE has
been assigned.
2
USB host mode
This mode allows you to connect the camera to a hard
disk drive that supports USB 2.0 to save card data, view
thumbnails of the stored clips and write data back to P2
cards.
Press the THUMBNAIL button.
• The thumbnail screen opens.
• Make sure that USB HOST appears at the bottom
right of the screen.
• When the camera is connected to a hard disk
drive, the HDD icon appears at the top right of
the screen. If the icon lights red this indicates that
data cannot be copied to or from the hard disk.
Check hard disk drive type.
For details on hard disk drives, refer to [Thumbnail
Screen] (page 111).
Switching to USB Host Mode
Chapter 8 Connecting to External Devices
1
Set the menu option PC MODE SELECT in the
SYSTEM SETUP screen to USB HOST and set
PC MODE to ON.
• This engages the USB host mode.
• The USB LED on the camera lights in USB host
mode and USB HOST CONNECT appears in
the center of the viewfinder. When a normal
connection cannot be established with the hard
disk, the USB LED flashes and DISCONNECT
appears in the viewfinder.
• When PC MODE is assigned to a user button,
press that user button to switch between USB host
mode and normal mode. However, a user button
cannot be used for switching in the thumbnail
mode.
For details, refer to [Assigning functions to USER
Buttons] (page 61).
NOTE
The USB host mode allows playback of P2 cards but
not recording of camera video or external input.
And clips on the hard disk must be written back to a P2
card before they can be played back.
For details, refer to [Writing back data to P2 cards]
(page 153).
3
Terminating USB host mode.
Use one of the following three methods.
• Set the camera POWER switch to OFF.
• Close the thumbnail screen and set the menu
option PC mode in the SYSTEM SETUP screen to
OFF.
• Press the USER button to which PC MODE has
been assigned *1.
*1 In thumbnail mode, pressing a user button will
not terminate USB host mode.
Using USB host mode
Supported hard disks
• A hard disk drive that supports the USB 2.0 interface
• P2 STORE (the optional AJ-PCS060G hard drive)
NOTE
• This camera supports USB bus power (5 V, 0.5 A) but some
hard disks may not be able to use USB bus power. Such hard
disk drives should be provided with a separate power supply.
• To prevent copying or formatting problems from occurring
during connection to a hard disk drive, be sure that the
camera’s battery is sufficiently charged or use the AC adapter.
• Do not connect a hard disk to hubs or other connections
that involve multiple units even if it is not powered on. Do
not connect other devices to the hard disk drive via a hub or
other device.
150
• This unit does not support hard disk drives that are 2 TB or
larger.
Viewing hard disk drive data
Use the following procedures to view data on a hard disk
drive connected via USB.
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
Switch to USB host mode.
For details, refer to [Switching to USB Host Mode]
(page 150).
Connect a hard disk drive via USB.
Press the THUMBNAIL button. Open the
thumbnail screen.
1 PARTITION
Use this function to view hard disk drive type.
Operations differ depending on hard disk drive type.
Hard disk
drive type
TYPE S
A special format that
permits high-speed
loading and write
back of data in card
units.
This is the format
used by the camera.
P2STORE
This is the P2 STORE
(AJ-PCS060G) hard
disk drive.
Cannot be used for
writing data.
FAT
The basic primary
partition on a PC is
FAT 16 or FAT 32.
The root directory of
such a partition must
contain a CONTENTS
directory.
OTHER
Hard disk other than
those above
* This refers to file
systems where root
does not contain
a directory called
“CONTENTS” or a
NTFS file system
other than FAT16 or
FAT32.
Press the THUMBNAIL button and select HDD
 EXPLORE in the thumbnail menu.
• This opens a screen that shows hard disk drive
data.
TYPE S or P2 STORE
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press the SET button.   Press the EXIT button.
10
11
12
Features
Supported
functions
This format allows
thumbnail display,
loading and write
back of data in
card units, and
write back of data
and formatting in
clip units.
This format
displays
thumbnails, write
back data in card
units and write
back data in clip
units.
Display
thumbnails, write
back video data
by the clip and
formatting
* Handled as a
“TYPE S” hard disk
after formatting.
Format
* Handled as a
“TYPE S” hard disk
after formatting.
2 VENDOR
Indicates hard disk drive vendor.
3 MODEL
Indicates hard disk drive model.
4 SIZE
Indicates the total capacity of the hard disk drive.
5 USED
Indicates the size of used space on the hard disk drive
(units: GB) and used P2 card area (units: cards).
151
Chapter 8 Connecting to External Devices
4
FAT formatted hard disk
6 REMAIN
Indicates remaining capacity (units: GB) on the hard
disk drive.
9 DATE/TIME
Indicates the date and time data was recorded on the
partition.
7 Partition number
Indicates the number of partitions (in units of P2 cards)
on the hard disk drive.
10 SERIAL
Indicates the serial number of P2 card that originally
recorded the data in the partition.
NOTE
The screen can show up to 10 partitions. When there are 11
or more partitions, use the cursor button (]) to move down
to display the remaining partitions.
8 MODEL
Indicates the model of P2 card that originally recorded
the data in the partition.
NOTE
Press the cursor button (o) to switch to PARTITION NAME.
Use the cursor button (p) to return to the previous model.
11 VERIFY
Indicates verify settings and results when data was
recorded to a partition.
ON:FINISHED:
Runned verify and verify results were matched.
ON:FAILED:
Runned verify but verify results could not be
matched.
OFF:
Did not run verify.
– – –:
No verify information available.
Chapter 8 Connecting to External Devices
NOTE
• Hard disk drives formatted using FAT can handle up to
1000 clips. Any clips beyond that limit cannot be opened.
• Only the first partition of a hard disk drive formatted
using FAT can display information.
• An invalid partition on P2 STORE (AJ-PCS060G) is
indicated in gray.
12 NAME
Indicates the PARTITION NAME.
When hard disk drive thumbnails are displayed,
select CHANGE PARTITION NAME in the OPERATION
menu to enter the PARTITION NAME on the software
keyboard. (up to 20 characters)
Formatting Hard Disks
1
2
3
4
Switch to the USB host mode.
For details, refer to [Switching to USB Host Mode]
(page 150).
Connect a hard disk drive via USB.
Press the THUMBNAIL button to open the
thumbnail screen.
Press the THUMBNAIL button and select HDD
 EXPLORE in the thumbnail menu.
• This opens a screen that shows hard disk drive
data.
152
5
Select OPERATION  FORMAT (HDD) in the
menu and use a cursor button and the SET
button to select YES.
• Select YES in the confirmation message that
appears again to start hard disk drive formatting.
• Handled as a “TYPE S” hard disk drive after
formatting.
NOTE
All data on a hard disk drive is deleted when the disk is
formatted. It is not possible to select part of a partition
to delete.
Writing to hard disk drive
1
3
4
5
6
• A TYPE S hard disk drive can write data in card units. Up to
23 P2 cards can be saved to a hard disk drive.
The P2 card data recorded on a hard disk drive are
recognized as separate drives.
• To write P2 cards with bad clips, it is a good idea to repair
these clips before writing them to a hard disk drive.
• Ending a recording during the verify phase will end writing of
data from the P2 card to the hard disk drive.
Writing back data to P2 cards
This allows you to select a clip from the hard disk drive and
write it back to a P2 card.
1
Switch to the USB host mode.
For details, refer to [Switching to USB Host Mode]
(page 150).
Connect a hard disk drive via USB.
If the hard disk drive has not been formatted by
the camera, format it according to the instructions
provided in [Formatting Hard Disks] (page 152).
Insert a P2 card.
Press the THUMBNAIL button to open the
thumbnail screen.
Press the THUMBNAIL button and select HDD
 EXPORT from the thumbnail menu and
specify the slot of the P2 card with the data you
want to write to the hard disk drive.
2
3
4
5
6
Select YES.
• This starts the write process.
• A progress bar appears during the write process.
To interrupt writing, press the SET button.
Selecting YES in the cancel confirmation that
appears will stop the write process.
• COPY COMPLETED! announces the end of the
write process.
NOTE
• To turn off the verify phase in a write operation, select
HDD  SETUP in the thumbnail menu and set VERIFY
to OFF. This speeds up the write time but does not
verify the written data.
• Selecting ALL SLOT writes the data on all inserted P2
cards inserted in the camera to the hard disk drive.
7
Switch to the USB host mode.
For details, refer to [Switching to USB Host Mode]
(page 150).
Connect a hard disk drive via USB.
Insert the P2 card to which data will be written
back to.
Press the THUMBNAIL button, select HDD 
EXPLORE from the thumbnail menu, move to
the partition with the data that will be read and
press the SET button.
Select the clip to be written to the P2 card from
the thumbnail on the hard disk drive.
Press the THUMBNAIL button, select
OPERATION  IMPORT  SELECTED CLIPS
from the thumbnail menu and select the slot of
the P2 card to write the data to.
Select YES.
• This starts the data write to the P2 card.
• When the write process ends, “COPY
COMPLETED!” appears.
NOTE
• When clips are selected for writing, verify is not performed.
153
Chapter 8 Connecting to External Devices
2
NOTE
A TYPE S and P2 STORE hard disk drive allows you to write
back data in card units.
Format the P2 card to prepare for write back.
1
Switch to the USB host mode.
For details, refer to [Switching to USB Host Mode]
(page 150).
2 Connect a hard disk drive via USB.
3
4
Chapter 8 Connecting to External Devices
5
6
Insert the P2 card to which data will be written
back to.
Press the THUMBNAIL button, select HDD 
EXPLORE from the thumbnail menu, move to
the partition with the data that will be written
and press the SET button.
Select OPERATION  IMPORT  ALL from
the thumbnail menu and select a slot with an
empty P2 card for writing to.
Select YES.
• This starts the write process to the card.
•C
OPY COMPLETED! announces the end of the write
back process.
NOTE
• It is not possible to import data by the partition between P2
cards with different model numbers. Import data in clip units
from cards with a different model number.
• To turn off the verify phase in a write back operation, select
HDD  SETUP in the thumbnail menu and set VERIFY to OFF.
This speeds up the write back time but does not verify the
written data.
• When a clip is written back to a P2 card it was not originally
on may make that clip an incomplete clip. Should this
happen, reconnect it.
Refer to [Reconnection of Incomplete Clips] (page 118).
154
Hard disk drive precautions
• Use hard disk drives (including P2 STORE (AJPCS060G)) according to the following conditions.
-O
perate hard disk drives within their operating
specifications (temperature, etc.).
- Do not use hard disk drives in locations that are
unstable or exposed to vibration.
• Some hard disk drives may not operate normally.
• SATA (serial ATA) or PATA (parallel ATA) interface hard
disk drives connected using a USB conversion cable may
not be recognized.
• Use hard disk drives with plenty of capacity for copying
data.
• During formatting and copying, do not disconnect cables
or remove a P2 card that is involved in these activities
and do not power off this camera and the hard disk drive,
as the camera and hard disk drive will otherwise have
to be rebooted. In addition, be sure that the camera’s
battery is sufficiently charged or use the AC adapter.
• A hard disk drive is a precision instrument whose
read and write functions may fail in some operating
environments.
• Please note that Panasonic accepts no liability
whatsoever for data loss or other losses either direct or
indirect arising from hard disk damage or other defects.
• When data from this camera is copied to a hard disk and
is edited on another computer, the data may no longer
work in this unit and the hard disk data may become
corrupted.
• Use of the drive mount converter distributed from the
support desk at the following website allows you to mount
specific folders when a hard disk drive is connected.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
Connections to the DVCPRO/DV Connector
Recording signals input to the
DVCPRO/DV connector
1
2
Connect a 1394 cable (DV cable).
For details, see [Precautions in 1394 Connections]
(page 156).
• Make sure that the signal format of the camera
and the connected device is the same.
• To use HD (1080i, 720P) set the menu option
REC FORMAT in the SYSTEM SETUP screen to
DVCPRO HD/60i (DVCPRO HD/50i) or DVCPRO
HD/60P (DVCPRO HD/50P).
The AVC-Intra format and DVCPRO HD native
recording do not allow input via the IEEE1394
interface.
NOTE
• Signals that have the same format as that set in the menu
options SYSTEM MODE and REC FORMAT in the SYSTEM
SETUP screen should be input to the IEEE1394 interface. A
signal in a different format will not be correctly recorded on
a P2 card. Video and audio recording and EE type video and
audio of signal inputs other than 1x speed playback signals
may not work.
For details, see [Warning and Error Display for Thumbnail
Operation and USB HOST MODE] (page 163).
• Audio signal inputs are input signals from the DVCPRO/DV
connector.
• 32 kHz/4CH (12 bit) audio signals input via the IEEE1394
interface are recorded as 48 kHz/4CH (16 bit) on a P2 card.
• It is not possible to use the GENLOCK IN connector to
synchronize to an external reference signal.
• Signals output from the VIDEO OUT or AUDIO OUT
connectors differ from actual input signals. Use such signals
for monitoring.
• The following functions do not operate.
• Pre-recording function
• Loop recording function
• Interval recording and one-shot recording function
• One-clip recording function
• When input from the IEEE1394 interface is selected,
the time code or user bits input to the TC IN connector
cannot be recorded on a P2 card.
• When input from the IEEE1394 interface is selected,
time code output from the TC OUT connector is not
synchronized to the video signal output from the VIDEO
OUT connector.
Subcode area time codes and user bits
• When input from the IEEE1394 interface is selected and
the TCG switch is set to F-RUN, the time code of the
subcode area input from the DVCPRO/DV connector can
be recorded on the P2 card.
• To record user bits input from the DVCPRO/DV connector
on a P2 card, set the menu option UB MODE in
RECORDING SETUP to EXT.
VAUX area time codes and user bits
When input from the IEEE1394 interface is selected,
time code and user bits of the VAUX area input from
the DVCPRO/DV connector is recorded on a P2 card
regardless of camera menu settings and switch positions.
Recording UMID (Unique Material
Identifier) data
When input from the IEEE1394 interface is selected, UMID
data input via the DVCPRO/DV connector is recorded on
a P2 card. When no UMID data is available, the camera
generates and records such data.
UMID data is not recorded when the camera is operating in
the DV mode.
155
Chapter 8 Connecting to External Devices
To route inputs via the IEEE1394 interface, set
the menu option REC SIGNAL in the SYSTEM
SETUP screen to 1394. Time Code and User Bits
Control of external devices through
1394 connection
Connecting an external device for backup recording to the
DVCPRO/DV connector allows the operator to control start
and stop recording from the camera.
1
2
Connect a 1394 cable (DV cable).
For details, see [Precautions in 1394 Connections]
(this page).
• Set 1394 CONTROL in the setting menu OTHER
FUNCTIONS screen to BOTH.
Chapter 8 Connecting to External Devices
Use the setting menu 1394 CMD SEL (OTHER
FUNCTIONS) to select the command for
terminating recording that external devices
receive.
For details on menu operation, refer to [Using the
menus] (page 129).
NOTE
• When the camera is set to REC RUN to perform backup
recording on a connected external device, the advance of
time code from the DVCPRO/DV connector will stop when
all P2 cards have been fully recorded regardless of whether
backup recording continues.
• It may not be possible for an external device to back
up recording when quick transitions are made between
recording and stopping.
• When the AVC-Intra format or DVCPRO HD native recording
format is selected, control of an external device via a 1394
connection is not possible.
• Interval recording, one-shot recording and loop recording do
not allow control of an external device via 1394.
Precautions in 1394 Connections
• The camera does not supply power via the cable.
• Observe the following in connections using a 1394 cable.
• Connect this unit to only one other device.
• Do not expose the DVCPRO/DV connector to excessive
force when connecting a 1394 cable to avoid
damaging the connector.
• If an error (1394 INITIAL ERROR) should occur when
making a connection, reinsert the 1394 cable or turn
the camera off and then turn it back on again.
• Make sure that the camera and all connected devices
are connected to ground (or connected to a common
ground). If the equipment cannot be connected
to ground, turn off all connected devices before
connecting or disconnecting an IEEE1394 cable.
• When connecting the unit to a device with a 4-pin
connector, connect the cable to the 6-pin connector on
the camera first.
• Be sure to properly connect the 1394 cable to the
DVCPRO/DV connector on a computer with a 6-pin
connector. Note that inserting the plug the wrong way
round may damage the connector.
156
6-pin type
4-pin type
• AV signals may be disrupted when connected devices
are turned on and off or when the interface cable is
connected or disconnected.
• It may take the system a few seconds to stabilize
after switching input signals or changing modes. Start
recording after the system has stabilized.
• The AUDIO LEVEL control does not work in recordings
that involve IEEE1394 interface input or output signals.
• Observe the following precautions when controlling a
P2 memory card camera-recorder using PC application
software (editing software).
• Recording cannot be inserted to a portion within a clip.
It can only be appended to the end of the newest clip.
• Do not open the thumbnail screen during application
software operation as this may prevent normal software
operation.
• Unprocessed video and audio signals are output via
the IEEE1394 interface during special playback. When
monitored on another device, these video and audio
signals may sound different than when played back on
this unit.
• A DV or DVCPRO output format makes it possible to
select audio channel CH1/CH2 or CH3/CH4 output from
the IEEE1394 interface in the menu option 1394 AUDIO
OUT in the AUDIO SETUP screen.
Chapter 9 Maintenance and Inspections
Inspections Before Shooting
Make sure you check that the system is operating normally
before embarking on a shoot. We recommend using a
colour video monitor to check the image.
Preparing for Inspections
1
2
Inspecting the Camera Unit
1
• Check that the image changes to telephoto and
wide angle.
Mount a charged battery.
Turn the POWER switch to ON to check the
battery remaining level in the viewfinder.
2
3
4
Insert a P2 card in the card slot and close the
slot cover.
• Confirm that the P2 CARD ACCESS LED for the
inserted card slot lights up in orange. When P2
cards are installed in both card slots, the P2 CARD
ACCESS LED for the first inserted card (that was
first accessed) will light orange while the P2 CARD
ACCESS LED for a subsequently inserted card will
light green.
• If the access LED for the P2 card slot in which a
P2 card is inserted keeps blinking in green, or if
there is no display, recording is not possible on
that particular P2 card.
5
Set the iris to automatic adjustment mode and
aim the lens at objects with different degrees
of brightness, to check that the automatic iris
adjustment operates normally.
Set the iris to manual adjustment mode and
turn the iris ring, to check the manual iris
adjustment.
Return the iris to automatic adjustment mode
and change the GAIN switch setting to L, M,
and H, to check the following items:
• The iris is adjusted for objects with the same
brightness according to the switch setting.
• The gain value displayed on the viewfinder screen
changes according to the switch setting.
6
When a lens with an extender is mounted, set
the extender to the operating position to check
that the extender operates properly.
1
2
157
Chapter 9 Maintenance and Inspections
1 9 9 9 min B 9 0 %
D I ON C 1 6 0 U S E R - 1
CAC
Set the zoom to manual zoom mode and check
the zoom operation.
• Turn the manual zoom lever to check that the
image changes to telephoto and wide angle.
• When battery capacity is low, replace it with a fully
charged battery.
3
Set the zoom to electric zoom mode and check
the zoom operation.
Inspecting the Memory Recording
Functions
Inspecting the Audio Level Automatic
Adjustment
Make sure you successively carry out the inspections from
[Inspecting the P2 Card Recording] to [Inspecting the
Earphone and Speaker].
1
Inspecting the P2 Card Recording
2
1
3
Check on the display inside the viewfinder that
the remaining P2 card recording capacity is
sufficient.
For details, refer to [Screen displays] (page 75).
2
Press the camera’s REC button to check the
following items:
Chapter 9 Maintenance and Inspections
• The P2 access LED blinks in orange.
• The REC indication in the viewfinder lights.
• System warnings do not appear inside the
viewfinder.
3
4
Press the camera’s REC button again.
• Check that the P2 access LED lights orange and
that REC indication in the viewfinder clears.
5
Press the THUMBNAIL button to switch
the thumbnail screen to play back currently
recorded clip from thumbnail.
• Check that playback is operating normally.
6
Use the USER button to which the SLOT SEL
function has been assigned to select P2 cards
for recording when more than one P2 card is
inserted in the card slots.
• Repeat the operations in Steps 2 to 3 and 5
to check that recording and playback operate
properly.
158
Set the AUDIO IN switch to [FRONT].
Aim the microphone connected to the MIC IN
jack at an appropriate sound source. Then,
check that the level displays for both CH1 and
CH2 change according to the sound level.
Inspecting the Audio Level Manual
Adjustment
1
2
3
Using the REC button on the handle, repeat
Steps 2 to 3 to check the same operation.
• Check the VTR button on the lens in the same way.
Set the AUDIO SELECT CH1 and CH2 switches to [AUTO].
Set the AUDIO IN switch to [FRONT].
Set the AUDIO SELECT CH1 and CH2 switches to [MAN].
Turn the AUDIO LEVEL CH1 and CH2 controls.
• Check that the level display increases when the
controls are turned to the right.
Inspecting the Earphone and Speaker
1
2
3
Turn the MONITOR control to check that the
speaker volume changes.
Connect an earphone to the PHONES jack.
• Check that the speaker is turned off and the
microphone sound can be heard from the
earphone.
Turn the MONITOR control to check that the
earphone volume changes.
Inspection for Using an External
Microphone
Inspection of the clock, time code, and
user bits
1
1
2
3
Connect an external microphone to the REAR 1
and REAR 2 connectors.
Set the AUDIO IN switch to [REAR].
Set the LINE/MIC/+48V selector switches on
the rear panel to [MIC] or [+48V], depending
on the power supply type of the external
microphone.
• MIC: For a microphone with internal power supply.
• +48V: For a microphone with external power
supply.
Aim the microphone at the sound source and
check that the sound level indication in the LCD
or viewfinder varies with changes in sound
intensity.
3
4
5
• The channels can also be checked separately by
connecting a single microphone to each channel.
6
7
Please refer to [Setting user bits] (page 67) for the
setting procedures.
Set the time code.
Please refer to [Setting the Time Code] (page 69) for
the setting procedures.
Set the TCG switch to R-RUN.
• Press the COUNTER button to display the time
code on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder.
Press the REC button.
• Check that the counter display number changes
as recording progresses.
Press the REC button again.
• Check that recording stops and the counter
display number stops changing.
Set the TCG switch to F-RUN.
• Check that the counter display number changes
regardless of recording status.
Hold down the DISP/MODE CHK button to
check the date and time on the LCD monitor or
in the viewfinder.
• Adjust the date and time setting if the DATE, TIME
and time zone is not correctly displayed.
For details, see [Setting Date and Time of Internal
Clock] (page 29).
NOTE
Note that date and time data set for DATE, TIME, and
time zone is recorded in clips, and affects the playback
sequence, etc. at the time of thumbnail manipulations.
159
Chapter 9 Maintenance and Inspections
4
2
Set the user bits as required.
Maintenance
Eyepiece Care
 When the outer lens is soiled
Remove surface dust using a soft brush or blower
brush before cleaning with a commercially available
lens cleaner (or lens cleaning paper).
 When dust adheres to internal lenses or
the interior of the eyepiece
Detach the eyepiece to remove the dust.
Use a soft brush or blower brush to remove surface
dust.
NOTE
Do not use thinner or other mineral solvents to remove dust or
soiling.
Outer lens
Chapter 9 Maintenance and Inspections
Eyepiece
Eyepiece lock button
Detaching the eyepiece
Slide the eyepiece lock button and turn the eyepiece
clockwise.
Mounting the eyepiece
Line up the projection on the eyepiece lock button with the
mark on the viewfinder and slide in the eyepiece. Turn the
eyepiece counterclockwise until the lock knob clicks into
place.
NOTE
When outdoors, never carry or set up the camera with the
eyepiece facing up to prevent sunlight, which could damage
the camera, from entering.
160
Cleaning Inside the Viewfinder
Detach the eyepiece to remove dust from the LCD screen
inside the viewfinder.
For details, refer to [Detaching the eyepiece] (this page).
Use a soft brush or blower brush to remove dust from the
LCD screen.
NOTE
Do not use thinner or other mineral solvents to remove dust or
soiling.
Charging the internal battery
The internal battery preserves the date and time settings.
If the camera is left unused for half a year or longer, the
internal battery may become depleted and the
(battery
icon) may appear in the viewfinder and on the LCD monitor.
Should this happen, connect an external DC power supply
or battery, and leave the camera turned off for about four
hours to fully charge the internal battery. Then reset the
time and date.
Replace the internal battery if
appears after charging.
Consult your distributor.
Warning System
Warning Description Tables
161
Chapter 9 Maintenance and Inspections
If a problem is detected immediately after the power is turned on, or during operation, this will be indicated by the
WARNING lamp, lamps inside the viewfinder and a warning tone.
Warning description
Warning
LCD or viewfinder
Warning
Alarm
Priority
Tally lamp
and
recording/playback Countermeasures
type
indication
lamp
tone*6
operation
Check the cause
SYSTEM ERROR
Blinks 4
Blinks 4
Continuous
P2
microprocessor
or
control
indication *1 and
1 System error Cause indication *1 Red
times per
times per
tone
failure. Operation stops.
consult your
blinking
second
second
distributor.
A P2 card was removed
Turn off the power.
Incorrect
Blinks 4
Blinks 4
during access and card data
TURN POWER OFF
Continuous
Repair the P2 card if
2 P2 card
times per
times per
was corrupted.
Blinks red
tone
the clips on the card
removal
second
second
Both access LEDs light
are corrupted.
orange.
LOW BATTERY Red
blinking, and the battery
The battery is exhausted.
The
level bar blinks with
Recording and playback
Blinks 1 time
Continuous
3 battery is
the empty status. (This
Lights
stop. The camera stops
Replace the battery.
per second
tone
exhauseted indication appears also
automatically when the
when MENU indications
voltage drops.
have been turned OFF.)
Blinks 4
Continuous
times per
Lights after
No more space on P2
Delete clips that are
P2 card fully P2 FULL
tone after
4
second after completing
cards left for recording.Stop no longer needed or
recorded
completing
Blinks red
completion recording
recording.*3
insert a new card.
recording
of recording.
Turn the power off
and then back on
Intermittent A recording error has
again and check
REC WARNING
Blinks 4
Blinks 4
Recording
tone
4
occurred.
The
error
may
recording and
5
Cause indication *2 Blinks times per
times per
error
times per terminate recording or let it
playback. Replace
red
second
second
second
continue. *4
any P2 card that
does not enable
normal recording.
An irregular reference
signal input to GENLOCK IN
prevents normal recording
Intermittent by pausing recording. The
Irregular
TEMPORARY PAUSE
Blinks 4
Blinks 4
tone 4
recorded clip is divided.
Check the
6 reference
IRREGULAR FRM SIG
times per
times per
times per • Recording resumes when
GENLOCK IN signal.
signal
Blinks red.
second
second
second
the signal returns to normal.
Recording does not resume
if interval, one-shot or loop
recording is in progress.
Drop in
Blinks 4
Indicates poor reception
reception
Check microphone
times per
Blinks 4
from the wireless receiver.
quality of
WIRELESS RF
power supply and
7
second
times per
No
Recording continues but
wireless
Blinks red
receiver reception
(Recording second
wireless microphone cannot
receiver
status.
only)
be received.
transmission
(Continued on the next page)
Priority
Warning
type
LCD or viewfinder
indication
Tally lamp
8
1394
connection
error
9
The last bar in the battery
level indication blinks (This
Battery
Blinks 1 time Blinks 1 time
indication appears also
nearly empty
per second per second
when MENU indications
have been turned OFF.)
P2 card
10 nearly fully
recorded
Blinks 4
1394 INITIAL ERROR Blinks
times per
red
second
Warning
lamp
Blinks 1 time
The P2CARD level indicator per second
blinks.
during
recording.
Blinks 4
times per
second
Blinks 1 time
per second
during
recording.
Alarm
tone*6
No
Warning description
and recording/playback Countermeasures
operation
Check the camera
and device
The DVCPRO/DV cable
connections,
has become disconnected
reconnect them if
or multiple devices are
necessary, then turn
connected.
the power off and
back on again.
No
The battery is near depletion. Replace the battery
Operation continues.*5
as necessary.
No
Less than 2 minutes is left on
the P2 cards (level indicator
Replace or insert
shows 1 minute or less). This
additional P2 cards.
warning appears only during
recording.
Chapter 9 Maintenance and Inspections
*1 P2 SYSTEM ERROR cause indication
• P2 MICON ERROR: The P2 microprocessor does not respond.
• P2 CONTROL ERROR: A P2 recording control error has occurred.
• CAM MICON ERROR: The camera microprocessor does not respond.
*2 REC WARNING cause indication
• CARD ERROR*: P2CARD error (* indicates the number of the slot of the card with the error.) Stops recording.
• REC RAM OVERFLOW: Overflow of recording RAM. Stops recording.
• PULL DOWN ERROR: 24P, 30P (25P) video pulldown error. Recording continues.
• OVER MAX# CLIPS: The limit for the number of clips that can be recorded to one P2 card (up to 1000 clips) has been
reached.
• ERROR: Other recording errors.
*3 Perform either of the following procedures to cancel this warning.
• Press a playback control button.
• Press the THUMBNAIL button.
• Remove the P2 card and insert another card.
*4 Perform either of the following procedures to cancel this warning.
• Press the REC button.
• Press a playback control button.
• Press the THUMBNAIL button.
• Remove all cards.
*5 When NEAR END CANCEL is set to ON, you can press the DISP/MODE CHK button to cancel the alarm.
*6 When the alarm sounds, audio is not output to the camera speakers or earphones. The DISP/MODE CHK button cancels
only the alarm tone when pressed during an alarm.
162
Warning and Error Display for Thumbnail Operation and USB HOST MODE
Item
Message
CANNOT ACCESS!
CANNOT CHANGE!
CANNOT COPY!
CANNOT DELETE !
CANNOT FORMAT!
CANNOT
RECONNECT!
CANNOT REPAIR!
MISSING CLIP!
Thumbnails
NO CARD!
NO COPY TO SAME
CARD!
NO FILE!
NO SD CARD!
SAME CLIP IS
SELECTED!
TOO MANY CLIPS!
UNKNOWN
CONTENTS FORMAT!
UNKNOWN DATA!
USER CLIP NAME
MODIFIED!
WRITE PROTECTED!
Measure
Restore media and clips to normal state
before access.
Set SYSTEM MODE according to the clips.
Check the conditions for copying.
Match devices and contents versions, and
repair bad clips.
Check P2 card.
Check selected content.
Check selected content.
—
Insert media with sufficient capacity.
Enter data in a valid range.
Insert a card with sufficient recording
capacity.
Insert all P2 cards with recorded clips,
A shot mark will be added to the clips
and confirm that the ! incomplete clip
recorded on multiple P2 cards when all P2
indicators disappear, and then add shot
cards are not inserted yet.
marks.
No P2 or SD card is inserted.
Insert compatible media.
A clip cannot be copied to the card storing
Copy the selected clip to a card that does
the original clip.
not contain the original clip.
The designated file is not found.
Check the file.
No SD card is inserted.
Insert an SD card.
The clip cannot be copied because a clip
Confirm the selected clip and release
that has already been copied and the original either the source clip or the destination
clip have been selected.
clip and then execute the copy operation.
Too many clips are selected.
Reduce the number of selected clips.
• Match devices and contents versions.
• If corrupted clips exist (including
P2 card contains contents version
corrupted clips that are located on the
mismatches or corrupted content.
copy destination), repair the corrupted
clips or delete them.
Use UTF-8 for the metadata character
The metadata character code is invalid.
code. Use the viewer to enter correct
characters.
The user clip name plus the counter
value can only contain up to 100
Characters in the clip name had to be
bytes. Characters in the clip name are
deleted in adding the counter value.
automatically deleted when the total
exceeds 100bytes.
The P2 or SD card is write protected.
Insert write-enabled media.
[PERSON] will be entered while the text
Enter [TEXT] before entering [PERSON].
memo is not available.
CANNOT CHANGE!
Soft
keyboard CANNOT SET! INVALID
The entered value is incorrect.
VALUE!
Change the value.
(Continued on the next page)
163
Chapter 9 Maintenance and Inspections
CANNOT REPAIR IN
SELECTION!
CARD FULL!
INVALID VALUE!
LACK OF REC
CAPACITY!
Description
Data cannot be accessed because it is
corrupted or for other reasons.
Any thumbnails that cannot be produced
on the AVC-Intra 100 or AVC-Intra 50 and
displayed in gray cannot be changed at the
text memo position.
Images cannot be copied.
P2 card contains contents version
mismatches or bad clips.
P2 card problem prevents formatting.
A clip that does not span multiple P2 cards
cannot be reconnected.
Data cannot be repaired since content that
cannot be repaired is selected.
Some of the selected clip could not be
repaired.
The P2 or SD card is full.
Entered data was invalid.
There is not enough recording capacity left
on the card.
Item
Message
CANNOT ACCESS
CARD!
CANNOT ACCESS
TARGET!
CANNOT FORMAT!
CANNOT RECOGNIZE
HDD!
CARD IS EMPTY!
CANNOT COPY!
Description
An error occurred during P2 card access.
Check P2 card.
An error occurred during hard disk access.
Check hard disk status and connection.
The hard disk cannot be initialized.
The destination target cannot be properly
recognized.
Copying cannot be made because the
destination card is in the wrong format.
Connect another hard disk drive.
Reboot the hard disk or connect a different
hard disk.
Copying is not performed since the card
is empty.
There is not enough space on the
connected hard disk. Use a new hard disk
or formatted hard disk.
Reconnect the USB cable. If the hard disk
does not operate normally, turn it off and
turn it back on again.
Use a P2 card with the same model
number or import video in clip units.
The P2 card is not formatted.
Use a formatted P2 card.
PLEASE FORMAT P2
CARD!
This warning indicates that data could not
be imported from a hard disk to a P2 card
because the P2 card contained recorded
data.
You cannot copy to a P2 card that
contains data. Format the card on a P2
device and copy again.
TOO MANY
PARTITIONS!
There are too many partitions.
The P2 selected for copying is empty.
HDD CAPACITY FULL! Not enough space left on the hard disk.
HDD DISCONNECTED!
HDD
(USB
MISMATCH
HOST
COMPONENT!
MODE)
P2 CARD IS
UNFORMATTED!
The unit is not connected to a hard disk.
Chapter 9 Maintenance and Inspections
TOO MANY TARGETS! Multiple devices are connected.
UNKNOWN DEVICE
The connected DVD drive is not compatible.
CONNECTED!
VERIFICATION FAILED! The compare check after copying failed.
164
Measure
Hard disks can handle up to 23 partitions.
Use a new hard disk or formatted hard
disk.
Disconnect devices, turn off the unit and
turn it back on again.
Disconnect devices, turn off the unit and
turn it back on again.
Copy the data again.
Updating the firmware incorporated into the unit
The firmware can be updated using either of the following two methods.
1 Checking the current version of firmware and performing the update using the dedicated tool (P2_Status_
Logger)
PASS (P2 Asset Support System) is only available to customers who have completed customer registration with
Panasonic.
Log in to PASS and use the dedicated tool (P2_Status_Logger) to check the version information of the firmware on the
unit and download links to pages containing the necessary firmware. For further information about downloading and
using P2_Status_Logger, log in to PASS and refer to the relevant pages. Besides access to PASS, completing customer
registration has a number of other benefits. For further details, refer to the PASS (P2 Asset Support System) website
(http://pro-av.panasonic.net/).
NOTE
• The update is completed by loading the downloaded file onto the unit via an SD memory card. For details on updating, visit the
support desk at the following website.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
• Be sure to use a compatible SD memory card. The unit is compatible with SD memory cards based on the SD and SDHC
standards. Also, be sure to format the memory card using the unit before use.
165
Chapter 9 Maintenance and Inspections
2 Checking the current version of the firmware using the unit and performing the update
Check firmware version of the camera in the DIAGNOSTIC screen. Then access the site listed in the NOTE below to
check the most recent firmware information and download any firmware you require.
Chapter 10 Index
1
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
1394 AUDIO OUT............................................. 142
1394 CMD SEL................................................. 147
1394 CONFIG................................................... 148
1394 connection............................................... 156
1394 CONTROL............................................... 147
1394 STATUS.................................................... 148
2
MENU 25M REC CH SEL ........................................... 141
A
Chapter 10 Index
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
A.IRIS LEVEL. ................................................. 134
ACCESS LED.................................................... 147
ALARM............................................................. 147
ASPECT CONV................................................. 136
ATW.................................................................. 137
ATW TYPE......................................................... 137
Audio Input......................................................... 62
Audio level meter magnification......................... 82
AUDIO SETUP screen...................................... 140
Auto Black Balance............................................ 56
AUTO KNEE SW............................................... 138
AUTO LEVEL CH3............................................ 140
AUTO LEVEL CH4............................................ 140
Auto tracking white balance............................... 56
B
MENU
MENU
MENU
BATTERY MODE............................................... 144
BATTERY SELECT............................................ 144
BATTERY SETUP screen.................................. 144
battery
Mounting....................................................... 95
Setting........................................................... 95
Black Balance.................................................... 55
BP-GL65/95 NEAR........................................... 145
C
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
166
CAC.................................................................. 146
CAC CARD READ............................................ 146
CAC FILE DELETE............................................ 146
CAC FILE INIT.................................................. 146
CAC PROPERTY............................................... 146
CAMERA MODE............................................... 136
CARD FUNCTION screen................................. 146
CARD/BATT...................................................... 144
Center marker..................................................... 82
CHROMA LEVEL.............................................. 133
CHROMA PHASE............................................. 133
Chromatic Aberration Compensation (CAC).... 101
cine-like gamma................................................. 40
clip.................................................................... 110
CLOCK SETTING............................................. 147
COLOR TEMP Ach........................................... 133
COLOR TEMP Bch........................................... 133
Connector signal.............................................. 174
Control of external devices............................... 156
Copying............................................................ 118
Counter............................................................... 73
cue up................................................................ 47
D
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
Date and Time.................................................... 29
DATE/TIME........................................................ 144
DC power........................................................... 97
Deleting............................................................ 117
DETAIL CORING............................................... 133
DETAIL LEVEL.................................................. 133
DIAGNOSTIC screen........................................ 148
Dimensions....................................................... 170
DIONIC160 NEAR............................................ 145
DIONIC90 NEAR.............................................. 145
Diopter Adjustment............................................. 87
DISPLAY SETUP screen................................... 143
DOWNCON MODE........................................... 142
DRS EFFECT.................................................... 134
DVCPRO/DV Connector................................... 155
Dynamic Range Stretcher............................ 12, 61
E
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
Electronic Shutter............................................... 58
ENDURA10 NEAR............................................ 145
ENDURA7 NEAR.............................................. 145
ENDURA-D NEAR............................................ 145
errors........................................................... 78,163
EVF B.LIGHT.................................................... 143
EVF COLOR...................................................... 143
EVF PEAK FREQ............................................... 143
EVF PEAK LEVEL............................................. 143
EVF SETTING................................................... 143
EXT DC IN SEL................................................. 144
external DC power.............................................. 97
external power.................................................... 97
F
MENU F.MIC LEVEL..................................................... 141
MENU F.MIC POWER................................................... 141
Fast-forward playback........................................ 47
Fast-reverse playback........................................ 47
FBC..................................................................... 60
firmware............................................................ 165
Flange Back....................................................... 99
Flash Band Compensation................................. 60
Focus assist........................................................ 84
MENU FOCUS BAR..................................................... 143
Formatting
Hard Disks.................................................. 152
P2 Card....................................................... 123
SD memory card................................... 90, 124
MENU FRAME RATE.................................................... 133
FRONT AUDIO LEVEL Control........................... 63
FRONT AUDIO LEVEL Control Knob................ 107
Front Microphone............................................. 104
MENU FRONT VR CH1................................................ 140
MENU FRONT VR CH2................................................ 140
G
MENU GAMMA............................................................ 134
GENLOCK.......................................................... 73
MENU GL PHASE........................................................ 147
MENU
MENU
MENU
H
N
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
H PHASE.......................................................... 147
HEADROOM..................................................... 141
HIGH GAIN....................................................... 137
Hot Swap Recording.......................................... 46
HYTRON140 NEAR.......................................... 145
HYTRON50 NEAR............................................ 145
I
MENU
MENU
internal battery.................................................. 160
Internal Clock..................................................... 29
Interval recording............................................... 43
INTERVAL TIME................................................ 139
IRIS ADJUST.................................................... 146
K
L
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
LCD.................................................................. 129
LCD BACKLIGHT............................................. 143
LCD monitor....................................................... 85
LCD SETTING................................................... 143
LENS SETUP screen......................................... 146
Lens
Adjusting....................................................... 98
Mounting....................................................... 98
LEVEL METER.................................................. 144
LIMITER CH1.................................................... 140
LIMITER CH2.................................................... 140
LOAD/SAVE/INIT............................................... 133
Loop recording (LOOP REC).............................. 44
LOW GAIN........................................................ 137
M
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MAIN MENU..................................................... 131
MARKER........................................................... 143
MASTER PED................................................... 134
MATRIX............................................................. 134
MENU BACK.................................................... 144
MENU INIT........................................................ 147
menu
menus......................................................... 129
THUMBNAIL MENU.................................... 111
menus
Initializing.................................................... 130
Using........................................................... 129
Meta Data......................................................... 119
MIC LOWCUT CH1........................................... 140
MIC LOWCUT CH2........................................... 140
MIC LOWCUT CH3........................................... 140
MIC LOWCUT CH4........................................... 140
NAME EDIT....................................................... 135
Native recording................................................. 38
Native VFR Recording........................................ 39
NEAR END CANCEL........................................ 145
NiCd14 END..................................................... 145
NiCd14 NEAR................................................... 145
Normal Recording.............................................. 37
Normal speed playback..................................... 47
NP-L7 NEAR..................................................... 145
O
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
One-clip recording (ONE CLIP REC)................. 44
ONE CLIP REC................................................. 139
ONE SHOT TIME.............................................. 139
One-shot recording (ONE SHOT REC)............... 43
OPERATION...................................................... 148
OPTION MENU screen..................................... 148
OTHER DISPLAY.............................................. 144
OTHER FUNCTIONS screen............................ 147
OUTPUT SEL screen........................................ 142
overcranking effects........................................... 41
P
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
P2 Cards
Formatting................................................... 123
Inserting........................................................ 31
Prevent Accidental Erasure.......................... 32
Recording times............................................ 33
Removing...................................................... 31
Status............................................................ 32
Status Display............................................... 81
Writing back................................................ 153
P2CARD REMAIN............................................. 144
PAG L95 NEAR................................................. 145
PC MODE......................................................... 137
PC MODE SELECT........................................... 137
playback............................................................. 47
Playing back..................................................... 113
PREREC MODE................................................ 139
Pre-recording...................................................... 42
PROPAC14 NEAR............................................. 144
Properties......................................................... 125
PROXY........................................................ 45, 123
pull-down recording........................................... 38
R
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
R.MIC CH1 LEVEL............................................ 141
R.MIC CH2 LEVEL............................................ 141
R.MIC POWER.................................................. 141
Rain Cover........................................................ 107
REC COUNTER................................................ 144
REC FORMAT................................................... 135
167
Chapter 10 Index
MENU KNEE................................................................ 134
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
Microphone....................................................... 104
MID GAIN......................................................... 137
MODE CHECK.................................................... 81
MODEL NAME.................................................. 148
MONITOR SELECT........................................... 141
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
REC FUNCTION............................................... 138
REC REVIEW Function....................................... 46
REC SIGNAL.................................................... 135
Reconnection................................................... 118
Recording formats.............................................. 49
Recording functions...................................... 42,49
Recording level................................................... 62
RECORDING SETUP screen............................ 138
remote control................................................... 109
Restoring.......................................................... 118
RET SW............................................................. 138
S
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
Chapter 10 Index
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
168
Safety zone markers........................................... 82
SAFETY ZONE.................................................. 143
SCAN REVERSE............................................... 136
Scene File........................................................... 91
SCENE FILE...................................................... 146
Scene File Data.................................................. 91
SCENE FILE screen.......................................... 133
SD CARD FORMAT........................................... 146
SD memory cards
Format................................................... 90, 124
Formatting, Writing and Reading.................. 90
Handling....................................................... 90
Insert............................................................. 90
Remove......................................................... 90
Status Display............................................. 128
SDI EDH........................................................... 142
SDI METADATA................................................. 142
SDI SELECT...................................................... 142
SEEK SELECT.................................................. 147
SELF SHOOT.................................................... 143
Self-portrait Shooting.......................................... 86
SERIAL NO....................................................... 148
SETUP.............................................................. 136
SHADING (USER)............................................. 146
SHADING SELECT........................................... 146
Shooting............................................................. 36
Shot Marker (SHOT MARK)................................ 46
Shoulder Strap.................................................. 106
Shutter Mode...................................................... 58
Shutter Speed..................................................... 58
SKIN TONE DTL............................................... 134
Specifications................................................... 170
Standard VFR recording..................................... 39
START DELAY................................................... 139
START TEXT MEMO.......................................... 139
SW MODE screen............................................. 137
SYNC SCAN DISP............................................ 143
SYNCHRO SCAN............................................... 59
SYNCHRO SCAN............................................. 133
SYSTEM MODE................................................ 135
SYSTEM SETUP screen.................................... 135
T
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
TC MODE......................................................... 139
TC OUT............................................................. 142
TC VIDEO SYNCHRO....................................... 142
TEST TONE....................................................... 141
Text Memo ......................................................... 46
THUMBNAIL..................................................... 110
Thumbnail
Changing.................................................... 115
menu........................................................... 110
Selecting..................................................... 113
Switching.................................................... 114
Time Code.......................................................... 69
Time Data........................................................... 64
Time zone........................................................... 29
TIME ZONE....................................................... 147
TRIMPAC14 NEAR............................................ 144
Tripod................................................................ 106
TYPE A END..................................................... 145
TYPE A FULL.................................................... 145
TYPE A NEAR................................................... 145
TYPE B END..................................................... 145
TYPE B FULL.................................................... 145
TYPE B NEAR................................................... 145
U
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
UB MODE......................................................... 139
undercranking effects......................................... 41
Updating........................................................... 165
USB
device mode............................................... 149
host mode................................................... 150
User bits............................................................. 64
USER buttons..................................................... 61
USER CLIP NAME............................................ 121
USER FILE........................................................ 146
USER MAIN...................................................... 138
USER1.............................................................. 138
USER2.............................................................. 138
V
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
V DETAIL FREQ................................................ 135
V DETAIL LEVEL............................................... 133
Variable Frame Rate (VFR)................................. 39
Variable Speed Playback................................... 47
VERSION.......................................................... 148
VFR................................................................... 133
VIDEO OUT CHAR........................................... 142
VIDEO OUT ZEBRA.......................................... 142
Viewfinder
Adjusting....................................................... 87
screen displays............................................. 75
Setting up...................................................... 87
Status Displays............................................. 74
W
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
W.BAL.PRESET................................................. 137
Warning System................................................ 161
warnings............................................................. 78
Waveform monitor............................................... 86
WFM................................................................. 138
White Balance.................................................... 55
White Shading Compensation.......................... 100
wireless receiver............................................... 104
WIRELESS TYPE............................................... 141
WIRELESS WARN............................................. 141
Z
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
Zebra pattern...................................................... 83
ZEBRA1 DETECT............................................. 143
ZEBRA2............................................................ 143
ZEBRA2 DETECT............................................. 143
ZOOM............................................................... 144
Chapter 10 Index
169
Chapter 11 Specifications
Dimensions and specifications
Dimensions
441 mm (17-3/8 inches)
251 mm
(9-7/8
inches)
343 mm (3-1/2 inches)
150 mm (5-7/8 inches)
Chapter 11 Specifications
246 mm
(9-11/16
inches)
Specifications
General
Power supply:
DC12 V (11 V to 17 V)
Power consumption:
19 W (with the supplied lens, 3.2 LCD monitor)
indicates safety information.
Ambient operating
temperature/humidity:
Storage temperature:
Weight:
Dimensions:
(Camera only)
(With supplied lens)
170
0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F) / 10 % to 85 % (relative humidity)
–20 °C to 60 °C (–4 °F to 140 °F)
Approx. 3.6 kg (7.93 lb) (camera unit only)
Approx 5.0 kg (11.02 lb) (Including lens and lens hood)
246 mm (width) × 251 mm (height) × 441 mm (depth) (excluding protrusions)
9-11/16 inches (width) × 9-7/8 inches (height) × 17-3/8 inches (depth) (excluding protrusions)
246 mm (width) × 251 mm (height) × 549 mm (depth) (excluding protrusions)
9-11/16 inches (width) × 9-7/8 inches (height) × 21-5/8 inches (depth) (excluding protrusions)
Camera Unit
Pickup devices:
Lens mount:
Color separation optical
system:
ND filter:
Gain settings:
Shutter speed:
Shutter speed
(Synchro scan):
Shutter speed
(slow):
Shutter opening angle:
Frame rates:
Minimum illumination:
Horizontal resolution:
4 positions (CLEAR, 1/4ND, 1/16ND, 1/64ND)
–3/0/+3/+6/+9/+12/+24 dB
•6
0i/60p mode: 1/60 (OFF), 1/100, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 sec.
•3
0p mode: 1/30 (OFF), 1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 sec.
•2
4p mode: 1/24 (OFF), 1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 sec.
• 50i/50p mode: 1/50 (OFF), 1/60, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 sec.
• 25p mode: 1/25 (OFF), 1/50, 1/60, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 sec.
• 60i/60p mode: 1/60.0 to 1/249.8
• 30p mode: 1/30.0 to 1/249.8
• 24p mode: 1/24.0 to 1/249.8
• 50i/50p mode: 1/50.0 to 1/250.0
• 25p mode: 1/25.0 to 1/250.0
• 60i/60p mode: 1/15, 1/30
• 30p mode: 1/7.5, 1/15
• 24p mode: 1/6, 1/12
• 50i/50p mode: 1/12.5, 1/25
• 25p mode: 1/6.25, 1/12.5
3 degrees to 359.5 degrees in 0.5-degree increments
• 59.94 Hz mode:
variable 12/15/18/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/30/32/34/36/40/44/48/54/60 fps (frames per second)
• 50 Hz mode:
variable 12/15/18/20/21/22/23/24/25/26/27/28/30/32/34/37/42/45/48/50 fps (frames per second)
• F10 (2000 lx, 3200 K, 89.9 % reflectance, 1080/59.94i)
• F11 (2000 lx, 3200 K, 89.9 % reflectance, 1080/50i)
0.4 lx (F1.6, Gain +24 dB, shutter speed 1/30 sec.)
1000 TV lines or more (center)
Memory card recorder Unit
Recording media:
P2 card
Recording Formats:
AVC-Intra 100/AVC-Intra 50/DVCPRO HD/DVCPRO50/DVCPRO/DV formats switchable
Recording/Playback Time: AVC-Intra 100/DVCPRO HD:
8 GB × 1 approx. 8 min
16 GB × 1 approx. 16 min
32 GB × 1 approx. 32 min
64 GB × 1 approx. 64 min
AVC-Intra 50/DVCPRO50:
8 GB × 1 approx. 16 min
16 GB × 1 approx. 32 min
32 GB × 1 approx. 64 min
64 GB × 1 approx. 128 min
DVCPRO/DV:
8 GB × 1 approx. 32 min
16 GB × 1 approx. 64 min
32 GB × 1 approx. 128 min
64 GB × 1 approx. 256 min
The times listed above can be continuously recorded as one clip. The number of recording
clips will reduce the above figures somewhat.
Recorded video signals:
• 59.94 Hz mode (1080-59.94i, 720-59.94P, 480-59.94i)
1080/59.94i, 1080/29.97p, 1080/29.97pN, 1080/23.98p, 1080/23.98pA, 1080/23.98pN,
720/59.94p, 720/29.97p, 720/29.97pN, 720/23.98p, 720/23.98pN, 480/59.94i, 480/29.97p,
480/23.98p, 480/23.98pA
• 50 Hz mode (1080-50i, 720-50P, 576-50i)
1080/50i, 1080/25p, 1080/25pN, 720/50p, 720/25p, 720/25pN, 576/50i, 576/25p
171
Chapter 11 Specifications
Sensitivity:
1/3-inch progressive, 2.2-megapixel, 3MOS sensor
1/3-inch bayonet type
Prism system
Digital video Unit
Sampling Frequency:
Quantizing:
Video Compression Format:
AVC-Intra 100/DVCPRO HD:
Y: 74.1758 MHz, PB/PR: 37.0879 MHz (59.94 Hz)
Y: 74.2500 MHz, PB/PR: 37.1250 MHz (50 Hz)
DVCPRO50:
Y: 13.5 MHz, PB/PR: 6.75 MHz
DVCPRO:
Y: 13.5 MHz, PB/PR: 3.375 MHz
AVC-Intra 100/AVC-Intra 50: 10 bits
DVCPRO HD/DVCPRO50/DVCPRO/DV: 8 bits
AVC-Intra 100/AVC-Intra 50:
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 Intra Profile
DVCPRO HD:
DV-Based Compression (SMPTE 370M)
DVCPRO50/DVCPRO:
DV-Based Compression (SMPTE 314M)
DV:
DV Compression (IEC 61834-2)
Digital audio Unit
Audio Recording Signal:
Chapter 11 Specifications
Head room:
AVC-Intra 100/AVC-Intra 50/DVCPRO HD:
48 kHz/16 bits, 4CH
DVCPRO50:
48 kHz/16 bits, 4CH
DVCPRO/DV:
48 kHz/16 bits, 2CH/4CH switchable
20 dB/18 dB Menu selectable
Video Input/Output Unit
GEN LOCK IN:
VIDEO OUT:
SDI OUT:
BNC × 1, 1.0 V [P-P], 75 Ω
BNC × 1, 1.0 V [P-P], 75 Ω
• BNC × 2, 0.8 V [P-P], 75 Ω
• HD/SD switching via menu
Audio Input/Output Unit
MIC IN:
AUDIO IN:
WIRELESS:
AUDIO OUT:
Earphone:
Internal speaker:
172
• XLR, 3-pin
• + 48 V (available)
• available menu selections: –40 dBu/–50 dBu/–60 dBu
• XLR × 2, 3-pin (CH1, CH2)
• LINE/MIC / + 48 V (selectable)
• LINE: 0 dBu
• MIC: available menu selections: –50 dBu/–60 dBu
25-pin, D-SUB, –40 dBu
Pin jack × 2 (CH 1, CH 2), Output: 316 mV, 600 Ω
ø3.5 mm stereo mini jack × 1
28 mm diameter × 1
Other Input/Output Unit
TC IN:
TC OUT:
IEEE1394:
DC IN:
DC OUT:
REMOTE:
LENS:
USB2.0 (DEVICE):
USB2.0 (HOST):
BNC × 1, 0.5 V [P-P] to 8 V [P-P], 10 kΩ
BNC × 1, low impedance, 2.0 V ± 0.5 V [P-P]
6 pins, digital input/output (compliant with IEEE1394)
XLR × 1, 4 pins, DC 12 V (11.0 V to 17.0 V)
4 pins, DC 12 V (11.0 V to 17.0 V), Maximum rated current: 1.5 A
10 pins
12 pins
Type-B, 4 pin USB (compliant with USB ver. 2.0)
Type-A, 4 pin USB (compliant with USB ver. 2.0)
LCD Monitor Unit
LCD monitor:
3.2 inch color LCD monitor with approx. 921,000 dots (16:9)
Viewfinder Unit
LCD monitor:
0.45 inch color LCD monitor with approx. 1,226,000 dots (16:9)
Chapter 11 Specifications
P2HD 5 Year Warranty Repair Program*1
Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic P2HD device.
Register as a user for this device to receive a special service warranty up to five years of free warranty repairs.
Customers who register as users on the website will receive an extended warranty repair valid for up to
five years.
1st year
P2HD device*2
2nd year
Basic warranty*3
3rd year
4th year
5th year*5
Extended warranty repair*4
*1: Please note that this extended warranty is not available in some countries/regions. *2: Not all models eligible for extended
warranty coverage. *3: The basic warranty period may vary depending on the country/region. *4: Not all repair work is covered by
this extended warranty. *5: The maximum warranty period may be adjusted depending on the number of hours the device has been
used.
Free 5 years of Warranty Repairs
Purchase
P2 product
Register online
within 1 month
“Registration Notice”
e-mail sent
Details about user registration and the extended warranty:
Make sure to save the “Registration Notice” e-mail
during the warranty period.
http://panasonic.biz/sav/pass_e
Please note, this is a site that is not maintained by Panasonic Canada Inc. The Panasonic Canada Inc. privacy policy does not apply and is not applicable in relation to any
information submitted. This link is provided to you for convenience.
Programme de réparations sous garantie pendant 5 ans pour un P2HD*1 173
Nous vous remercions d’avoir choisi cet appareil Panasonic P2HD.
Connector signal description
DC IN
1
2
3
4
REMOTE
GND
NC
NC
+12 V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Panasonic Part No. K1AA104H0038
Manufacturer Part No. HA16RX-4P (SW1) (76)
(Hirose Electric Co.)
Panasonic Part No. K1AY110JA001
Manufacturer Part No. HR10A-10R-10SC (71)
(Hirose Electric Co.)
4
1
2
CAM DATA (H)
CAM DATA (C)
CAM CONT (H)
CAM CONT (C)
R/C ON
R/C VIDEO OUT
R/C VIDEO GND
NC
UNREG +12 V (Max 0.6 A)
GND
3
8
7
NOTE
Be sure to use correct polarity when using external power
supplies.
1
10
2
9
3
6
4
5
Chapter 11 Specifications
FRONT MIC IN
1
2
3
GND
AUDIO IN (H)
AUDIO IN (C)
Panasonic Part No. K1AY103A0001
Manufacturer Part No. HA16PRM-35G (72)
(Hirose Electric Co.)
PUSH
2
DC OUT
1
2
3
4
GND
R TALLY (open collector)
REC SW
UNREG +12 V (Max 1.5 A)
Panasonic Part No. K1AY104J0001
Manufacturer Part No. HR10A-7R-4SC (73)
(Hirose Electric Co.)
1
3
AUDIO IN
1
2
3
GND
AUDIO IN (H)
AUDIO IN (C)
Panasonic Part No. K1AY103A0001
Manufacturer Part No. HA16PRM-3SG (72)
(Hirose Electric Co.)
PUSH
2
1
3
174
4
1
3
2
LENS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
RET-SW
REC
GND
IRIS-AUTO
IRIS-CONT
UNREG +12 V (Max 0.4 A)
IRIS-POSI
IRIS-G-MAX
EXT-POSI
ZOOM-POSI
FOCUS-POSI
SPARE
Panasonic Parts No. K1AY112JA001
Manufacturer Part No. HR10A-10R-12SC (71)
(Hirose Electric Co.)
9
8
7
1
2
10
12
11
4
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
3
16
5
17
Panasonic Parts No. K1GB25A00010
Manufacturer Parts No. HDBB-25S (05)
(Hirose Electric Co.)
13
25
1
14
175
Chapter 11 Specifications
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Wireless receiver interface
CH-1 SHIELD
GND
CH-1 HOT
Audio input from a wireless
receiver: CH1 HOT
CH-1 COLD
Audio input from a wireless
receiver: CH1 COLD
GND
GND
UNREG +12 V
Power supply for a wireless
receiver
RX ON
Remote power output to a wireless
receiver.
RF WARN
RF warning input from a wireless
receiver
RM5
Not used
RM4
Not used
SPARE 1
Not used
SPARE 2
Not used
EXT CLK
Not used
CLK SHIELD
Not used
CH-2 SHIELD
GND
CH-2 HOT
Audio input from a wireless
receiver: CH2 HOT
CH-2 COLD
Audio input from a wireless
receiver: CH2 COLD
+5.6 V
Power supply for a wireless
receiver
VIDEO OUT
Not used
VIDEO RET
Not used
VIDEO EN
Not used
RM1 (RM CLK)
Not used
RM2 (RM DATA)
Not used
RM3 (RM WR)
Not used
RM +5 V
Not used
RM GND
Not used
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic
products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection
points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.
By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential
negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.
For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality,
your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national legislation.
For business users in the European Union
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.
Cd
Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local
authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the
Directive for the chemical involved.
2010
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement